iiiiii ,:i;. iliis ill Hi !![>""• ssm WM Botanical Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense. VOLUME VII FEBRUARY, 1921-APRIL, 1921 PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. BALTIMORE, U. S. A. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY 1921 )(6 nsLt Copyright, 1921 Williams & Wilkins Company Baltimore, U. S. A. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL {Tht Members of the Executive Committee for 1921 are indicated by asterisks) American Association for tlie Advancement of Science, Section G. R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. B. E. Livingston, Jolins Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Gleason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Botanical Society of America, Physiologi- cal Section. Otis F. Curtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. *B. M. Duggar (Chairman of the Board), Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. Marshall A. Howe, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. Kauffman, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Bruce Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, L. I., New York. Ecological Society of America. H. L. Shantz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. *Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory, Paleontological Society of America. Arthur Hollick, 61 Wall Street, New Brighton, New York. E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. American Society of Agronomy. C. B. Hutchinson, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee. Society for Horticultural Science. V. R. Gardner, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri. E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin, Madison, W^isconsin. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin, Madison, W^isconsin. *DoNALD Reddick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Society of American Foresters. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Wash- ington, D. C. J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W. P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. Dickson, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. At large. W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C 111 BOARD OF EDITORS AND ASSISTANT EDITORS FOR VOLUME VII Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore Associate, Lon A. Hawkins U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Bibliography, Biography, and History. Neil E. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred GuNDERSEN, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, Uni- versity of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. CowLES, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael ZoN, U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. Hofmann, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Experi- ment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsyl- vania State College, State College, Penn- sylvania. Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, West Virginia University, Morgantown, West Virgmia. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Mary- land. — Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre- LEASE, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Con- necticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N Transeau, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexander W. Evans, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes. H. M. FiTZPATRicK, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.— Assistant Editor, Carlos E. Chardon, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agri- cultural College, East Lansing, Michi- gan. — Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lansing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. — Assistant Edi- tor, E. N. Gathercoal, 701 South Wood Street, Chicago, Illinois. Physiology. B. M. Dugqar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editorj F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical Gar- den, St. Louis, Missouri. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1921 J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BucKMAN R. Hosmer W. H. Chandler L. Knudson A. J. Eames E. G. Montgomery R. A. Emerson D. Reddick H. M. Fitzpatrick L. W. Sharp K. M.Wiegand R. S. Harris, Secretary iv CONTENTS The Societies Represented and the Members of the Board of Control Page iii The Board of Editors and Assistant Editors for Volume VII Page iv Sections: Agronomy Entries 1-63, 566-684, 1528-1588 Bibliography, Biography, and History Entries 64-76, 685-710, 158&-1606 Botanical Education Entries 77-99, 711-718, 1607-1610 Cytology Entries 719-739, 1611-1617 Forestry and Forest Botany Entries 100-156, 740-838, 1618-1667 Genetics Entries 157-249, 839-943, 1668-1854 Horticulture: Fruits and General Horticulture Entries 250-291, 944-1009, 1885-1945 Floriculture and Ornamental Horticulture Entries 292-311, 1010-1025, 1855-1884 Vegetable Culture Entries 312-313, 1026-1035, 1946-1953 Horticultural Products Entries 314-315, 1036-1047, 1954-1956 Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants Entries 31&-337, 1048-1077, 1957-1967 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes Entries 338-354, 1078-1096, 1968-1977 Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes: Fungi Entries 355-370, 1978-1991 Lichens Entries 371-372, 1992-1995 Bacteria Entries 373-377, 1996-2001 Myxomycetes Entries 2002-2004 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History Entries 378-395, 1097-1124, 2005-2016 Pathology : Plant Disease Survey (Reports of Disease Occurrence and Severity) Entries 1125- 1138, 2017-2020 The Pathogene (Biology, Infection Phenomena, Dispersal) Entries 1139-1149, 2021-2028 The Host (Resistance, Susceptibility, Morbid Anatomy, and Physiology) Entries 1150-1167, 2029-2031 Descriptive Plant Pathology Entries 1168-1213, 2032-2049 Eradication and Control Entries 1214-1255, 2050-2061 Regulatory Measures Entries 1256-1259 Miscellaneous (Methods, Cognate Researches, etc.). .Entries 1260-1275, 2062-2074 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy Entries 1276-1289, 2075-2111 Physiology : General Entries 396-400, 2112 Protoplasm, Motility Entries 1290-1291, 2113-2114 Diffusion, Permeability, Adsorption Entries 1292-1296, 2115-2117 Water Relations Entries 1297-1298, 2118-2119 Mineral Nutrients Entries 401-406, 1299, 2120-2126 Photosynthesis Entries 1300-1301, 2127-2131 Metabolism (General) Entries 407-419, 1302-1328, 2132-2141 Metabolism (Nitrogen Relations) Entries 1329-1336, 2142-2145 Metabolism (Enzymes, Fermentation) Entries 420-421, 1337-1351, 214&-2153 Metabolism (Respiration) Entries 1352-1354 Organism as a Whole Entries 422-426, 1355-1358, 2154-2156 Growth, Development, Reproduction Entries 427-430, 1359-1363, 2157-2162 Movements of Growth and Turgor Changes Entries 431, 1364-1366, 2163-2166 Germination, Renewal of Activity Entries 432-433, 1367-1368 V VI CONTENTS Temperature Relations Entries 434-435, 1369-1370, 2167 Radiant Energy Relations Entries 436-437, 1371-1373, 2168-2171 Toxic Agents Entries 438-440, 1374-1378, 2172-2174 Physiology of Disease Entries 441-442, 1379 Miscellaneous Entries 443-446, 1380-1385, 2175-2176 Soil Science: General Entries 1386-1397, 2177-2180 Soil Acidity Entries 447-450, 1398-1401 Influence of Biological Agents Entries 451-456, 1402-1407, 2181-2184 Fertility Studies Entries 457-467, 2185-2189 Fertilization Entries 1408-1413 Fertilizer Resources Entries 1414-1420 Moisture Relations Entries 468-472 Peat Entries 473^76 Miscellaneous Entries 477-480 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants: General Entries 481-496 Spermatophytes Entries 503-551, 1421-1498, 2190-2259 Pteridophytes Entries 497-502 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications Entries 552-565, 1499-1527, 2260-2271 Index to Authors' Names appearing in Volume VII Pa^e 335 ERRATA Volume VII Entry 29. For Gerome read Gerome. Entry 72. For Morris, J. C. read Morris, Daniel. Entry 169. For Brierly, W. G. read Brierley, W. G. Entry 263. For Gunliffe read Cunliffe. Entry 357. For Brierly, W. B. read Brierley, W. B. Entry 358. For Brierly, William B. read Brierley, William B. Entry 783. For Flury, Philip read Flury, Philipp. Entry 783. For Gebierte read Gebiete. Entry 784. For Gebierte read Gebiete. Entry 785. For Bikar read Bihar. ■ Entry 1564. For Mendes, F. C. Correa read Correa Mendes, F, C. Cover page, Vol. 7, No. 2. For Schantz read Shantz. N^ Vol. VII FEBRUARY, 1921 ENTRIES 1-565 No. 1 Botanical Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing manj' societies interested in plants. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL (The Executite Committee for t9t0 are indicated ly aateriakt) American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. •B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. A. F. Blakeslee, Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island, New York. Botanical Society of America, General Section. B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. •R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. Botanical Society of America, Physiology Section. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. W. J. V. OsTERHOUT, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, Bronx Park, New York City. A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. American Society of Naturalists. J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island, New York. E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey Institution, Forest Hills, Boston, Massachusetts. Ecological Society of America. Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory, Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. •Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut. At large. W. A.Orton.U.S. try, Washington Paleontological Society of America. E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. F. H. K.vowlton, U. S. National Museum, Wa.shington, D. C. American Society of Agronomy. C. A- MooERS, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee. E. Cr. Montgomery, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Socieh' for Horticultural Science. *E. J. Kr.\us, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. W. A. McCuE, Delaware Agricultural Experiment Station, Newark, Dela- ware. American Phytopathological Society. *DoNALD Reddick {Chairman of the Board), Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. Society of American Foresters. J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy, Mount Alto, Pennsylvania. Barrington Moore, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Henry Kraemer, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. WoRTLEY F. RxJDD, Mcdical College, Rich- mond, Virginia. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. Bureau of Plant Indus- , D. C. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY BALTIMORE, U. S. A. Entered as Becond-claes matter, November 9, 1918, at the post ofiBce at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of March 3, 1879 Copyright 1921, Williame & Wilkins Company Price, net postpaid, per volume $3.00 United States, Mexico, Cuba Canada Other countries r$3.00 s: < S3.12 i $3.25 CONTENTS Agronomy 1-63 Bibliography, Biography and History 64-76 Botanical Education 77-99 Forest Botany and Forestry 100-156 Genetics 157-249 Horticulture 250-315 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 316-337 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 338-354 Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 355-377 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 378-395 Physiology . 396- 446 Soil Science 447-480 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 481-551 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 552-565 BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920 AND ASSISTANT EDITORS Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore Associate, Lon A. Hawkins U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Bdrr, XJ. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, DC. Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W. Riddle, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa- chusetts. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred Gdndersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Brtan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The ' University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon. U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. HoPMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex- periment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn- sylvania. Horticulture. J. H. Gourlet, West Virginia Univer- sity, Morgantown, West Virginia. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan- town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E._N. Tranbbad. Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandeb W. Evans. Yale University. New Haven. Conne cticut . Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W, Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans- ing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W. YouNGKEN, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science ,Philadelphia,Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor, E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana, Illinois. Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, F. M. ScBERTZ, U.S.Bureauof Plant Industry, Wash- ington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis- souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920 J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BucKMAN L. Knudson W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery A.J. Eames D. Reddick R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp H. M. FrrzPATRiCK K. M. Wiegand R. Hosmer BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense. . IRUAW UNDER THE DIRECTION OF NEW VOR?: THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.BOTANJC'^.- Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland Vol. VII FEBRUARY, 1921 No. 1 ENTRIES 1-565 AGRONOMY C. V. Piper, Editor Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor \. Anonymous. Planteavlen i 1919. [Plant production in 1919.] Tidsskr. Landoko- nomi (Kjobenhavn) 1920:' 2S4-298. 1920.— During the last two years of the world war and the first year following the war, the shortage of grass seed and red clover seed was acute, resulting in a greatly decreased acreage of grass and clover during 1919. The opinion is ventured that the decrease is temporarj^, since heavy importation of seed was received from the United States during the spring of 1920. As compared with pre-war planting, the 1919 acreage of wheat was decreased; rye was about the same; barley was increased slightly; sugar beets were increased about 20 per cent; potatoes about 35 per cent; and the area planted to vege- tables was considerably increased. The harvest of 1919 is described; it is stated to have averaged about 107 per cent of normal. — Albert A. Hansen. 2. Anonymous. Cultivation of main crop potatoes. Jour Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 217- 227. 1920. 3. Anonymous. Field experiments, 1919. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 167-174. 1920. — Summarizes results of variety tests made in Ireland with barley, mangels, oats, pota- toes, turnips, and wheat. — Donald Folsom. 4. Anonymous. Notes. Nature 105:80-81. 1920.— Note on organization of British Empire Sugar Research Association to further the development of the industry. — 0. A. Stevens. 5. Anonymous. American books on agriculture. [Rev. of : Gehrs, John H. Productive agriculture, xii + 426 p. Macmillan & Co.: London, 1917.] Nature 104: 495-496. 1920.— A textbook for "school children of the upper classes who propose to take up farming as the business of their lives." — O. A. Stevens. 6. Anonymous. Sulphur as a fertilizer for wheat. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 462. 1920. — Results of 4 years' trials at Cowra gave negative results. — L. R. Waldron. 7. Anonymous. Applied plant morphology. [Rev. of: Barber, C. A. Studies in Indian »- sugar canes. Mem. Dept. Agric. India Bot. Ser. 10: 39-153. 1919.] Nature 104: 578. 1920. ^ — A study of the underground branching of the plant of wild and cultivated forms of sugar : — cane and an attempt to correlate morphological characters with economic values. This is referred to as the fourth paper on the Indian sugar canes. — 0. A. Stevens. ^ 1 " . '^ BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. vn, NO. 1 2 AGRONOMY Box. Absts., Vol. VII, • 8. Anonymous. (Reichs ausschuss fur Ole und Fette.) Zur Frage des Anbaues und der Akklimatissation der Soja in Deutschland. [Concerning the cultivation and the acclima- tization of the soy bean in Germany.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:3&-38. 1920. — The bureau of fats and oils in its search for new fats and oils since the war made a thorough study of the advisabilty of introducing the soy bean on a large scale, but has reached the conclusion that regardless of its longer vegetative period, it does not approach in yield the common dwarf bean (Phaseolus nanus). Late ripening crops of the soy bean developed very little or no seed at all. There is little hope that further experimentation in cultivating and breeding will result in producing a soy bean ripening early enough and producing large enough yields to make its planting in the most favorable parts of Germany a success. — J. Roeser. 9. Anonymous. Cane experiment in St. Croix. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 180, 181, 196. 1920. — A review of the work done with sugar cane at the Slob Experimental Station during 1919-20, as reported by Eduard Gedde, manager. Results of experiments show that it is advantageous to plant canes equal distances apart in both directions. Cane planting experiments with cuttings obtained from plant, first, and second ratoon canes, gave results in favour of those taken from first ratoons, since these gave 4 tons more per acre than those from plant canes and llf tons more than those from second ratoons. Carefully conducted comparative experiments with planting cane in flat and banked plats gave results in favor of the former from the points of view of yield and of cultivation costs. — J. S. Dash. 10. Anonymous. Agriculture and industries in the Turks and Caicos Islands. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 3. 1920. — This is a review of G. W. Smith's 1918 report as Commis- sioner for the Turks and Caicos Islands. Mention is made of the introduction into the colony of seeds of both Sea Island and Upland strains of cotton which were brought by set- tlers from the United States who were granted lands there by the British Government after the American War of Independence. Never cultivated, plants from these seeds were allowed to grow at will in waste places near the settlements "Where amid cactus shrub they pursued for over a century a struggle for existence, evolving eventually a type of cotton plant that for hardiness, freedom from disease and heavy cropping qualities, under almost unbelievable conditions of sterility and neglect, cannot, it is believed, be surpassed anywhere." — J. S. Dash. 11. Anonymous. Seedling canes experimented with in Antigua in 1919. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 7. 1920. — In this review of a report on sugar cane presented to the Agricul- tural and Commercial Society by A. E. Collens, it is stated that the White Transparent is the variety most cultivated. As plant cane, its calculated yield for 1919 was 15.45 tons of cane per acre; and as ratoons, 12.06 tons. The calculated sucrose content was 2.11 pounds, and 1.99 pounds per gallon of juice, respectively. In the experiments, B. 6308 came first as plant cane with an average of 23.4 tons of cane per acre and 2.08 pounds sucrose per gallon. The best ratooning cane was found to be B. 10650. — J. S. Dash. 12. Atkinson, Esmond. Weeds and their identification. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 168-171. 1 pi. 1920. — This article deals with perennial Sow Thistle (Sonchus arvensis). The plant and its habits are described. It has been in New Zealand for many years. It need not be considered serious in pastures, as sheep eat it readily. In cultivated land the weed may be eradicated by the use of a smothering crop, such as oats and tares, or Wearora vetchling; or the land may be put into grass for a couple of years. — N. J. Giddings. 13. Breakwell, E. Improvement of sweet sorghimis. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:549-551. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 168. 14. Breakwell, E. Popular description of grasses. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 507-512. 2 fig. 1920. — Deals with the introduced Chloris grasses and describes in some detail the agronomic relations of Rhodes grass (Chloris gayana). The annual C. virgata is not considered of much economic importance. — L. R. Waldron. No. 1, February, 1921] AGRONOMY 3 15. Brown, Ernest B. Relative yields from broken and entire kernels of seed corn. Jour. Amer. See. Agron. 12: 196-197. 1920.— A lower percentage of the broken seed germi- nated, and the seedlings were weaker than those produced by whole kernels. In weight of ear and yield per plant the broken seed produced consistently less than did the entire seed. The broken seed produced 7.6 bushels less per acre than did the entire seed.— F. M. Schertz. 16. Bruce, J. L. Rotation of crops. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:94-96. 1920.— A 6-year rotation for dairj- farms is suggested. This included 3 years in grass; 1 year in roots; 1 year in flax, barley, beans, potatoes, linseed, etc.; and 1 year in oats and tares.— iV. J. Giddings. 17. C, C. The roast beef of old England. [Rev. of: Mackenzie, R. J. J. Cattle and the future of beef production in England. With a preface and chapter by F. H. R. Marshall. xi^-168 p. University Press. Cambridge, 1919)]. Nature 105:62-63. 1920.— Author considers a supply of prime beef necessary to a sound system of agriculture. The increase of plow-land at expense of grass-land during the war is now in process of reversal, and this may proceed at an increasing rate unless there is evidence of greater profit in crops other than grass. — 0. A. Stevens. 18. Calvino, Mario. Estudio sobre el cultivo de la soya en Cuba. (A study regarding the cultivation of the soy bean in Cuba.) Rev. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] 3: 124-131. 9 fig. 1920.— Trials of 13 varieties of soy beans {Soja max L.) are described with reference to germi- nation, time of emergence, length of growing season, yield and nutritive value.— i^*. M. Blodgett. 19. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock— grassland of New Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 82-94. // fi^. 1920.— Several depleted areas which have been protected by rabbit-proof fences are showing great improvement. A reasonable amount of pasturing apparently does not interfere with the regeneration. Valuable forage grasses spread from the tussocks, and many seedling plants soon develop. The plants found in these areas are listed. — ^V. /. Giddings. 20. CoLWELL, W. R. Under irrigation with bore water. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 476-477. 2 fig. 1920. — Excellent returns were obtained from Sudan grass at the Coon- amble Experiment Farm with the assistance of irrigation from bore water.— L. R. Waldron. 21. Downing, R. G. Sugar-beet growing in Victoria. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:463-465. 1920.— Summary of results showing profits made by farmers and how sugar- beet production is related to other phases of crop production.— L. R. Waldron. 22. Faber, Harald. Foreword by Sir Robert Greig. Forage crops in Denmark. ix + 100 p. Longmans, Green and Co. : London, 1920.— This volume, written in English, describes the progress that has been made in recent years in the improvement and culture of forage crops and the development of the trade in guaranteed seeds in Denmark. The book is of unusual interest to all engaged in the development and utilization of improved crops and in the betterment of the seed trade. One-half of the work is devoted to root crops. Fol- lowing the investigations of Fjord published in 1890, which showed that the dry matter in roots was equal in feeding value to grain for cows and swine, the acreage of root crops in Denmark has been increased sevenfold; namely, from 95,000 acres in 1888 to 678,000 acres in 1919. Before this time breeding of improved root crops had made considerable progress, the iniative being due both to progressive farmers and to enterprising seed firms, who later formed the "Society for the Production of Home-Grown Seed." The success achieved in developing and establishing improved strains of root crops has been remarkable, and since 1894 has been assisted by the government. The methods employed are described in detail.— The improvement of grasses in Denmark began with the work of P. Nielsen in 1869. He introduced the system of testing grasses in small duplicate plats instead of in large fields, 4 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, and in 1896 became the first director of the state experimental farm at Tystofte. With this work began the systematic testing of grass seeds of different strains and from various coun- tries, and the development of special seed farms was a subsequent outgrowth of this move- ment. Later a system was introduced of making comparative trials of lots of grass and clover seed submitted by growers and dealers. This has stimulated the selection of special high-yielding strains, especially of grasses and of white clover, of which the Mors strain is best. In the trials, samples of orchard grass (cocksfoot), Italian rye-grass, meadow fescue, tall oat-grass, timothy, red clover, white clover, and bird's-foot trefoil were tested. So far as reported, the native Danish strains were in every case the best. — The last chapter is devoted to the development of trade in guaranteed seeds. This again was initiated by farmers and seedsmen, but later its control was taken over by the government. The success of the whole movement is indicated not only by the much increased acreage of high-yielding forage crops, but also by the fact that Denmark now exports much seed, while formerly it was a large importer. — C. V. Piper. 23. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. [Restrictive legislation and notices of quarantines in U. S. A.] Service and Regulatory Announcements 68: 52-111. 1920. 24. Fisher, M. L. The dormant period of timothy seed after harvesting. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 276-279. 1920. — Reports in 2 tables results of timothy seed germination. After 25 days the germinating percentage of seeds from individual heads averaged 98.2 per cent while in mass selections it was 88 per cent. Three or 4 weeks after harvesting, timothy seed has reached its maximum germinating power. — F. A. Anderson. 25. FuRBY, E. Wheat experiments for hay. Yanco experiment farm, 1919. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 467-471. 1920. — Several standard varieties of wheat were used. Early sowing gave best results. — L. R. Waldron. 26. Gasser, G. W. Report of the work at Rampart station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp' Sta. 1917: 34-57. PI. S-4- 1919. — Reports on the behavior of alfalfa {Medicago falcata and M. sativa), bird vetch (Vicia cracca), field peas, chick pea (Cicer arietinum), clover {Trifo- Uum pratense and T. lupinaster), winter and spring wheat, winter and spring rye, barley, oats, buckwheat, hemp, millet, flax, and potatoes. Nearly all the winter wheat was killed by freezing, but rye was not. Spring rye matured too late. Barley, oats, and most varie- ties of spring wheat matured well. This station is devoted chiefly to grain breeding, and a large proportion of the varieties grown originated here. Two fruits — the first grown in the interior of Alaska — were produced on a Siberian Crab tree. Strawberries of varieties bred at Sitka have survived several winters and have fruited abundantly. Reports are also given on garden vegetables and annual flowering plants. — J. P. Anderson. 27. Georgeson, C. C. Reports from seed and plant distribution. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 86-90. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 269. 28. Georgeson, C. C. Summary of the work at the several stations. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 5-33. 2 pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 270. 29. G^rome, J. Essais de culture de Pommes de terre avec des tubercules appauvris ou anormaux (1919). [An experiment.in growing potatoes from depauperate or abnormal tubers.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 677-681. 1919.— Results of this experiment in the vicinity of Paris with 9 varieties are given in tabular form. "Early rose" proved most satisfactory, and "Up to date" and "Prime bretonne" gave encouraging results. — E. B. Payson. 30. Hamblin, C. O. To infect lucerne seed with nodule organism. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:466. 1920. — Recommends using soil from an old lucerne (alfalfa) field, allowing the soil to dry well in the shade. The author states that the bacteria from artificial (laboratory) cultures are weaker than those produced under natural conditions. — L. R. Waldron. No. 1, February, 1921] AGRONOMY 31. Hanly, Joseph. Some notes on crop rotations. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 184- 189. 1920. — Discusses crop rotation in regard to its historical development, its advantages, and the types practiced in Ireland. — Donald Folsom. 32. Harlan, Harry V. Smooth-awned barleys. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:205-208. 1920. — A report on the introduction of smooth-awned barley and the progress that has been made. It is predicted that a high-yielding smooth-awned barley will be developed. — F. M. Schertz. 33. Harshberger, Johx W. Text-book of pastoral and agricultural botany for the study of the injurious and useful plants of coimtry and farm, ix + 294 p., 1 pL, 120 fig. P. Blakis- ton's Sons and Co. : Philadelphia, 1920. — This book is based on a course in botany given to veterinary students in the University of Pennsylvania. Nine chapters are devoted to pois- oning by plants, one to feeds and feeding, three to grasses, three to legimies, one to weeds, and one to agricultural seeds. — C. V. Piper. 34. Maidex, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 5. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:557-562. 1920. — Mainly extracts from well-known bulletins by two American authors, Hare and Griffiths, on value and methods relative to Opuntia spp. as feed for live stock. — L. R. Waldron. 35. Maughan, Howard J. Factors affecting the depth of planting various crops. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 20fr-207. 1918. 36. McCauley, C. Sudan grass in western districts. At Cowra experiment farm. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 473-475. 1920.— Detailed financial statement is given of results from 20 acres of this grass, showing it to have been very profitable. An analysis of Sudan- grass silage is given. — L. R. Waldron. 37. MooMAW, Leroy. Report for the Dickinson substation for 1919. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 138. 24 p., 6 fig. 1920.— Weather data relative to temperature, precip- itation, wind velocity, and length of growing season are presented, as well as annual and average yields of different varieties of various crops. In an excessively dry season following two dry seasons Russian thistle {Salsola kali iragiis)pToduced 5.7 tons per acre of air-dry material (hay). — L. R. Waldron. 38. Moore, C. C. Technic of potato starch manufacture. 22-23; 31: 8, 9, 20, 22-23. 1920. Potato Mag. 2'^: 10, 11, 20, 39. MoREiLLOx, M. Influence de I'ombrage sur la valeur des gazons dans les pSturages boises. [The influence of shade upon the value of the grasses in wooded pastures.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 70: 131-142. 1919. — A discussion of Swiss alpine meadows at altitudes from 1100 to 1650 meters. As a result of the shade of trees in these alpine pastures, there is not only a reduction in the percentage of good forage plants but also in the quantity of fodder harvested. Under spruce the loss in dry fodder is 88 per cent by weight and under larch at the same station from 30 to 45 per cent of that in open ground. The shade is also injurious to the qualitative value of the fodder. In Zurich and Grisons the following figures were obtained. Weights represent kilograms per are; i.e., zij acre PABCF.I.T.E PBOTEIN FAT SOLUBLE SUBSTANCES, NON- NITBOGENOU8 TOTAL Open 4.55 3.67 1.43 1.05 15.24 10.55 21 22 Shaded 15 27 6 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, In a pasture with spruce trees 20 meters apart the forage will lose 60 per cent in weight and 30 per cent in quality; its end value is therefore but 20 per cent of the end value of forage grown in full sunlight. In conclusion, specific recommendations are presented for improving the management and administration of Swiss alpine pastures.— C. /. Kraebel. 40. Murray, J. Alan. The classification of cattle foods. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:383. 1920. 41. Oldershaw, a. W. The value of lupines in the cultivation of poor light land. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 380-381. 1920. 42. Pitt, J. M. Farmers' experiment plots. 1919-20. Central Coast. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 539-547. 1920. — Experiments included variety trials, fertilizer trials, and size of seed piece, depth and rate of planting. — L. R. Waldron. 43. Porter, W. R. Thirteenth and fourteenth annual report of the state demonstration farms 1918 and 1919. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 135. 84 p., 1 fig. 1920.— Detailed results are given from 22 farms, including cost of production; a summary of results for 10 years is presented for 9 of the farms. Wheat has yielded 16.9 bushels per acre for 14 years, which is 54 per cent higher than the state average for the same period. — L. R. Waldron. 44. Pratt, Hiram E. Report of work at Kodiak live stock and breeding station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 72-81. 1919. — Reports on field and forage crops grown at the station. Twelve varieties of potato were tested. The following native plants were used for silage, beach rye (Elymus mollis), beach sedge {Car ex cryptocarpa) , bluetop {Calama- grostis langsdorffi) , and fireweed {Epilobium angustifolium) . These do not stand continual cutting well, but the yield is maintained if cutting is done only in alternate years. Native bluetop is the chief hay grass; but coarse bluegrass (Poa glumaris), Kentucky bluegrass {Poa pratensis), and wild barley (Hordeum horeale) occur mixed with bluetop, and make good hay. Analyses of Calamagrostis langsdorffi,, Carex cryptocarpa, and Elymus mollis are given and compared with such standard grasses as Poa pratensis, Agrostis alba, and Phleum pratense. — J. P. Anderson. 45. Pridham, J. T. The selection of promising wheat plants. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 548. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 234. 46. Ramsay, A. A. Sorghum as a possible source of industrial alcohol. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:479-484. 1920. — Experiments were conducted at Hawkesbury Agricultural College with different varieties of sorghum. Results are given in detail of the field data, percentage of juice expressed, its analysis, amount of alcohol produced, and composition of megass. It was found for most varieties that the market value of the alcohol obtained would not pay for the cost of cutting and transporting the cane to the factory. Even with the best variety the margin was only about Is. per ton. Production of alcohol in this manner can not be considered a feasible undertaking. — L. R. Waldron. 47. Reed, George M. Varietal resistance and susceptibility of oats to powdery mildew, crown rust, and smuts. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 37. 3-41. 1920. 48. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II. Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228:89-131. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 463. 49. Round, Lester A. Experiments with potato silage. Potato Mag. 3^:6-7, 29-31. 2 fig. 1920. No. 1, February, 1921] AGRONOMY 7 50. Shepherd, A. N. Summer green fodder trials. Murrumbridgee irrigation area, 1919- 1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 554-556. 1920. — General cultural notes for sorghum and maize grown for summer green fodder, and the yields obtained at the various places of experimentation. The heaviest yield was 25.5 tons per acre with Sorghum saccharatum following lucerne. — L. R. Waldron. 51. Snodgrass, M. D. Report of the work at Fairbanks station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 57-72. PI. 5-7. 1919. — Ninety-five acres were cropped with small grain and five acres with root crops. Nearly all the winter grain was killed by freezing. Owing to drought in May and first half of June, spring grains yielded only half as much as usual. This drought also caused uneven germination and consequent uneven ripening. Three varieties of spring wheat, 2 of oats, and 2 of barley were grown under field conditions, and larger numbers were grown in small plots or in head-to-row tests. A spring wheat originally received from Irkutsk, Siberia, in 1914, and known as H. G., is considered the best wheat for the region. Grown under different rotations and exposures, it showed considerable differences in yield. Japanese buckwheat was successfully grown. Reports are given on the behavior of field peas, alfalfa, and clover. Red clover winter kills, but grew 24-30 inches high by September 7 from spring seeding. Grains are grown for hay. Calamagrostis langsdorffi. produces the native hay. The potato is the chief money crop of the region. Results of the tests at the station are given. Some potato blight and a verj^ little scab were present. Petrowski turnip is another important crop of this region, and seed is grown and distributed by the station. Notes are given on garden vegetables and on flowers; also on strawberries, red raspberries, and native berries. Twenty-five requests for seed were filled. — J. P. Anderson. 52. Snodgrass, M. D. Cooperative work. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:84-86. 1919. — Gives report of cooperative work among the farmers of the Matanuska valley and the Anchorage-Knik region in southern Alaska. — J. P. Anderson. 53. SoMERViLLE, W. [Presidential address.] Grass. Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 364-379. 1920. — From the experiments which have been carried out, the following conclusions may be drawn: "(1) That the quality of a pasture is not primarily dependent on its botanical composition, though, as a rule, the presence of white clover, and other Leguminosae is indicative of high feeding value. (2) That poor pastures, especially on clay soil, can be rapidly and profitably improved by the use of phosphates, especially basic slag. (3) That, as a rule, phosphates alone are suflBcient to effect and maintain the improve- ment, and that, of supplementary substances, potash and lime are occasionally worthy of attention. (4) That the improvement of poor pasture is very dependent on the presence of Leguminosae, and especially of white clover. (5) That renovating with the seed of wild white clover may, in the absence of natural Leguminosae, be a necessary preliminary or con- current operation. (6) That cake can rarely be used at a profit, and that, as an agent in improving poor pasture, it occupies an unsatisfactory position. (7) That nitrogen, whether in the form of artificial manure, or as cake residues, when added to phosphates for pasture, is always unnecessary and frequently detrimental. (8) That, in the case of hay on per- manent grass land, equal weights of produce may have very different feeding values. (9) That few forms of agricultural expenditure are more certain in their results than the judicious use of manures on grass land, and that the meat and milk producing capacity of the country can be largely and rapidly increased, with great pecuniary gain to the farmer, and still greater economic advantage to the nation." — C. L. Wilson. 54. Syme, J. E. The grain wheats for central western districts. Farmers' experiment plots, 1909-1919, summarized. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:533-538. 1920.— "Federa- tion," "Marshall No. 3." "Cranberra" and "Hard Federation" did best.— L. R. Waldron. 55. Syme, J. E. In a dry season at Parkes. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 477-478. 1920. — Discusses Sudan grass and considers it valuable. — L. R. Waldron. 8 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 56. Truax, H. E. United States grades for potatoes. Potato Mag. 3i: 15. 1920. 57. Watts, George. Cotton growing in the British Empire. Nature 104: 694^696. 1920. — British mills are said to be adapted to use of American long-staple cottons and unable to use the shorter staples of India and other countries. Definite organization of a research institution is needed. The following suggestions were made: To establish in Manchester a college of cotton where experts and planters can be trained; to promote intensive study of races of all species of Gossypium, with careful records of all plantings; to establish branch colleges in the more important centers of cultivation to complete training for local condi- tions; to replace cultivation by natives on a small scale with plantations directed by trained people. Success of American cotton is attributed to the fact that the work was undertaken by intelligent farmers who evolved new and superior stocks and who did not have to contend with vested interests of native cultivators. — 0. A. Stevens. 58. Wenholz, H. Papago: A new variety of sweet corn. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:552-553. 1 fig. 1920. — Seed was secured from Arizona. The variety is said to be remarkable because of the resistance of its pollen to dry heat. It is very late, of fair quality, and promising for Australian conditions. — L. R. Waldron. 59. Wenholz, H. Sweet corn. Variety trial, 1919-1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:585-589. 1920. — Fourteen varieties were tested, the seed coming from America. They averaged in yield 487 dozen ears per acre. The best yielding was Mammoth White Cory with 850 dozen ears, weighing 5.5 tons. Varieties are described and recommendations made. — L. R. Waldron. 60. Wenholz, H. Soil improvement for maize. I. Manures and fertilizers. Agric- Gaz. New South Wales 31: 495-501. 1920. — A report of results secured from the application of commercial fertilizers, especially phosphorus, upon maize for grain and fodder in various districts of the province. Trials were made upon farmers' experiment plats. Usually the application of the phosphorus in the shape of superphosphate showed a profit. — L. R. Waldron. 61. Wenholz, H. Pop-corn variety trial, 1919-1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 562. 1920. — An average yield of 40 bushels per acre is recorded. — L. R. Waldron. 62. Wheeler, H. J. Delayed application of fertilizer. Potato Mag. 21^:5, 38. 1 fig. 1920. — Late application of fertilizer increased yield of potatoes in Wisconsin over that of unfertilized fields. — Donald Folsom. 63. ZiELSTORPP, W. Einsaiierungsversuch im Deutschen Futterturm mit anschliessen- dem Fxitterungsversuch. (Ensiling experiment in German silo with connected feeding experi- ment.) Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Gesell. 35:563-565. 1920.— A comprehensive series of experiments have been planned to determine the value of different methods of ensiling. The German farmer is chiefly interested in the ensiling of grass and clover in order to save this feed when weather conditions render it impossible to make hay. One experiment made under such conditions is described. Timothy that had already become quite old because the weather did not permit of cutting was ensiled. Feeding experiments with the ensilage produced showed that 100 kgm. of the ensilage had the same feeding value for milk cows as 170 kgm. of mangels. — A. J. Pieters. BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY Neil E. Stevens, Editor 64. Anonymous. Dansk Landbolovgivning efter 1849. [Danish farm laws since 1849.] Tidsskr. Landokonomi (Kjobenhavn) 1920': 265-283. 1920.— A discussion of the agricul- tural laws passed by the Danish legislature since 1849. Particular attention is paid to the good and bad effects which these laws have had upon the farmers. — Albert A. Hansen. No. 1, February, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 9 65. Anonymous. The New Zealand science congress, 1919. Nature 104: 516-518. 1920. A review of some papers, including presidential address of L. Cockayne, being an historical account of the institute. Notes that 654 papers on botany have been published in the first 50 volumes of transactions of the institute. — O. A. Stevens. 66. Anonymous. Publications of the staff, scholars and students of The New York Botanical Garden during the year 1919. Jour. New York Bot, Gard. 21: 65-72. 1920. 67. C, N. R. Scientific biography. [Rev. of: Bower, F. O. Joseph Dalton Hooker. 63 p. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104:562. 1920.— "Scholarly but not interesting." — 0. A. Stevens. 68. Eberhard, Julius. Die Technik der Naturverjungung sinst und jetzt. Ein forst- geschichtliche Studie. [The technique of natural reproduction formerly and now.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 161-183, 204-226. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 116. 69. Freeman, W. G. The centenary of the Royal Botanic Garden, Trinidad. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 36-37. 1920. — Sections of a paper originally contributed to the Trini- dad Guardian, are reproduced. The Garden shares with those of Calcutta and Sydney the distinction of being the only ones in the British Colonial Empire which have reached 100 years or more of unbroken activity. Some account is given of the progress of the Garden under different Curators. — J. S. Dash. 70. Gleason, H. a. Organization of the American iris society. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 39-40. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 302. 71. Luisier, a. P. Fernando Theissen, S. J. Broteria, Ser. Bot., 18: 73-78. 1920. — Father Theissen was killed early in September, 1919, by falling over a precipice while col- lecting alone near P'eldkirch, Vorarlberg. He was born in Krefeld, Rhenish Prussia, July 27, 1877. A member of the Society of Jesus, he taught first in Brazil, later in several parts of central Europe. Father Theissen was a mycologist, contributing to many journals, especially the Annales Mycologici. Thiessenula Sydow and Theissenia Maublanc, were named in his honor. — A bibliography of 51 titles and notice of a posthumous work on the lichens of Vorarlberg is appended. — E. B. Chamberlain. 72. Morris, J. C. [Presidential address.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 316-331. 1920. — A review of recent British work in pure and applied botany, such as agronomy, pathol- ogy, and genetics. The application of pure botany to questions of economic importance is presented in the development of more valuable varieties of wheat, cotton, sugar cane, and rubber, and in improving the quality of the production of cacao, flax, and other crops. A reference is made to the prominent place which ecological studies will take in the future of botany. Recent work in tropical botany receives especial emphasis. The article is in gen- eral a summing-up of the great influence of botany upon the welfare of the human race. — A necrological review is presented.— C. L. Wilson. 73. P(rain), D. James William Helenus Trail. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 378-388. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 955. 74. Small, J. K. Of grottoes and ancient dunes. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 25-38, 45-54. PL 2U-2U- 1920. 75. Th^riot, I. Vandalisme et solidarite scientifique, [Ruthlessness and scientific brotherhood.] Rec. Publ. Soc. Havraise Etudes Diverses 87: 131-135. 1920.— An account of the partial destruction and loss of the moss collections and drawings of Jules Cardot of Charleville. Quotations from Cardot's letters give an account of the state of his col- lection upon return to Charleville. The action of English and American bryologists in raising funds for the purchase of Cardot's remaining herbarium on behalf of the Museum of Paris is described. [Cf. Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2407.]—^. B. Chamberlain. 76. W., A. S. Robert Etheridge. Nature 104: 700-701. 1920.— Brief biography. Direc- tor of Australian Museum since 1895. Noted for work in palaeontology. — O. A. Stevens. 10 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, BOTANICAL EDUCATION C. Stuart Gager, Editor Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor 77. Anonymous. Awbury Arboretum. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 23-24. 1920. — Digest of article in Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia (July, 1919). Awbury Arboretum com- prises over 30 acres at Washington Lane Station, near Philadelphia. It has been endowed by Caroline E. Pope and other members of the Pope family as an arboretum and refuge for migratory birds. — C. S. Gager. 78. Anonymous. Botanical guides. [Rev. of: Cook, M. T. Applied economic botany: based upon actual agricultural and gardening projects, xviii + 261 p. J. B. Lippincott Co. : Philadelphia and London, 1919. (Farm Life Text Series.) See also Bot. Absts. 3, Entries 491.] Nature 105: 34-35. 1920. — Title is misleading; book as a whole is disappointing. — 0. A. Stevens. 79. Anonymous. Botanical guides. [Rev. of: (1) Sulman, A. E. Some familiar wild flowers, ii + 65 p. (2) Australian wild flowers, ii + 67 p. Angus and Robertson: Syd- ney (no dates). (3) Sulman, Florence. A popular guide to the wild flowers of New South Wales. Vol. 2, xxi + 2^9 p., 71 pi. Same publisher, 1919.] Nature 105: 35. 1920. SO. Anonymous. Museums and the state. Nature 105 : 68-70. 1920. — Communications from 5 persons in response to article of March 11. — 0. A. Stevens. 81. Anonymous. The state and the national museums. Nature 105:29-31. 1920. — A survey of British museums and plans for their futures. Separate museums have arisen in response to conditions rather than by a broad and general plan. Coordination is needed to enable each to fill a distinct and useful place. — 0. A. Stevens. 82. Anonymous. The value of Botanic Gardens. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 193, 194. 1920. — It is pointed out that the value of these institutions "for the advancement and diffusion of a knowledge and love of plants" has only recently been appreciated to any extent; and in small communities it has not yet been realised. The writer considers that a botanic garden contributes to the well-being of the people from the social, educational, and scientific points of view. — J. S. Dash. 83. Anonymous. Prospectus of courses offered by the Brooklyn Botanic Garden, 1920. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 1-18. 1920. 84. Anonymous. Education and research chiefly in relation to sugar and rice. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 167, 182. 1920. — In the course of a visit to Havana and New Orleans, the Scientific Assistant to the Imperial Department of Agriculture for the West Indies, W. R. DuNLOP, made a number of observations, of which an account is here given. A descrip- tion is given of the various sugar and rice experimental stations visited, and also certain of educational institutions devoted to agriculture. — J. S. Dash. 85. Anonymous. Fern study. Nat. Study Rev. 16: 235-257. 1920. — A very elementary presentation of the principal facts about the structure, growth, and life-history of ferns, with simple key and descriptions. — W. L. Eikenberry. 86. BoYNTON, K. R. Vocational education in gardening for disabled and convalescent soldiers and sailors. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21 : 87-94. 1920. 87. Brown, J. G. A new economic botany. [Rev. of: Cook, Mel T. Applied economic botany, xviii + 261 p. J. B. Lippincott Co.: Philadelphia and London, 1919.] Plant World 22: 309-311. 1919. No. 1, February, 1921] BOTANICAL EDUCATION 11 88. CowELL, Arthur Westcott. Awbury Arboretum Address, Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia 17: 98-102. July, 1919. — Gives brief outline of planting plans, which include a rose garden and a rhododendron vale. "The system of naming is that which will be found of greatest advantage to average people and students and nursery men, and the names adopted by the Committee upon Standardized Plant Names have been used. These are the terms found in most botanies and in the Cyclopedia of Horticulture." — C. S. Gager. 89. Engler, a. Bericht iiber den Botanischen Garten und das Botanische Museum zu Berlin-Dahlem. vom 1. April 1918 bis zum 31. Marz 1919. [Report on the Botanical Gar- den and Botanical Museum at Berlin.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 331-344. 1919. 90. Engler, A. Bericht uber den Botanischen Garten und das Botanische Museum zu Berlin-Dahlem. vom 1. April 1919 bis zum 31. Marz 1920. [Report on the Botanical Garden and Botanical Museum at Berlin.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 455-466. 1920. 91. G[ager], C. S. Prospects for a new national botanic garden. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 20-22. Jan., 1920. 92. Garrett, A. 0. The influence of biological investigations upon the other sciences. Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 68-77. 1918. 93. Harshberger, John W. Text-book of pastoral and agricultural botany for the study of the injurious and useful plants of country and farm, ix + 294 P-, 1 pl-, 120 fig. P. Blakis- ton's Sons & Co. : Philadelphia, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 33. 94. Karraker, P. E. Notes on the conference on elementary soil teaching, held at Lex- ington, Kentucky, June, 1920. Soil Sci. 10: 247. 1920.— The elementary work on soils should be a course of 5 semester hours credit given in the sophomore year. The minimum pre- requisites should be one year of general inorganic chemistry, one term of general geology, and high school or college physics. At least three-fifths of the time should be spent in lec- ture or recitation, and a standard textbook should be used. — W. J. Robbins. 95. Lankester, E. Ray. Museums and the state. Nature 105:100-101. 1920.— Favors separation of botany, zoology, etc. in distinct museums. The main purpose of a museum is the acquisition, preservation, and study of specimens of scientific value. Public exhibition is a secondary but important function. Materials for exhibition should be lim- ited in amount but selected and displayed to the best possible advantage. The author would like to see the system used at the American Museum of Natural History in New York introduced (in British museums) but thinks it still gives too much space to public exhibition. Part of article and two others under same title (pp. 101-102) by J. Stanley Gardiner and W. M. Tattersall relate more particularly to organization and management. — 0. A. Stevens. 96. Mangham, Sydney. Method and substance of science teaching: The neglect of bio- logical subjects in education. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:336. 1920. 97. Snyder, Ray P. The school garden as a means of education. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9:91-100. July, 1920. 98. Victorian. Popular Science. Nature 104: 630. 1920. The author agrees with review entitled Scientific Biography [See: Bower on Hooker. Nature 104: 562. 1920.)]. He thinks real workers should give some time to popular articles, perhaps one lecture a year which could be published at a popular price. — 0. A. Stevens. 99. Wentz, John B. An outline of an undergradixate course in grain grading. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 198-204. 1920.— An outline of the course as presented at Maryland State College. It includes grading of corn, wheat, and oats; laboratory practice; and appa- ratus used.— i^. M. Schertz. 12 FORESTRY ]Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY Raphael Zon, Editor J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor 100. Anonymous. AUgemeine Bedingungen fiir die Verpachtung forststaatlicher Jagden in Preussen. [Leasing of hunting rights on Prussian State Forests.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 100-105. 1920. — In general, hunting is managed by the State forest authorities, but in a few cases is leased to private individuals. The conditions and forms governing such leasing are given. — W. N. Sparkawk. 101. Anonymous. Facts about depletion of our forests. Amer. Forest. 26:433-435. 1920. 102. Anonymous. Forestry in France. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 141-142. 1920. — A description is given of the French method of silvicultural management of a practically normal beech forest of 26,000 acres having a negligible admixture of oak in the State forest in the neighborhood of Lyons-la-F6ret in the Department Eure. The present method of regulation' is based on the uniform compartment system with natural regeneration. — C. F. Korstian. 103. Anonymous. Industrial research in forest products. Amer. Forest. 26:401-407. 7 fig. 1920. — A brief of the work of -the Forest Products Laboratory, Madison, Wisconsin. — Chas. H. Otis. 104. Anonymous. Kurze tJbersicht fiber die wichtigsten Kennzeichen der verschiedenen Larchenarten. [A brief review of the most important characteristics of the various Larch species.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18:46-51. 1920. — This brief review con- tains a key for the cones of the 19 species and varieties in the Larch family, a key for the needles and twigs, and a brief description of each species or variety. — /. Roeser. 105. Anonymous. Progress of the purchase of Eastern national forests. Amer. Forest 26:454-460. 2 maps, 4- fig- 1920. [From report prepared by the National Forest Reserva- tion Commission.] 106. Anonymous. The utilization of sand wastes. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 138- 139. 1920. — A brief review is given of the experience of France in the fixation and econotnic utilization of barren areas of shifting sand in the Landes through the planting of cluster pine {Pinus pinaster), and a plea is made for the adoption of similar measures in Australia. — C. F. Korstian. 107. Anonymous. Die Verhandlungen der Preussischen Landesversammlung iiber den Staatshaushaltsplan der Forstverwaltung. [Action in the Prussian legislature on the Forest Service budget.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 106-114. 1920.— By the Versailles treaty there was a definite loss to Prussia of 581,513 hectares of forest with an income of 23,459,000 marks, besides a possible loss of 346,862 hectares and income of 24,519,858 marks in the plebiscite areas, and 34,958 hectares and 2,208,000 marks in the districts of Aachen and Trier. Although wood prices have risen along with all other prices, the Forest Service must try to keep them down within reason. It is proposed to cut one-third more wood than usual to supplj^ fuel needs, especially of the bakers; but in many places increased production of fuelwood will have to be made at the expense of construction timber or mine timbers. Receipts from tur- pentining brought in a considerable revenue, but can be counted on only so long as the indus- try is needed to supply domestic requirements and is profitable. A demand has arisen for more agricultural land, with the tendency to demand clearing of parts of the State forests. There is also considerable deforestation of private forests, so that a law is under consid- eration giving the government authority to regulate such clearing and requiring that all forests of more than 15 hectares be subject to State supervision. The question of salaries No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 13 and allowances is very pressing, as illustrated by the allowance granted Oberforster for maintenance of teams — 3000 marks in 1917 and 6000 marks in 1918, while the actual cost of keeping a team is now 9000 marks per year. In connection with the salary question it was stated that between October 1, 1918, and October 1, 1919, forest vandals killed 13 forest oflScers and wounded 3 others. — W. N. Sparhawk. 108. Anonymous. Vorschriften uber das Wirtschaftsland (Dienstiandereien) der Forst- dienststellen in Preussen. [Regulations regarding farm land connected with Forest Service positions in Prussia.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 69-73. 1920. — Most forest officers are granted a small area of garden, meadow, or pasture, in order to enable them to keep teams, raise at least part of their own food, especially in outlying districts, and also to make them reason- ably independent of the local population. They are supposed not to raise anything to sell. Rules are given concerning the granting of such land, its cultivation, fencing, etc. — W. N. Sparhawk. 109. Barbey, a. Congres de la Societe forestiere de Franche-Comte et Belfort. Jour. Forest. Suisse 71 : 50-54. 1920. — The first post-war meeting of this French forestry society was devoted to an examination of the forest of Haguenau, Alsace. Comprising 13,699 hec- tares, this forest is fifth in rank of French domanial forests and is conjointly owned by the state and by the village of Haguenau. Originally put under systematic management by the French in 1845, it was radically changed during German control (1874-1919) through the application of German systems employing artificial reforestation. Details of German mal- administration from the French viewpoint are described. The effort of the French foresters in resuming control will be to bring the forest again under the regime of natural reproduc- tion according to the best traditions of forestry in France. — C. J. Kraebel. 110. Barbey, A. Un parasite des pousses du chene. [A parasite of oak shoots.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 70: 129-131. Sept.-Oct., 1919. — Stenolechia gemmdla L., also known as Poecilia nivea Han. — C. J. Kraebel. 111. Beath, O. a. Poisonous Plants. Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 39-47. 1919. See Bot. Ansts. 6, Entry 475. 112. Bell, T. R. Administration report of the forest circles in the Bombay Presidency (including Sind) for 1918-19. ISS p. Bombay, 1920.— The usual annual report on forest operations in the province. From 66.6 per cent to 94.3 per cent of the total forest areas is open to grazing. The opening of some of the areas closed to grazing, owing to fodder famine, caused considerable damage to coppice growth. During the year the gross revenue increased 17 lakhs (lakh = 100,000 Rs.) over the preceding year and by 30 lakhs over the average of the preceding 5 years. The past year the net revenue equalled 46.3 per cent of the gross revenue. Caesalpinia brevifolia, the pods of which contain 50 per cent tannin and having a tannin value superior to Divi-divi {Caesalpinia coriaria), has been recommended for experimental cultivation in dry regions. Later it is expected to try this species out on a commercial scale in the successful regions. A private company is planning to test the possibilities of the manufacture of bamboo paper pulp on a commercial basis for a period of 2 years. In timber seasoning experiments good results were obtained by alternate water and air treat- ment of certain species, and definite recommendations as to methods have been made. On the subject of organization, the following statements are made: "There is no doubt that the divisions existing are too large in extent for management by a single Divisional Forest Officer and their area will have to be reduced in the near future. Regeneration work has never been satisfactory owing to want of staff for supervising — also for execution. And under the new proposed system of clear-cutting about to be introduced in revised working plans, even requirements for silvicultural operations recognized up to the present will be insufficient. Everything, the whole future of the for st, will depend upon adequate, highly trained super- vision. For effectiveness, it will have to be European too; the forest life and strenuous, physical exertion entailed make that an absolute sine qua non for successful issue. The ordi- 14 FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, nary, intensively-worked division should certainly not exceed 200 square miles in area, whereas they are now well over 400. The sooner this is recognized, the better." Appended to the report are a number of tables of statistics on forest and administrative subjects. — E. R. Hodson. 113. Bernbeck. Das Wachstum im Winde. [Growth and wind.[ Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42 : 27-40, 59-69, 93-100. 1920. — The author discusses the adaptation of vegetation to wind and the effects of wind on vegetation, with especial reference to forest growth. Adaptation is to enable the plant to withstand the physical impact of wind, or to prevent excessive evap- oration from the plant tissues, or both. Wind firmness is not an inherent characteristic of any given species, although the tendency toward windfirmness may be inherited; thus a fir grown in the open may be much more wind-firm than an oak grown in a dense stand pro- tected from wind. Under the right conditions any tree can develop a wind-firm form. This fact can be utilized in silvicultural management, so as to minimize loss from windfall. (35,000,000 cubic metres of timber, principally coniferous, was blown down in Germany dur- ing the last century.) Wind climate often governs the geographical distribution of trees. For instance, conifers are most liable to injury during the winter months; so sites exposed to continuous winter storms (if fertile enough to allow tall tree growth) are usually occupied by hardwoods, while mountain slopes and plateaus where heavy early summer winds prevail are occupied by conifers. Wind affects the growth and form of trees not only indirectly, by its influence on such site-factors as soil moisture, transpiration, temperature, and expos- ure of foliage to the light, but also directly, by its physical effect on the plant tissues. Inter- nal stresses and friction between the fibres result in eccentric growth, and also help to stunt the tree by interrupting sap-flow and by affecting cell structure and turgescence. Inves- tigations made at Bonn showed clearly that the stunting effect of wind increases rapidly with wind velocity. — W. N. Sparhawk. 114. Bernberk. Die Wasserversorgung der Pflanzen im Winde. [The supply and main- tenance of water in plants during wind.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 121-141. 1920. — The physiological action of the mechanical strength of winds in relation to trans- piration is manifested in an increase in the amount of moisture given off. The rate of this increase is, in general, governed by the conditions of firmness or stability and inflexibility as opposed to the attacking force of the wind. The following are three ways in which the mechanical action of the wind leads to an increase in water loss: (1) The intercellular gas renews itself in spite of reaction of the stomata, whereby an increase in intercellular trans- piration is involved. (2) An excess of pressure in water conducting tissue is occasioned by torsion, pressure, etc. This forces water out of the lumen and membranes of cells subject to the higher pressure into cells under lower pressure, into the intercellular spaces, or through the epidermis into the free atmosphere. This internal pressure in very strong winds can become so great that the cell walls are burst. (3) The water permeability of the outer epidermal wall and the periderm is decreased by deformations. — The quantity of transpiration is strongly influenced by the humidity of the air. Death through excessive water losses and poor conduction reaches its maximum with the lowest relative humidity. Young tender organs are not as unprotected against wind, transpiration, and frost as may be supposed. The younger and the richer the tender-walled cells are in plasma, the more resistant are they to wind pressure. The period of greatest susceptibility is immediately after the period of greatest vegetative activity. The spiral grain in trees much exposed is due to the mechanical action of the wind. The best protection against the mechanical action of wind, ^s illustrated by the palms and grasses, consists in a flexibility, which allows the plant to bend before the wind. — J. Roeser. 115. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem of conifers. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 219. 10 p., 4 pi, 10 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 318. No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 15 116. Eberhard, Julius. Die Technik der Naturverjiingung. einst und jetzt. Eine forstgeschichtliche Studie. [The technique of natural reproduction formerly and now.] Forst- wiss. Centralbl. 42:161-183, 204-226. 1920.— The author describes the development of silvicultural systems, beginning with the primitive irregular selection cutting. Hundes- HAGEx developed the shelterwood system (Dunkelschlagbetrieb) with preliminary seed cuttings, with later cuttings to give light for the seedlings, and with final removal cuttings after the young growth is well established and able to thrive in the open. Natural repro- duction was relied on almost entirely, being considered cheaper and more satisfactory than artificial restocking. After Hundeshagen, silviculturists gradually abandoned the idea of natural restocking, and adopted clear cutting with planting. Gayer and H. Mayer de- scribed methods similar to those of Hundeshagen, except that they provided for less frequent but much heavier early fellings, which resulted in less satisfactory reproduction and in more loss from windfall. Borggreve's method was more like Hundeshagen's, but delayed the later cuttings longer. Gayer described a group selection cutting (Femelschlagbetrieb) in some respects similar to the shelterwood system, but much less satisfactory. Engler advised a combination of group selection and shelterwood, especially for mixed stands con- taining tolerant and less tolerant species. Gayer also developed a strip shelterwood sys- tem, resulting in a stand with regular age-gradations in parallel strips. Wagner's selection strip or selection border cutting (Blendersaumschlag) provides for reproduction of tolerant species under the stand by making thinnings or selection cuttings, then for clearing strips so that the intolerant species can reproduce. Mayr described a system which he consid- ered applicable to most of the irregular forests of the world, especially those containing many species, including the forests of the tropics. He provided for reproducing a tolerant under- story at about the middle of the rotation, followed by occasional thinnings of the over-story to prevent natural losses, and fairly heavy seed cuttings at the end of the rotation, just before or just after the seed falls. The old stand is then to be removed in one or two fellings, within 5 or 6 years. Kubelka, in his selection-strip system (Femelstreifenbetrieb) gets reproduction by opening holes in alternate strips, and gradually enlarging them. Kalitsch's Barenthorn system and the author's wedge shelterwood system (formerly called Abrucksaumschlag, more recently Schirmkeilschlag) are very similar in providing for very frequent — annual if possible — cuttings through the stand, which do not break the canopy. The last method is particularly distinguished by the form of removal cuttings, which are developed in wedge form, beginning in the middle of the stand, so that logging will not injure established repro- duction. In the author's opinion, the present German silvicultural practice (which has also been carried to Russia by foresters trained in German schools) is far behind that at the begin- ning of the 19th century. The prevailing forest form has changed during the last 200 years from a straight selection forest to extensive pure even-aged forests produced artificially. It is now returning gradually to a modified selection form, very much more intensively culti- vated than formerly, with mixed stands and natural reproduction. — W. N. Sparhawk. 117. Endres. [Rev. of: Redslob, Kurt, and Heinrich Horns chu. Das neue Thiir- ingen. Heft 5, Aufgaben der Thiiringer Forstwirtschaft. [Problems of Thuringian forestry.] Erfurt, 1919.] Forstwiss. Centralbl 42: 194-195. 1920.— The new State of Thuringia (Thur- ingen) comprises the former states: Saxe-Weimar, Saxe-Meiningen, Saxe-Altenburg, Saxe- Gotha, Schwarzburg-Sondershausen, Schwarzburg-Rudolstadt, Reuss (both). It has 403,000 hectares of forest, divided into: crown forest, 13 per cent; state forest, 37 per cent; communal forest, 13.9 per cent; institutional forest, 1.3 per cent; cooperative forest, 4.5 per cent; pri- vate forest, 30.3 per cent. It is proposed that large private holdings, under management of technically trained foresters, be subject to state supervision, and that smaller tracts be acquired by the public (state or communes). Endres does not believe that this proposal will appeal to the peasants. He considers too optimistic the hopes of the author for great increase of returns through chemical utilization of forest by-products. Noteworthy is the proposed organization of forest research, with about six main branches, all manned exclu- sively by trained foresters. These are to have parallel units set aside in the field, for prac- 16 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, tical trial of the results of research. It is also proposed to establish chairs of forestry at the University of Jena, for training of forest officers, and to found a forest and game museum. — W. N. Sparhawk. 118. Fabricius, L. [Rev. of: Munch, E. Naturwissenschaftliche Grundlagen der Kiefernharznutzung. (Biological basis of resin production from Scotch pine.) Julius Springer: Berlin, 1919.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:157-159. 1920.— The German turpentine industry, which only began in 1915, has in four years developed into an important industry; and the improved methods devised as the result of intensive research have increased pro- duction very greatly over the cruder methods formerly used in Austria and even over the French and American methods. Strict application of all that has been learned will result in a yield of resin four times as great as that obtained by the methods used in 1915. Munch's book covers the ground very thoroughly, both from scientific and practical points of view. — W. N. Sparhawk. 119. Fabricius, L. Waldbau-Lehrgang im Gebiet des Langenbrander Schirmkellschlages. [Silvicultural excursion in the home of the Langenbrand wedge-shelterwood cutting.] Forst- wiss. Centralbl. 42 : 233-237. 1920. — The author describes the silvicultural system used by De. Eberhard in the Langenbrand forest (Wurttemberg). This consists of a preparatory stage, in which the stand is prepared for reproduction by repeated moderate thinnings, and a stage of removal cuttings beginning about 5 years after reproduction is established. The preparatory cuttings are intended primarily to get rid of raw humus, which may also be removed by hand either over the whole area or in seed-spots. These cuttings also make room for reproduction, especially of tolerant species, to start. The removal cuttings are rather light, and repeated every year if practicable. They begin in the interior of the stand and progress outward, beginning with small openings, which are gradually enlarged into a wedge shape with the point toward the wind. The shape of opening is not definite, but may be varied to suit local conditions. Damage from storms and logging is reduced to a minimum, and natural reproduction is very successful. Of the whole area, 92 per cent has been repro- duced naturally. The principal characteristic which distinguishes this from certain other methods is the shape and arrangement of the cuttings so as to eliminate damage from logging and from winds. — W. N. Sparhawk. 120. Farrington, H. A. Annual progress report on forest administration in the presi- dency of Bengal for 1918-19. 51 p. Calcutta, 1920. — The usual annual report dealing with forest operations in the province. It is reported that 16 per cent of the reserved forests and 3 per cent of the protected forests were open to grazing, and that the entire area of the unclassed forest is always open for this purpose. Unrestricted grazing and lack of fire pro- tection caused the Muli bamboo to fail in re-establishing itself properly after seeding. Wher- ever cattle have access (practically on all areas within a mile of the forest boundary) seedling regeneration of most kinds of trees is destroyed. It is necessary to fence planted areas to protect them from damage by cattle grazing. In the unfenced hills natural regeneration is entirely destroyed by cattle. Above 5,500 feet in altitude natural reproduction in coppice fellings is not successful and must be supplemented by planting. At lower elevations the coppice system produces excellent results. Burned areas in coppice cuttings give success with a large number of species, including seedlings of Mallata, Toon, and other species. Experiments were undertaken with growing blue gum {Eucalyptus globulus) for fuel purposes. At the close of the year there were 50 forest villages, totaling an area of 7508 acres. The surplus at the close of the year was 1,121,760 Rs. Twenty-one form tables and a map of the province are appended. In chapter seven is given a review of forest administration in Bengal for the preceding 5-year period. — E. R. Hodson. 121. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. [Restrictive legislation and notices of quarantines in U. S. A.] Service and Regulatory Announcements 68: 52-111. 1920. No. 1, February. 1921] FORESTRY 17 122. Garr, H. D., and George E. E'we. Hemlock bark (Tsuga canadensis) for pharma- ceutical purposes. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9:567-573. S fig. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 819. 123. Ginzberger, A. Zwei neue Standorte der gefeldert-rindigen Buche, Fagus silvatica var. quercoides Pers., in Mittel Italien und Slavonien. [Two new site-localities of the grooved- barked beech, Fagus silvatica, var. quercoides Pers., in central Italy and in Slavonia.] Natur- •wiss. Zei schr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:39-41. 1920. 124. Hay, R. Dalrymple. Progress of forestry under independent management in New South Wales. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 151-156. 1920. — A record of established progress in forest management by the Forestry Commission of New South Wales following a needed reform is given under these topics: classification, demarkation and organization, fire protec- tion, utilization and regeneration of hardwood forests, publicity work, forest grazing, fores- try statistics, forestry education, coniferous plantations, research, and forest revenue. — C. F. Korstian. 125. Henry, Augustine. The afiforestation of water catchment areas. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 337. 1920. 126. Hirst, E. C. State forest fire protection. Amer. Forest. 26: 408-409. 1920. 127. HoDSON, E. R. Some present day problems in forestry. Utah Acad. Sci. 1: 45-54. 1918. — Paper presented to the Academy in April, 1911. 128. Hohenadl, W. Die Hebung der Alpwirtschaft. [Promotion of the alpine dairy business.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:41-59. 1920. — The author contrasts the development of the dairy industry in Allgau with that in Upper Bavaria. The difference is to a consider- able extent traceable to the difference in character of ownership of the mountain pastures as well as of the mountain forests. This industry is in very close contact with the forest industry, and foresters are especially favorably situated for taking the lead in promoting better methods and more conservative, and at the same time, more intensive utilization. — W. N. Sparhawk. 129. HuTCHiNS, D. E. Insignis-pine disease. Jour. Agric. New Zealand 16: 37. 1918. — See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1273. 130. JuDD, C. S. The kauri pine. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 167-169. PI. 1. 1920. — This is reported as being the most promising and widely useful tree for planting in the Hawaiian Islands for the purpose of producing lumber. This species, Agathis australis shows a rapid growth in the Islands, "averaging a growth of 1 inch in diameter every 4| years." It was introduced into Hawaii about forty years ago. — Stanley Coulter. 131. Korstian, C. F. Value of scientific research in forestry. Utah Acad. Sci. 1: 186- 194. 1918. 132. Leiningen-Westerburg, (Graf zu). Rauchschaden und einschlagige bodenkund- liche Fragen. [Smoke injury and related matters of soil science.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 18-93. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 459. 133. Mackay, H. Forestry in Victoria. Australian Forest. Jour. 3:147-150, 179-182. 1920. — The second and third installments of a continued article. The silviculture of eucalyp- tus forest- is briefly treated. The following methods of cutting are advocated as the simplest and best forms of management for adaptation in Australia: (1) clear cutting; (2) modified selection; (3) for young forest, coppice with standards, or a modification of the shelterwood compartment system; (4) simple coppice, or the clear cutting of pole timber. A rotation of 20 to 30 years for a box and ironbark forest will produce pole timber from 6 to 9 inches in diameter, with some 12-inch timber. The progress made in plantation work and in gifts of trees for shelterbelts to small settlers is noted. — C. F. Korstian. 18 FOKESTKY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 134. Maxwell, Hu. The uses of wood. Wood for musical instruments. Amer. Forest. 26:532-539. 16 fig. 1920. 135. MoEEiLLON, M. Dommages causes aux forSts du canton de Vaud par le foehn des 4 et 5 Janvier 1919. [Damage to the forests of Vaud (Switzerland) by the foehn of January 4 and 5, 1919.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 71 : 41-44. 1920.— A brief presentation of reasons why this wind should have caused local wind-throw although the foehns of other years have never been known to do so. — C. J. Kraebel. 136. MoEEiLLON, M. Influence de I'cmbrage sur la valeur des gazons dans les paturages boises. [The influence of shade upon the value of grasses in wooded pastures.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 70: 131-142. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 39. 137. NiKLAS, H. Die Bedeutung der Geologie fdr die Land- und Forstwirtschaftliche Bodenkunde. [The significance of the science of geology with relation to agricultural and forest soil science.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u, Landw. 18: 22-35. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 478. 138. NiKLAS, H. tJbersicht uber Bayens Bodenverhaltnisse. [Summary of Bavarian soil conditions.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 123-135. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 461. 139. Pack, Chas. L. Fire protection and more public forest land. Amer. Forest. 26: 526-528. 1920. 140. PiETSCH, Albert. Wie erklart sich das lange Hangenbleiben der Blatter an einigen phanerogamen Holzgewachsen im Herbste 1919? [What is the explanation for the late reten- tion of the foliage of several phanerogamous woody plants in the fall of 1919?] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 150-155. 1920.— A combination of adverse conditions— a late spring, a cool summer, a wet October, and an early November frost — was responsible for the rather extraordinary retention of the foliage in the pear {Pirus communis), red thorn (Cra- taegus monogyna), the garden rose, blackberry (Rubus caesius), and peach {Prunus persica) in the fall of 1919. The explanation lies in the meteorological conditions through the year. — J. RoQser. 141. Prantner, E. F. The forests of a new republic. Amer. Forest. 26: 522-525. 9 fi^.y 1 map. 1920. — A brief discussion of forest conditions in Czechoslovakia. — Chas. H. Otis. 142. Recknagel, A. B. New York's forests and their future. Amer. Forest. 26: 518-521. 4fig.,l table. 1920. 143. Roth, Filibert. Another word on "light burning." Amer. Forest. 26:548, 572. 1920. 144. Rubner, K. Forstliche Standortsgewachse im westlichen Moranengebiet Bayerns. [Vegetation as forest site indicators in Bavaria.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 135-144. 1920.— The author discusses Cajander's theory that forest sites can be classed into a very few types based on key plants, such as Oxalis, Vaccinium myrtillus, and Calluna, regardless of eleva- tion, soil conditions, latitude, or other factors, and that the growth of the same species within one type wherever located is about the same, but is very different in different types. Rubner does not believe that such general classification, even with the subtypes Cajander proposed, can be made to apply to a large region, but believes that each locality will have certain plants that indicate the character of the different sites, which may or may not be common to other localities. He illustrates this by discussing the vegetation under the forests in the districts of Betzigau, Ottobeuren, Sachsenried, and Denklingen, which is the optimum spruce region in Bavaria and possibly in all Germany, with yields far above the average for Quality I sites. Indicator plants show particularly the humus conditions; i.e., whether the soils are mild, with normal decomposition of humus, or whether they are becoming acid with raw humus. No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTKY 19 I Such plants may be guide-plants, practically always found on a particular kind of soil; acces- sory indicators, frequently present but often missing; and regional indicators, found only in certain regions. Plants indicative of mild soils are Oxalis acetosella, Asperula odorata, Im- paliens noli-me-tangere, Galium rolundifolium, Elymus europaeus, Milium effusum, Brachtj- podium silvaticum, Carex silvatica, Catharinea undulata, Mnium undulatum, Hypnum spp. Indicators of beginning or continuing raw humus formation are: Vaccinium myrtillus, Fes- tuca silvatica, Lycopodium annotinum, Polytrichum formosum, Dicranum scoparium. This matter deserves much more attention from forest investigators, since it has a very direct bearing upon silvicultural practice, especially in connection with natural reproduction and with methods of thinning.— W. N. Sparhawk. . 145. RuBNER, K. Holzpreise in Suddeutschland in fruherer Zeit. [Wood prices in South Germany in former times.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:226-233. 1920.— The author discusses prices of wood (chiefly firewood) in various localities, going as far back as 1630 in some instances. Especially noteworthy is a rapid increase in prices about the middle of the nineteenth century, which was attributed by some to increased population, rise of wood- using industries, and decreased wood production, and by others to an era of speculation. Just as relief came then through the development of railroads and the rise of a world trade in wood, so can relief from present abnormal wood prices, which are also due to a considerable degree to speculation coupled with inadequate supplies, come only with the resumption of imports from Russia or other exporting countries.— PF. N. Sparhawk. 146. ScHEiDTER, Franz. Schlagruhe und Russelkafer. [Suspension of cuttings and weevil damage.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:144-150. 1920.— The author discusses the life history of the weevil, and shows that it can not be eliminated from a forest by temporarily suspending cuttings, as has been proposed. Contrary to general belief, the beetle flies for long distances during the mating period, and may attack newly planted trees far away from any cutting area. Suggested control measures include cleaning up cuttings, with grubbing out of stumps as soon as possible after logging; smearing of individual trees, where practic- able, with bands of glue or tar; and the construction of traps by blazing fresh stumps just above the ground and covering the blazes with loose bark, from beneath which the beetles can be scooped up daily or more often. — W. N. Sparhawk. 147. ScHMAUss, A. Uber Sturmgefahrdungen. [Concerning storm damage.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 189-194. 1920.— Prevailing winds in central Europe being from the southwest or west, trees are ordinarily adapted to resists winds from those directions, and are likely to be wind-thrown only by winds from other quarters. Storms from the east or northeast would be most destructive, but they are exceedingly rare. Those from the southwest— of which the fohn winds are most common— are seldom strong enough to do great damage, so that only the fairly strong winds— 20 meters per second and over— from the northwest need be considered in forest management. The origin and behavior of these winds is discussed in some detail. It is concluded that the best direction for succession of cuttings is from north- east to southwest, since this will favor reproduction and at the same time will allow a mini- mum of damage from northwest winds. — W. N. Sparhawk. 148. ScHREiNER. Blitzschaden an einer liegenden Eiche. [The work of lightning on a fallen oak.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 42-43. 1920.— The author records a phenomenon which he has not encountered in any of his previous practice. The oak stem in question was 7.4 meters long and 0.46 m. in diameter, DIB. The tree had died and fallen and the rotten butt had been removed, while the remaining section on the ground was sound. One-half of the stem was free of limbs. The woody fibers were straight; no twisted grain was in evidence. The stem lay in the midst of a thin stand of beech about 30 meters high. Lightning struck directly on the fallen stem, and ran the full length of it, making a three quarters revolution. Since it could not have followed the grain, it is thought the curvature of the stroke was due to the attraction from the damp portion of the stem lying against the soil. The soil is derived from sandstone. — J. Roeser. 20 FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 149. S(chupfer). Englands Waldpolitik vor und nach dem Kriege. [England's forest policy before and after the war.] [Chiefly a discussion of an article by Ivar Tragardh in Svenska Dagbladet, 1919, No. 344.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:150-156. 1920.— England's power depends on her fleet, which requires coal; the latter cannot be obtained without a supply of mine timbers. These had hitherto been obtained cheaply from France and Scandinavia, but just prior to the war increasing prices had made people begin to think of the home forests, which were mostly hardwoods except for small areas of conifers in Scotland. Early in the eighteenth century it had been decided to plant 100,000 acres with oak for ship timbers, and by 1823 half of this area was planted. Then the coming of steel ships put an end to this project. With the outbreak of the World W^r, there was great difficulty in getting sufficient timber; half of England's forests were cut down, and the rest would have been cut down if the material could have been got out easily. Of the monthly consumption of 100,000 tons of mine timber, England supplied 40,000 tons and France the rest. From 1916 to 1918 about 17,000,000 tons of timber were cut, or more than 20 years' normal cut. The report of the Forestry Subcommittee of the Ministry of Reconstruction is outlined. The measures recom- mended were adopted in the law of September 1, 1919, which created a Forest Commission with broad powers and an appropriation of £3,500,000. The reviewer suggests that estimates of costs and of returns may be somewhat optimistic, and that allowance was not made for a possible future drop in prices as home production increases, but points out that there are other advantages, such as insuring an emergency supply as well as making productive large areas of waste land, whose value cannot be estimated. — W. N. Sparhawk. 150. ScnusTER, Matjhaus. Die wirtschaftliche Hegung urid Ausnutzung der bayeris- chen Hohen Rhon. [The economic development and use of the Bavarian High Rhon.] Natur- wiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 1-10. 1920. — The Bavarian High Rhon Mt. region is noted for its large areas of unused meadowland, which because of soil and location are unfit for agricultural use. During the war, and for a considerable time previous, this territory had been practically neglected. It is known that as late as the end of the eighteenth century, the region was one of considerable economic importance; this was due chiefly to the efforts of the abbots of Fulda, who developed the limited mineral resources and the numerous springs around Briickenau, and also made use of the large, uncultivated meadows in the mountains as pastures for horses and cattle. At present, the whole region is dead and awaits a resurrec- tion. Its agricultural value is low; it has no great advantage over other areas in its mineral resources. The extensive mountain meadows, however, can and must be utilized for cattle grazing, in order to assist in the economic restoration of industrial Germany. — J. Roeser. 151. Taylor, T. W. Kurrajong as a fodder tree. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 186-188. 1920. — The cultivation of kurrajong {Sterculia diver sijolia) for fodder purposes is advocated. This species is one of the best fodder trees as a stand-by in times of drought, as well as a tree that is very ornamental and useful for shade purposes on the open plains. — C. F. Korsiian. 152. TuBEUF, Karl Freiherr von. Uber die Zweckmassigkeit der Zusammenlegung Kleinparzellierten Waldbesitzes. [Concerning the necessity of consolidating small parcelled-off forest holdings.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 155-162. Fig. 1-3. 1920.— The author describes three examples of forest areas, subdivided into small holdings with dis- tinct division lines, which he found on the foothills of the Alps; namely, at Fiissen, at Kohl- grub, and at Brannenburg. In the case of the first two, where long strips of forest, each pri- vately owned, are separated by strips of meadowland; the forest is injurious to the growth of grass in the meadows; the open meadows leave the forest open to severe damage by windfall, etc. ; and there is no system or definite plan of utilization of the forest product. In the last- mentioned case, a steep mountain side of approximately 155 ha is parcelled into 60 separate holdings, these being in narrow strips parallel to the slope and separated by wide lanes, 10-30 meters wide. Some of the strips themselves are but 8 meters wide. The consolidation of the holdings on the tract under one management will mean uniform management and harvesting No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 21 of product and closer utilization of the soil, since all of the lanes but one will be allowed to regenerate. The revenue derived would be pro-rated according to the area held by each member of the association or ownership, and the yield would be increased five or six times. Statistics show that the average yield from small holdings is 2 cubic meters of wood per year per ha, while on state forests, it amounts to 4^Q cubic meters. In North Germany, the formation of forest associations by direct state aid is desirable to secure reforestation on the large plains; in South Germany it is desirable in order to prevent the damage resulting from parcelling of woodlands into small tracts; and in the mountains in order to introduce uniform and efficient methods of logging. The demands of the time call for utmost utilization of the soil.—/. Roeser. 153. WiLBRAND. Eichenhochwald. [Oak high forest.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 183- 189. 1920. — Oak is one of the most valuable and necessary woods, and is in great demand, especially in large sizes. It should always be grown to produce large-sized material, and the smaller sizes wanted can be obtained as by-products, from thinnings. For short rotations spruce, pine, and beech are more profitable. Oak grows slowly, and needs plenty of light. It should always be grown in pure stand (during the first part of the rotation) ; and best results follow clear cutting of small areas, with planting, and cultivation of garden crops for two years between the rows. After the stems have made their height-growth and the crowns have begun to form, thinnings should commence, and should follow every 4 or 5 years, so as to keep the crowns of the reserves always free and prevent dying off of even the lower branches. This will prevent dead knots. Beech can be under-planted when the boles have reached their full height, after the crowns have started to spread. This method will result in the maximum possible clear bole, in regularly spaced annual rings, which is an advantage for many purposes, and in reasonably fast growth. — W. N. Spar hawk. 154. Zeller, S. IM. Hvmiidity in relation to moisture imbibition by wood and to spore germination on wood. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7:51-74. PI. 1, 5 Jig. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 400. 155. ZiMMER, W. J. The need of softwood introduction. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 184-185. 1920. — A brief discussion of the demand for softwoods, and an argument for more extensive planting of pines. In a list of trees reported to be growing in the State Nursery at Macedon, Victoria, many of which measure up to 108 feet in height and a stem girth of more than 9 feet, ten North American conifers are noted. — C. F. Korstian. 156. ZoN, Raphael. Forests and human progress. Geog. Rev. 10: 139-166. 1920.— The author recognizes three stages in the development of man's relation to the earth's forested areas from prehistoric times until the present. These stages are designated: (1) Civilization dominated by forests, (2) civilization overcoming the forests, and (3) civilizati n dominating forests. While forming a natural sequence, it is pointed out that the stages made unequal progress in different parts of the earth. For illustration. Central Africa and South America are now in the first stage; a considerable part of North America and Asia are in the second; but in Europe and parts of the United States the third stage is reached. The first stage deals with prehistoric and early historic man. It is traced through indirect means, as the migra- tion of races, the configuration of ancient forests, and from folk lore, myth, and the vestiges of primitive religions. The second stage denotes man's progress in the production and use of tools of an advanced and eflficient type, and shows an increasing pressure for tillable land. This stage lies for the most part within the historic period, although place names in certain parts of Europe are excellent indirect evidence of the progress of early clearings and forest settlements. The third stage shows civilization triumphant over its ancient enemy, and brings the story down to modern times. It deals with current movements and the immediate past. — E. R. Hodson. 22 GENETICS [BoT. Absts.. Vol. VII, GENETICS G. H. Shull, Editor . J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor 157. Anonymous. [Rev. of: (1) Harrison, J. W. Heslop. A preliminary study of the effects of administering ethyl alcohol to the lepidopterous insect, Selenia bilunaria, with par- ticular reference to the offspring.- Jour. Genetics 9: 39-52. Dec, 1919. (2) Duerden, J. E. Methods of degeneration in the ostrich. Jour. Genetics 9:131-193. PI. 5-6, 8 fig. Jan., 1920.] Nature 104:609. 1920. 158. Anonymous. Vagledning pa forsSksfSlten 1920 vid Svalof och filialerna. [Guide to the experimental fields of Svalof and its branch experimental stations, for the year 1920.] 1.45 X 200 mm., 52 p., 1 map. Landskrona, 1920.— Pamphlet intended as a manual for visitors. During this year 14,059 plots (of which 94 are mass-cultures) have been laid out.— -K". F. Ossian Dahlgren. 159. Bach, Siegfried. Zweierlei Weisslinge bei Mais. [Two kinds of albinos in maize.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzlicht. 7:238-241. June, 1920.— From open-pollinated ears of maize, the author reports the occurrence of two types of albinistic seedlings. One ear produced 170 green and 4 pure white seedlings, the latter dying within a month's time. The other ear produced 160 green and 5 partially green (striped) plants which died in two months. The low proportion of albinistic seedlings is due to random open-pollination with a small amount of natural self-pollination. Author assumes that chlorophyll content in maize is dependent upon at least two pairs of factors, XX and Y Y; and that the parent ears noted above had the genotypic formulae XX Yy and XyYY respectively.—^. W. Lindstrom. 160. Baumann, E. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Rapspflanze und zur Ziichtung des Rapses. [Contributions to a knowledge of the rape plant and to the breeding of rape.] Zeitschr. Pflanzen- zlicht. 6: 139-184. 2 figs. Dec, 1918.— A program for improving the rape plant was fol- lowed through a period of nine seasons (1909-1917), together with a study of the inheritance of certain characters influencing the performance of the plant under a variety of weather con- ditions. Of the qualities concerned in making for a larger gross yield, and greater desira- bility of product, the adaptation of different varieties to climate, particularly with reference to the time of resumption of growth in spring and the latest occurrence of spring frost, was found to be of much practical importance. Of primary interest, also, were found the capacity of varieties to resist insect attack, and to occupy gaps in the stand by the development of branches. A detailed study of external morphology showed that the taller the plant, the greater was the number of internodes, and the higher the insertion of the latter on the axis. The increase in length of lateral branches of the first order from tip toward base begins as a straight line function, but toward the end is lessened considerably. A similar relation obtains in the case of branches of the first and higher orders. Generally, in plants having a long axial stem, the prunary and secondary branches are shorter, and the inflorescence more crowded.- Plants of the higher continuity states, possess in a larger measure the qualities making for increased productivity, as the different morphological elements tending toward greater yield are more numerous and better differentiated. Adaptation to a particular cli- mate is largely contingent on the capacity to form a vigorous healthy growth in fall, and to develop shoots rapidly in spring, through which damage by late frosts and insects is resisted. An excessively vigorous growth, on the other hand, may bring about a spindling condition, encourage decay, and render the crop more subject to late spring frosts. In all cases, varie- ties and races requiring the longer periods for maturing gave the greater yields. The per- formance of species or genera making for adaptability to climate is an expression of the irritability of its cells to thermal stimuli. The importance of physiological data derived from breeding experiments to the ecology and the distribution of plants is emphasized.— C/iar/es Drechsler. No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 23 161. Becker, J. BeitrSge zur Ziichtung der Kohlgewachse. [Contribution to the breeding of the Brassicas.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:91-99. Dec, 1919. — Discusses the necessity of seed selection. Outlines a method whereby the four best plants are selected from a good variety. These four plants are over-wintered and planted together the following year. Pods from each plant are harvested separately, and each pod is handled as a unit. Seeds of each are sown the following spring, and each individual seedling is grown in a pot and trans- planted to the field. Undesirable lines and plants are eliminated after taking careful data on plant characters, production, and food value. The ten best plants are selected, and the following year the four best are again grown in an isolation plot. A second selection of plants is made in the fall and carefully over-wintered. These produce seed for the main crop. A single Brassica plant produces 2100 to 15,000 seeds — sometimes as high as 36,000. — The writer favors the use of plants for seed production which themselves have produced well-developed heads. States that different sorts should be 400 to 500 meters apart in the field to prevent cross-pollination. — H. K. Hayes. 162. Becker, J. Serologische Untersuchungen auf dem Gebiete von Pflanzenbau und Pflanzenzucht. [Serological investigations in the realms of plant culture and plant breeding.] Landwirtsch. Jahrb. 53:245-276. 1919.— By the use of serums prepared by injecting plant extracts into animals it is possible to distinguish between seeds which are so nearly alike that by examination it is difficult to classify them; for example, seeds of Brassica napus and B. rapa. It is also believed that it will be possible to determine genetical differences, by this means, where no morphological differences can be made out, in closely related individuals. — D. F. Jones. 163. Blakeslee, a. F. Unlike reaction of different individuals to fragrance in Verbena flowers. Science 48:298-299. Sept. 20, 1918.— On the basis of susceptibility to the fra- grance of two varieties of Verbena, A and B, 48 persons could be classified into two groups. The one group, of 32 persons, was susceptible to fragrance in variety A but not to any in B; for the other group or 16 persons the reverse was true. — Edgar Altenburg. 164. Blaringhem, L. Couleur et sexe des fleurs. [Color and sex of flowers.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83:892-893. June, 1920.— Many horticultural varieties of Sweet William, Dianthus barbatus, are hybrids, and sometimes show hybrid origin by a mosaic splitting, which appears only on a few shoots and only on old plants. One remarkable plant showed, during two seasons, color changes in the petals which ran parallel with the sexual development of each flower. D. barbatus is hermaphroditic and protandrous. During 5-8 days while an- thers are shedding petals are white. Within subsequent 24-48 hours stigmas become func- tional, and petals turn bright red. This abrupt change should furnish a convenient index in a study of the inheritance of those physiological conditions which are associated with the sexes. — Merle C. Coulter. 165. Blaringhem, L. Heredite et nature de la pelorie de Digitalis purpurea L. [Heredity and nature of the peloria of Digitalis purpurea L.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171: 252-254. July, 1920. 166. Blaringhem, L. Variations de la sexualite chez les composees. [Variations in sexu- ality in the Compositae.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83 : 1060-1062. July, 1920.— Author recalls supposition of Hildebrand and van Uexkull-Gtllenband to effect that common composites are in state of evolution away from hermaphroditism. This opinion was based on existence of florets in intermediate conditions. Author says his observations on Cen- taureas of jacea group do not support such an hypothesis. Plants from four stations gave evidences of having resulted from hybridization of C. jacea and C. nigra. In the sterile (peripheral) flowers there was pollen sterility and variation in degree of ciliation of a cer- tain part of the achene; and there were appendages, such as free stamens or deformed styles. ~J. P. Kelly. 24 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 167. Bower, F. O., J. Graham Kerr, and W. E. Agar. Lectures on sex and heredity delivered in Glasgov/, 1917-1918. 16mo vi+llQ p., 49 fig. Macmillan Co.: London, 1919. — Distinctly popular; profusely illustrated. Introduction: Terms defined (prefers "syngamy" to fertilization); nature and function of sex discussed; its features contrasted with asexual reproduction. (1) Origin of sex in plants: Origin and differentiation of sex illustrated by Ulothrix, Ectocarpus spp., Fucus spp.; likens primitive isogamous plants to plant proletariat, producing numerous offspring with little physiological capital, so that each individual when produced must depend chiefly on its own efforts. Heterogamous forms, with well-nourished eggs, are capitalists whose progeny start life with an inheritance. Parallel evolution in several lines indicates that advantage is with latter; sex process in fern and angiosperm is described. (2) Effect of fixed position on sexuality of plants : detailed discussion of fertilization mechanism in fe ns, pollination and pollen-tube growth in angiosperms; advantages of "nursing habit" in latter for their embryos. (3) Reproductive process in animals: some general principles;, differentiation of sex illustrated by Copromonas, Stylorynchus, Plasmodium; in Copromonas, discusses auto-intoxication which comes after generations of a sexual reproduction, and how unfavorable conditions favor the sex act ; sketches embryology in higher animals, early differ- entiation of gonads, continuity of germ-plasm, inheritance of acquired characters. (4) Modi- fications of reproductive process as adaptations to life on land : adaptations by various frogs and toads, representing "attempts to get rid of the free aquatic existence during the early stages of the life-history;" gross embrj^ology of chick; monotremes, marsupials, higher mam- mals; transplantation of ovaries; transmission of disease from mother to offspring. (5) Hered- ity: Physical basis of heredity, using Cyclops as example; Darwin's pangenesis, Galton's and Weism Ann's views; isolation of germ-plasm in Cyclops; inheritance of acquired characters; Mendel's law, with Andalusian fowl as example; dominance illustrated by red X white Antirrhinum [?]. (6) Heredity in man: Mendelian inheritance of brachydactyly; Galton and Pearson laws applied to inheritance of stature, insanity, special ability, assertiveness, popularity; dangers from multiplication of unfit, and differential birth-rates favoring non- intellectuals. — Merle C. Coulter. 168. Breakwell, E. Improvement of sweet sorghums. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:549-551. 1920. — Summary of methods for securing improved strains. — L. R. Waldron. 169. Brierly, W. G. Report of the division of horticulture. Minnesota Sta. Rept. 1919: 49-54. 1919. — Outlines the work on inheritance of fruit characters, on sterility in fruits, on breeding for hardiness, and on breeding and selection of vegetables. — H. K. Hayes. 170. Burns, W. Some aspects of plant genetics. Agric. Jour. India 15: 250-281. 1920. 171. Carroll, Mitchel. An extra dyad and an extra tetrad in the spermatogenesis of Camnula pellucida (Orthoptera) ; nximerical variations in the chromosome complex within the individual. Jour. Morph. 34: 375-455. H pi. Sept. 20, 1920. — Ten specimens of Cam- nula pellucida, an orthopteran of the family Acrididae, were used in this investigation. Of these, five were seemingly unique in their cytological phenomena. Conjugation during maturation of a homologous pair of supernumerary chromosomes and the occurrence of "indisputable instances" of definite numerical variations within the individual in germinal chromosome complexes in non-pathological tissue are the main things considered in the paper. — The normal constituents of the complex are constant in number, and the aberrant condition is due to the presence of a varying number of supernumeraries in different cells within an individual. This variation is not constant for the gonad, but is constant for the cyst, and probably constant for the follicle until after the first spermatocyte mitosis. — The supernumeraries are all homologous in size, form, and behavior, and are apparently geneti- cally related. Within one individual the extra element may be absent in some complexes, unpaired in some, paired in others, and present in triplicate in still others. If unpaired, it divides in only one division, usually the second. It is a matter of chance as to whether or not it goes with the accessory chromosomes. If the supernumerary is paired it behaves as any ordinary chromosome. If present in triplicate, two of the elements synapse and behave No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 25 like an ordinary chromosome, while the other behaves in the manner described for the un- paired condition. Three cases of nondisjunction were observed. In two instances it was a matter of the non-disjunction of the dyads of the supernumerary tetrad in the first matura- tion division. The third is a "case of either maturational equational non-disjunction or a peculiar type of reductional non-disjunction of the chromatids of the extra tetrad." — The occurrence and behavior of the supernumeraries without non-disjunction make it possible to have six kinds of spermatozoa; and should non-disjunction take place, two extra classes are possible. Since non-disjunction occurs, it must duplicate a whole or a part of one of the elements of a normal complex. It is obvious that the behavior of the supernumeraries must influence the Mendelian ratios in any system of allelomorphs which may be carried by them, since certain loci may exist in a double, treble, quadruple, or quintuple condition. These various valences may be present in different germ cells of the same individual. — Mary T. Harman. 172. Castle, W. E. Whitman and Riddle on orthogenetic evolution in pigeons. Amer. Nat. 54: 188-192. Mar.-Apr., 1920. — A critical but appreciative review of this monumental work. Whitman believed his experiments to prove that Mendelism was relatively limited in its application, but Castle shows that the results may be interpreted in conformity with present Mendelian theory. — L. J. Cole. 173. CoRRENS, C. Pathologie und Vererbung bei Pfianzen und einige Schliisse daraus fiir die vergleichende Pathologie. [Pathology and inheritance in plants and a conclusion derived therefrom for comparative pathology.] Mediz. Klinik. 16:354-359. April, 1920. 174. CoRRENS, C. Eine gegliickte Verschiebung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisses. Botan- ische Versuche zur Frage nach der Entstehung des Geschlechts. [A successful modification of the sex-ratio. Botanical researches on the question of the origin of sex.] Natur u. Technik 2:65-71. 2 fig. 1920. 175. Coulter, M. C. [Rev. of: Castle, W. E. Piebald rats and the theory of genes. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 5: 126-130. 1 fig. April, 1919.] [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 235.] Bot. Gaz. 70:326. Oct., 1920. 176. Crozier, W. J. The intensity of assertive pairing in Chromodoris. Amer. Nat. 54: 182-184. 2 fi^. 1920. — This article is an additional note concerning a report published by Crozier in Journal of Ex-perimental Zoology in 1918 [See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1472] in which he shows that in the pairing of Chromodoris there is a "considerable degree of assortive con- jugation with respect to size." In that report regression lines showing mean lengths of mates pairing with individuals of a given length class were based on "artificial" measure- ments; that is, the soft bodies were somewhat flattened and accordingly lengthened by the process by which they were measured. In this report the relationship between the "artifi- cial" and normal measurements of 74 individuals is established, and the regression plots are revised in terms of the normal lengths. "The apparent intensity of homogamy in Chro- modoris is but little affected, if anything perhaps slightly improved, by the reduction of the original figures to the natural scale." — Sylvia L. Parker. 177. Davenport, C. B. Heredity of twin births. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 17:75-77. 1920. — The incidence of twin births in the general population is about 1 per cent, but in cer- tain families it rises to as high as 15 per cent, indicating that the tendency to twin produc- tion is an hereditary trait. Only biovular twinning is considered in the present communi- cation, and only such matings are selected for analysis as have produced at least two pairs of twins. In such cases the immediate relatives — parents, brothers, and sisters, — are found to produce twins from four to eight times as frequently as does the population at large. This is about equally true for relatives on the father's side and on the mother's side, which shows that the male exerts an influence on biovular twin production commensurate with that of the female. In explanation of the nature of this influence of the male, it is pointed out that 26 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, while there is evidence that double ovulation is relatively common, the probability that viable twins will be produced is dependent upon the chance that both ova will be fertilized and that both will be free from lethal factors. These prerequisites are dependent as much upon the sperm as upon the egg and it is known that fecundity and the presence or absence of lethal factors are hereditary traits. — C. H. Danforth. 178. Davis, Bradley M. [Rev. of Gager, C. Stuart. Heredity and evolut'on in plants. U X 20 cm., xi + 265 p., IIS fig. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920.] Science 52: 410. Oct, 29, 1920. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1672.] 179. Dembowski, Jan. Das Kontinuitatsprinzip und seine Bedeutung in der Biologie. [The principle of continuity and its significance in biology.] Vortr. u. Aufsatze ii. Entwick- lungsmech. Org. 21. 132 p. 1919. 180. Dexter, John S. Albino vertebrates. Science 52: 130-131. Aug. 6, 1920.— The author makes note of a pure albino grackle (Quiscalus quisctda aeneus), two albino speci- mens of Richardson's spermophile (Citellus richardsoni) , and a very light brown albinistic crow. — Sewall Wright. 181. [Diener, Richard.] The law of hybridizing discovered by Richard Diener. 20 X 26 cm., 15 p., 8 fig. Richard Diener, Kentfield, California. [1920.] — Author claims to have made the following discoveries: (1) AVhen parents are alike in size, the size of about 12 per cent of the offspring in the Fi will be exactly double that of either parent, while the remain- ing 88 per cent will range in size between the size of the individual parents and their sum. (2) When parents differ markedly in size, the offspring will be smaller than either parent if the smaller parent is the mother, and very little larger than the larger parent if the latter is the mother. (3) The pollen-bearing parent is always the dominating factor in changes of form and color. (4) In attempting to derive new colors always use a white flower as .the pollen parent "to break up the colors." (5) Among fowls, if two individuals are mated and the female offspring are mated back to the male parent, about one-third of the offspring of this second cross will be double the size of the animals originally mated. Basis of these generalizations are not specifically set forth. — G. H. Shull. 182. Dreyer, Th. F. A suggested mechanism for the inheritance of acquired characters. South African Jour. Sci. 15:272-277. 1917. — Author attempts to show that observed facts supporting Weismann's theory are meager — that acceptance of theory by younger genera- tion is partly a matter of sentiment. The character and properties of chromatin, lymph, and linin are reviewed. The linin being divided equally at cell division is considered as hereditary material on a par with the chromatin. A metabolic-products theory of heredity assumes the egg yolk to be specific for species, and assumes that it is a linin compound formed from radicals of the various tissues of the body. Reactions occur in different portions, so that it is not homogeneous; segmentation can thus split off different combinations of radicals which are built up into different tissues. Environmental factors may cause some of these radicals in the tissues to change so that the new yolk formed from the tissue radicals will contain new radicals from the altered tissues. Thus acquired characters could be repro- duced in the next generation in the absence of the causative stimulus. — /. L. Collins. 183. DuERDEN, J. E. Parallel mutations in the ostrich. Science 52: 165-168. Aug. 20, 1920. — Ostriches are degenerate in some respects, but highly specialized in others. The North African Ostrich {Struthio camelus) and the South African {S. australis) differ in well- marked characters, at least one of which (feathering of head) is believed to be a simple Mende- lian character. In other respects they are similar, and the author believes parallel evolution- ary changes are in progress in them. The similarity in this respect is attributed to parallel mutations in germ -plasms of common origin. The suggestion is made that while the majority of factors are static, some may be increasing in potency while others are dwindling. — L. J. Cole. No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 27 184. Dunn, L. C. Independent genes in mice. Genetics 5:344-361. May, 1920. — Author tests for linkage of certain color factors in mice and finds that the following relation- ships exist: Pink-eye and piebald spotting are independent; pink-eye and non-agouti are independent; black-eyed white spotting and piebald spotting are independent; black-eyed white spotting and agouti are independent; black-eyed white spotting and pink-eye are independent; piebald spotting and non-agouti, give indications of slight linkage, 46.23 ±1.2 per cent, "of doubtful significance."— Thus four independent groups of genes are established for mice with a possibility of a fifth. Two other groups are considered as possibilities from the data of other investigators. — C. C. Little. 185. Dunn, L. C. Linkage in mice and rats. Genetics 5: 325-343. May, 1920. — Reviews established cases of linkage in mice and rats; albinism, pink-eye and red-eye in rats; albinism and pink-eye in mice. — On basis of extensive experiments, cross-overs of 14.5 per cent between genes for albinism and pink-eye in mice. Crossing over occurs in both sexes, in males 13.65 =b 3.81 per cent and in females 15.91 ± 0.466 per cent. This difference between sexes is 3.81 times its probable error. In rats linkage between albinism and red-eye results in 1.8 =h 0.54 per cent cross-overs; albinism — pink-eye cross-over = 21.1 ± 2.92 per cent. Red-eye — pink-eye crossovers = 18.3 ± 0.38 per cent. Linear order of genes is indicated. Males in latter cross show 15.56 ± 0.538 per cent cross-overs, females, 20.46 ± 0.525 per cent. This difference is 6.51 times its probable error. These sex distinctions are probably due to sexual differences not yet discovered, in either structure or functioning of chromatin. — C. C. Little. 186. Ebstein, E. Zur Frage des Vorkommens von Kretinen und Albinos in Lerbach im Harz. [On the occurrence of cretins and albinos in Lerbach in the Harz.] Die Naturwissen- schaften 6:562-565. 1918. — In Die Harzreise, Heine notes presence in Lerbach of cretins {dumme Kropfleute) and albinos {weisze Mohren). The consequent ill-repute of Lerbach has clung to it until present times. From medical literature and correspondence author finds that cretins existed in Lerbach at the time of Heine's excursion in the Harz (1824), but that none have been known since 1830. Later lay references to cretinism are shown to be essen- tially repetitions of Heine's statement without examination of facts. Author finds that at least two albinos lived in Lerbach in 1824, and that nine cases in three families exist at pres- ent time. Attention is called to erroneous confusion of cretinism and albinism as manifes- tations of same condition, and distinctions are drawn between cretinism and simple dwarf and goitrous cases. Diminution in cretinism is ascribed to failure of extreme cases to repro- duce, and industrial development of Lerbach district leading to improvement in social and hygienic conditions, and introduction of fresh blood lines. Probable sources of Heine's information are discussed, and a geological description of Lerbach district is included. — R. E. Clausen. 187. Eddy, W. H., H. Lake and A. B. Lyman. Report of committee examining Minne- sota State Fruit-breeding Farm. Minnesota Hortic. 48: 36, 37. 1920. — Gives a brief resum6 of the most important work carried on at the farm. — H. K. Hayes. 188. Elderton, Ethel M. Life-history albums. Biometrika 12 : 373-374. Nov., 1919. — This is a brief discussion of the relative merits of Galton's and Taylor's family history albums, both from the point of view of the people throughout the country who may be induced to fill out the records, and of the statistical workers who will use the completed records in solving problems in heredity and eugenics. The Personal and Family History Register, compiled by Dr. Taylor places, author thinks, more emphasis than is justifiable on environ- ment as a factor in improving the race, and gives too much space to information about direct ancestors, leaving none for collaterals, while cousins are as closely related to one another as grandparents to grandchildren, and data about them would be much more accurate and easily obtained. Author feels that both Dr. Taylor's Register and Galton's Life History Album are too bulky and that the concise "Records of Family Faculties" issued by Galton in 1884 would very well meet the needs of the statistical worker and should be reissued.— Sylvia L. Parker. 28 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 189. FiscHEL, Alfred. Ursachen tierischer Farbkleidung. [Causes of animal coat color.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Org. 46:202-209. 1920. 190. Fischer, H. Pflanzenmetamorphose und Abstammungslehre. [Plant metamorphosis and evolution.] Die Naturwissenschaften 8: 268-271. 1920. — General discussion of evolution of plant organs and structures, with examples of problems and interpretations of plant meta- morphosis. Series may be constructed which show orthogenetic trend, but this is not result of inheritance of acquired characters. Causes of orthogenesis are unknown, but can be only partially environmental. Evolution is not always in direction of utility, but may lead to extinction of some Hues of descent. Changes resulting from alteration of living conditions are only certainly known as consequence of domestication, and they have no utility in preser- vation of species. — R. E. Clausen. 191. Fisher, R. A. The correlation between relatives on the supposition of Mendelian inheritance. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 52: 399-433. J^fig. 1919. — Derivation of formulae for correlation between direct and collateral relatives for characters determined by Mende- lian factors, making allowance for different degrees of dominance, for assortative mating, for multiple allelomorphism, and for coupling. By means of fraternal correlation influ- ence of dominance is distinguished from environmental causes of variability. Best available figures for human measurements show little or no indication of non-genetic causes. Marital correlation is probably genetic, not somatic. Hypothesis of cumulative Mendelian factors fits facts very accurately. — John Rice Miner. 192. Freeman, Geo. F. A progress report on cotton breeding at the Sultanic Agricultural Society. Sultanic Agric. Soc. Bull. 3. 16 p. 1920. — After discussing factors to be considered in breeding work with cotton, a,uthor outlines plan followed by him in Egypt, dealing with selection of mother plants, handling of pedigree-plant plots and increase plots, study of vegetative characters, flowering curves, yield and lint characters. — T. H. Kearney. 193. Gallaud, M. Une lignee de Giroflees a anomalies multiples et hereditaires. [A line of wall flowers with multiple hereditary anomalies.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171: 47-49. July, 1920. 194. Gassul, R. Nachtrag zu meiner Mitteilung iiber "Eine durch Generationen pra- valierende symmetrische Fingerkontraktur." [Supplement to my contribution on a symmet- rical contraction of the fingers prevailing through generations.] Deutsch. Med. Wochenschr. 44: 1450. 1918.— The original paper (Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 377) had neglected to indicate the relationships of members of the family in which a form of congenital finger contractions was reported. It is now possible to present a chart of the family tree from which it appears that the peculiarity may behave as a (dominant) Mendelian trait. — C. H. Danforth. 195. GooDALE, H. D. Practical results from studies on egg production. Massachusetts Sta. Bull. 191:97-104. 1 fig. 1919. — Paper is divided into three sections: I. Inbreeding. II. Is the influence of the male or of the female the more important? III. The exclusion of parasites. — I. A small number of data are presented which show that both inbreeding and outbreeding may either succeed or fail. The criterion of judgment on inbreeding must be the results in each individual case. — II. Author states that "the view that high fecundity does not descend from mother to daughter but does descend from mother to son, or from father to both sons and daughters is now generally accepted." Reports that "an experiment was made in which the male from a low line (breed not stated) was mated with several high pro- ducers belonging to a high line and at the same time to several low producers." "The off- spring of the high producers averaged 49.2 winter eggs against an average of the mothers and their sisters of 52.5 eggs. Nearly all were high producers. On the other hand, the offspring of the poor layers averaged only 11.6 winter eggs. In this experiment high production clearly descended from mothers to daughters In still another experiment a male belong- ing to a low line was mated to a female belonging to another low line. Most of the offspring No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 29 were high producers These experiments show that we are dealing with a situation that is complicated in many ways." III. Author points out necessity of control of all para- sites in studying the inheritance of fecundity and describes "the quarantine method" of rearing chicks. — W. A. Lippincott. 196. GooDALE, H. D. Is the inheritance of egg production an insoluble problem? Jour. Amer. Assoc. Instr. and Invest. Poultry Hush. 5:73, 74. 1919. — Author points out that while improved egg production through selection is a demonstrated fact, the laws of the inheritance of egg production have not been established. The latter present a complex prob- lem because egg production is a complex character made up of several subsidiary characters, the inheritance of each of which must be determined in advance. Five groups of difficulties in the way of solving the problem of the inheritance of egg production are suggested in the expressed hope that means of meeting them may be devised. These center around (1) the purity of stock, it being unlikely that stock pure for any of the hereditary factors concerned in egg production is in existence; (2) the need for larger numbers than may usually be secured from a single pair; (3) the character is expressed in one sex only, making it necessary to judge the genetic composition of males by their daughters; (4) the character is very sensitive to environmental diflferences which are difficult to avoid; and (5) the presence of insidious but unrecognized disease in the experimental flock, and the problems of disease resistance. — W. A. Lippincott. 197. GowEN, John W. Studies in milk secretion, V. On the variations and correlations of milk secretion with age. Genetics 5: 111-188. 9 fig. Mar., 1920.— A thorough biometric analysis of milk production in a single herd of Jersey cattle, involving 1741 eight-month lactation records. The mean and standard deviation are given for each age, together with the other constants necessarj' for fitting each distribution with the approximate skew curve. It is pointed out that there is a sufficiently close approach to the normal curve to justify use of the latter in many cases. Milk yield is found to rise to a maximum at 7.2 years, slowly falling thereafter, the whole curve being fitted best by a logarithmic function. The varia- bility at different ages rises and falls in a somewhat similar curve which is fitted with a cubic parabola. The correlation between the yields at any two ages is found to average +0.54, there being little difference between the value for successive lactations and lactations more widely separated in time. The correlations between the yield in one lactation and the total in various combinations of lactations were also found, that between the first and four following, for example, being +0.65, and that between the first four and the fifth being +0.69. Regres- sion formulae are given for calculating the most probable yield in a given year or group of years on the basis of a single lactation. The use of these formulae in culling a herd is discussed. — Sewall Wright. 198. GowEN, John W. Studies in milk secretion. VI. On the variations and correla- tions of butter-fat percentage with age in Jersey cattle. Genetics 5 : 249-324. 8 fi^. May, 1920. — The material for the study is taken from 1713 eight-months records of pure-bred Jersey cows, made in one herd under uniform conditions and management. Correlation coefficients and observed and theoretical means indicate the highest percentage butter-fat with the first lactation period, and a slight decline in percentage butter-fat with each addi- tional lactation period. The standard deviation and the coefficient of variation for the butter-fat percentage for different ages — or succeeding lactation periods — remained approxi- mately the same. The percentage fat for any one lactation period of a cow is an accurate indication of the butter-fat percentage to be expected in future lactation periods. — The dif- ference for the correlation coefficients for one lactation's butter-fat percentage with that of another lactation, and for one lactation's butter-fat percentage with the butter-fat percent- age over four lactation periods, gives a means of measuring the effect of environmental changes on the butter-fat percentage. It was found that the internal mechanism of the cow, which is probably hereditary, exercises six times the effect, in controlling butter-fat percentages, that the environmental changes have. The factors that control the butter-fat percentages have the same relative strength throughout the life of the cow to the exclusion of any group of factors acting for short periods. — R. R. Graves. 30 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 199. Grier, N. M. Variation and distribution of leaves in Sassafras. Biometrika 12: 372-373. Nov., 1919. — Three kinds of leaves are found on Sassafras trees — three-lobed, two-lobed, and single-lobed. Single-lobed leaves constitute about two-thirds of the foliage and are found at the ends of the branches. Two- and three-lobed leaves are found in shaded positions on the tree and can be produced on terminal branches by shading. — Karl Sax. 200. Grosser, Otto. Die Lehre vom spezifischen Eiweiss und die Morphologic, mit besonderer Anwendung auf Vererbungsfragen und den Bau der Plazenta. [The doctrine of specific proteins and morphology, with special application to questions of heredity and the structure of the placenta.] Anat. Anzeiger 53 : 49-57. May, 1920. — Not alone chemical struc- ture but also living structure is significant in determining morphology. Expression "organ- forming substances" might well be replaced by "organ-forming germinal regions" (His, 1874). Inheritance may be assumed to depend on specificity of proteins. Single molecule is not to be regarded as anlage of organ, but only in interrelation with other molecules. Pla- centa excludes specific proteins of mother until they have been digested, whereby their speci- ficity is lost. Mother is thus prevented from exercising larger influence in heredity. — A. Franklin Shull. 201. Hagedoorn, a. L., en A. C. Hagedoorn-van Vorstheuvel la Brand. Het overgeerfde moment bij bacterieele ziekten. [The inherited factor in bacterial infection.] Nederlandsch Tijdschr. voor Geneeskunde 63: 179-182. 1919. — Experimenting with mice for the study of inheritance of body-weight, authors crossed a small Japanese mouse with a strain of great white mice. These experiments had resulted in a great collection of Fi and F2 animals (some thousands), as also of back-crosses between Fi's and white or Japanese mice. In the spring of 1919 an epidemic disease broke out and made great ravages among the mice colonies. In the blood of 5 animals a specific Staphylococcus could be observed. All pure Japanese animals (60) died; white mice, inhabiting the same cages, survived. A great difference in susceptibility for this Staphylococcus-disease could be observed. In the other cages, this susceptibility was shown to be a Mendelian character and a recessive. The Fi-animals survived; from the Fz-animals 91 survived and 34 died (expected 93.75:31.25); back-crosses of Fi's with Japanese mice gave 32 dead animals and 25 immunes; out of back- crosses between Fi's and white mice only one of 51 animals died. These numerical relations make sure that the immunity against the Staphylococcus-inieciion is a dominant Mendelian factor according to the monohybrid scheme, susceptibility being the recessive. The first case of a simple inheritance of disease-resistance. — M. J. Sirks. 202. Haldane, J. B. S. Note on a case of linkage in Paratettix. Jour. Genetics 10: 47-51. July, 1920. — Naboxjrs (Jour. Genetics 3: and 7:) showed that the various color pat- terns in the grouse-locust, Paratettix texanus, are due to a series of Mendelian factors which are multiple allelomorphs or else very intensely linked, plus a factor which is allelomorphic to its absence. A re-examination of his data has demonstrated that in males the factor actually shows a crossover value of about 24 per cent with any of the other factors, and in females a crossover value of about 46 per cent. The factor thus exhibits a fairly marked linkage with all the others in males, and a very slight linkage in females. Slight differences in the crossover values appear between and certain of the other pairs. If the so-called multiple allelomorphs are really closely linked factors, then their presence in the heterozy- gous condition may increase the linkage, since heterozygous factors have been shown to cause such increases in Drosophila. The type of linkage in Paratettix seems to be intermediate between the type found in Drosophila and Bombyx where no crossing over occurs in the diga- metic sex, and the type in plants and mammals where linkage is equal in the two sexes. — H. H. Plough. 203. Haralson, C. Minnesota State Fruitbreeding Farm in 1919. Minnesota Hortic. 48: 34, 35. 1920. — Reports briefly on progress in testing new varieties. — H. K. Hayes. No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 31 204. Harris, J. Arthur. Practical universality of field heterogeneity as a factor influenc- ing plot yields. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:279-314. 10 fig. July 1, 1920.— Analysis is made of actual yields of plot tests reported by investigators for various root, hay, grain, and fruit crops. All fields were found to be heterogeneous, though they had been carefully selected for yield tests because of apparent uniformity. Soil heterogeneity is shown to have a real physical and chemical basis. — Author concludes that it is practically impossible to secure fields suitable for a direct comparison of yields. This fact emphasizes need of greater care in agronomic technique and of more extensive use of statistical method in analysis of the data from plot trials. — See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 480. — C. M. Woodworth. 205. Hartley, C. P. Better seed corn. U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmers' Bull. 1175. 14 P-, 9 fi^. 1920. — It is stated that low yields due to poor seed can be prevented by selecting seed corn (maize) in the field in the fall, and instructions are given for gathering, storing, grading, and testing the selected ears. Four experiments are summarized briefly as follows: (1) Varie- ties that produce most in some states are among the poorest in others. (2) Seed ears from the highest yielding rows of ear-to-row breeding plats have repeatedly produced better than ears taken from poorer rows. (3) Well-preserved seed was found to produce higher yields than seed injured by exposure, although both kinds germinated equally well. The difference between the two kinds is accentuated when they are grown in fertile soil. (4) Diseased ears or apparently healthy ears from diseased stalks give lower yields than disease-free ears from normal stalks. — /. H. Kempton. 206. Heal, John. Hippeastrum (Amaryllis). Gard. Chron. 68:60. July 31, 1920.— Recounts the unsatisfactory results of crossing Hippeastrum pardinum with other Hip- peastrums. Credits H. Leopoldii with more influence than any other Hippeastrum in pro- duction of best forms. — J. Marion Shull. 207. Heilbrunx, L. V. Studies in artificial parthenogenesis. III. Cortical change and the initiation of maturation in the egg of Cumingia. Biol. Bull. 38: 317-339. May, 1920. — When the egg of Cumingia is shed into sea-water, the first maturation spindle has formed, but no polar bodies are thrown off unless the egg is fertilized or treated with the proper reagents. The immature unfertilized egg is surrounded by a stiff vitelline membrane which tightly encloses the fluid cytoplasm and effectively prevents the throwing off of polar bodies; it is only when the egg is released from this restraint that maturation can proceed. Such a release from restraint can be accomplished in three ways: by membrane elevation, by mem- brane swelling, and by rupture of the membrane. Substances which themselves have low surface tension produce a lowered surface tension of the membrane, and this results in its elevation from the egg surface. Acids, alkalis, and certain salt solutions cause the vitelline membrane to swell. The membrane may be removed from the egg by shaking, or it may be caused to rupture by immersion in dilute sea-water. Maturation in Cumingia is not depend- ent upon an increase in oxidation. Cortical change in Cumingia produces no increase in permeabilit}'^ either to dissolved substances or to water. — Bertram G. Smith. 208. Heinricher, E. £in Versuch Samen, allenfalls Pfltanzen, aus der Kreuzung einer Laubholzmistel mit der Tannenmistel zu gewinnen. [An attempt to secure seeds, perhaps plants, from the cross between the mistletoe of deciduous trees with that of the Coniferae.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 37:392-398. Dec, 1919. 209. Henning, Hans. Mnemelehre oder Tierpsychologie? [The mneme theory or ani- mal psychology?] Biol. Zentralbl. 39: 187-192. April, 1919.— Controversial article in which rather incidentally author denies identity of "individual memory" and heredity.— A. Franklin Shull. 210. Hooper, J. J. Inheritance of Jersey colors. Jour. Dairy Sci. 2:290-292. 1919.— This paper deals with the inheritance of self vs. broken color (white spotting), tongue color and switch color, in Jersey cattle. The data are largely taken from the American Jersey herd books. Broken color mated to broken color was found to give 194 broken color to 15 self 32 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, color; broken-colored bull to self-colored cow gave 179 broken color to 257 self color; and self colored bulls and cows gave 425 self color to 75 broken color. Citations of the progeny of certain bulls are given. — Mating white-tongue parents gave 71 per cent white-tongued. Mating parents of white switch gave 91 per cent white switch. — The suggestion is made, based on the fact that roan had disappeared from the Station herd, that the old roan Jersey is due to a dominant factor. — John W. Gowen. 211. HosKiNG, A. Hybrid Calceolarias, Card. Chron. 68:47, 61. 2 fig. July 24, 31, 1920. — A list of hybrid Calceolarias with brief descriptions and statement of parentage. — J. Marion Shull. 212. Jaramillo, p. J., and F. J. Chittenden. On double stocks. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 74^82. 2 pi. 1919. — Correlation shown between double flowering and vigor of plant at time of pricking out, and confirming the observations of Miss Saunders to that effect. — J. Marion Shull. 213. Kathariner, L. Die Entwicklungsgeschichte der digenetischen Trematoden und die Kontinuitat des Keimplasmas. [The ontogeny of the digenetic trematodes and the con- tinuity of the germ-plasm.] Zool. Anzeig. 51 : 220-223. Aug., 1920. 214. Kiessling, L. tJber eine Mutation in einer reinen Linie von Hordeum distichiim L, [On a mutation in a pure line of Hordeum distichum L.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 19: 145-159. June, 1918. — In the ninth generation of a pure line of Hordeum distichum L. a mutation occurred which is strikingly different from the parent form in many morphological and physiological characters. In appearance the mutant is somewhat larger than the unmu- tated plants and is lighter green in color, due to a reduction in chlorophyll. When the mutant was crossed with the parent form, all differences were inherited as if due to a single point- mutation. The author entertains the hypothesis that the mutation is concerned primarily with a reduction in chlorophyll, and that the morphological variations are merely expressions of the plant's readjustment to the decreased chlorophyll content. — W. H. Eyster. 215. Kronacher, C. Die deutsche Schweinezucht und Haltung nach dem Kriege. [German swine breeding and maintenance after the war.] Flugschr. Deutsch. Ges. Ziich- tungskunde 41: 1-47. 1918. — The author emphasizes the importance to Germany of com- plete independence from foreign countries in regard to food supply and the consequent importance of raising the swine population to its prewar level. The problem is primarily one of feeding rather than of breeding, and the first consideration is the basing of German swine husbandry wholly on home-grown feeds. As regards breeding, most stress should be placed on constitutional vigor, the extreme development of early maturity, and ease of fattening having proved deleterious in this respect. — Sewall Wright. 216. Kronacher, C. AUgemeine Tierzucht. Ein Lehr- und Handbuch fxir Studierende und Ziichter. Vierte Abteilung (Abschnitt VI des Gesamtwerkes) : Die Ziichtung. [General animal breeding. A text and handbook for students and breeders. 4th part (Section VI of the complete work): Breeding. 8 vo. 357 p. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1919.— The first chapter, 210 pages, deals comprehensively with selection, including discussion of systems of mating, — cross-breeding, pure-breeding, inbreeding, etc., — considerations in the judgment of pedigree, performance, and conformation, discussion of fancy points, technical methods of judging, special considerations in judging breeding stock, etc. — The second chapter, 137 pages, deals with the physiology of reproduction in the domestic animals. — Sewall Wright. 217. Leake, H. Martin. Report on the maintenance and improvement of the quality of Egyptian cotton and the increase of its yield. Ministry Agriculture Egypt. Cairo. 38 p. 1920.— Author was invited by Egyptian Ministry of Agriculture to make "recommendations with a view to the maintenance and improvement of the qualit}' of Egyptian cotton and the increase of its yield." His report deals with such matters as relation of commercial supply No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 33 and demand for particular types of cotton, to work of breeder and grower; impurity of com- mercial varieties in Egypt due to crossing and seed mixture; and relation of yield and quality to physical environment. He outlines a program of economic, botanical, and agricultural investigations looking to improvement of crop with especial emphasis upon breeding and increase of pure lines to replace present mixed commercial stocks. He discusses complica- tions caused by uncontrolled introduction of new varieties. — T. H. Kearney. 218. L^CAiLLON, A. Sur la reproduction et le developpement des bivoltins accidentels et de la premiere generation qui en derive, chez le Bombyx du M(irier. [On the production and development of accidental bivoltins and the first generation derived from them in the silkworm (Bombyx mori). Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 168: 366-368. 1919. 219. LiPPiNCOTT, W. A. Pedigreeing poultry. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Giro. 67. 16 p., 10 fig. 1918.— Methods of pedigreeing poultry, including methods of marking breeders and offspring, trapnests, methods of pedigree hatching, chick and mating indexes, marking of eggs, flock breeding records, pedigree blanks and egg records are given. — H. D. Goodale. 220. Little, C. C. Alternative explanations for exceptional color classes in doves and canaries. Amer. Nat. 54: 162-175. Mar.-Apr., 1920. — The author reviews the explanation based on partial sex-linkage and non-disjunction previously offered to account for the appear- ance of exceptional color classes in doves and canaries, and concludes that neither is adequate. He then advances the theory that these occasional cases may be the results of mutative changes of the recessive factors to their dominant allelomorphs. His view has no more proof in existing data than the others, but has the advantage of avoiding the immediate expectation of color classes which have not been reported. [His suggestion, however, that female doves and canaries may be homozygous for dominant sex-linked factors is contrary to all present experience.] — L. J. Cole. 221. Lloyd-Joxes, O., and F. A. Hays. The influence of excessive sexual activity of male rabbits. I. On the properties of the seminal discharge. Jour. Exp. Zool. 25:463-497. 1918. — The plan of the experiment as stated by the authors was "to have the male accom- plish, in as rapid succession as possible, a certain number of preliminary 'services' and then to mate him once to the breeding female from which the litter was desired. The 'end serv- ices' from which litters were secured for the progeny studies were the fifth, tenth, fifteenth and twentieth, and about an equal number of first-service litters M'ere obtained as controls. When semen studies were made, however, it was aimed to recover specimens from the first and from every fifth service thereafter; thus, in a series of twenty services, five specimens of semen would ideally be recovered for study. This ideal set of specimens from a twenty- service series was seldom obtained, however." — It was' shown that excessive sexual service causes decrease in amount of ejaculated semen, decrease in number of sperm cells per cubic millimeter, decrease in the proportion of sperm that show progressive motion, decrease in their duration of motion, decrease in percentage of fertile matings, and decrease in number of young per litter. — H. L. Ibsen. 222. LiTNDBORG, H. Arv och miljo. Befolkningspolitiska synpunkter. [Inheritance and environment. Race-political views.] Det nya Sverige [Stockholm], 14: 3-12. 1920. — Author holds that great crossing of races degenerates constitution and increases degradation. Cross- ing of races takes place in a much greater degree among the lower and poorer part of the population than among the middle classes. Author has proved by his own investigations that the lowest classes — those which are in social respect the most degenerated of the popu- lation — consist to a greater extent of individuals with other race-qualities, such as darker hair and eyes, than the great bulk of the population. The middle class has a more homo- geneous composition than the poorer ones. The biological sciences are nowadays promoting a new social evolution, by which the most important matters are life values and not wealth or other material advantages. Great and richly equipped eugenical scientific institutions must be established in all civilized countries. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren. BOTANICAX ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII, NO. 1 34 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 223. Mac-Auliffe, A. Marie et Leon. Influence du milieu parisien sur la race. [Influence of Parisian environment on the race.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171 : 527-529. Sept., 1920. 224. MiLEwsKi, A. W. tJber Torniers experimentelle Untersuchungen, iiber das Ent- stehen pathologischer Verbildungen bei Tieren, sowie weiteres iiber experimentelles Erzielen von monstrosen Goldfischarten, [On Tornier's investigations on the origin of pathological malformations in animals as well as further consideration of the experimental attaining of monstrous goldfish species.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Org. 44: 472-498. 1918. 225. MiLLiKBN, C. S. Some facts about citrus bud selection. California Citrograph 5:222. May, 1920. — A popular article emphasizing "bud selection" as essential for the most profitable production of citrus fruits. — Howard B. Frost. 226. Nachtsheim, Hans. Crossing-over-Theorie oder Reduplikations-hypothese? [The crossing-over theory or the reduplication hypothesis?] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 127-141. 4 fig. Jan., 1920. — A critical review of Trow's modification of the Bateson- PuNNETT hypothesis of reduplication as an explanation of coupling and repulsion (linkage) (Trow, A. H., Jour. Genetics 5: 1916). Although the more recent papers were not available to the author, it is concluded that the crossing-over hypothesis, as worked out in the studies on Drosophila, offers a better explanation of the phenomena. — H. H. Plough. 227. Namyslowski, B. Etat actuel des recherches sur les phenomenes de la sexualite des Mucorinees. [The state of researches on sextiality in the Mucorineae.] Rev. G4n. Bot. 32:193-215. 9 fig. 1920. 228. Ness, H. [misprinted as N. Hess]. Experiences in plant hybridization. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16:52-60. (1919) 1920.— Author calls attention to fact that much which has been written concerning plant hybridization has been largely repetition of phenomena in stock examples. — Importance of plant hybridization was early appreciated by floricul- turists, and from them we have many forms of begonia, canna, gladioli, etc. Their work resulted from an attempt to supply a demand and few records have been kept; thus the scientific value of the work has been greatly lessened.— The uncertainty of positive results makes hybridization work by the individual a somewhat uncertain financial proposition, and thus is best done by a publicly supported institution.— Author has worked with two genera, Rubus and Quercus, that with Rubus being an Adams Fund project. Has made many crosses among which were May's dewberry (R. villosus) also called Austin, by the Early Harvest blackberry (R. argutus). In the first generation the May's was almost completely dominant, and a good population was obtained. From the reciprocal crosses he failed to obtain any progeny, neither was he successful when Early Harvest was the mother and the pollen was secured from other sources. In these experiments several attempts were made with crosses of difi"erent varieties and species of Rubus but without success until he used seedlings of the raspberry, R. rubisetus, as the maternal parent; and the influence of this parent was manifest in subsequent generations. He notes: "The most remarkable part of these phenomena appears to me to be that fertility appeared only in the most robust group of those of the Fz generation in which the raspberry was dominant; and that having once occurred, it became invariably hereditary just as though sterility was merely a passing crisis."— His work with Quercus shows that "the various individuals of a species vary widely in their affinity for foreign pollen To be successful in hybridization it is neces- sary to search out by trial individuals having the proper afiinity for the pollen to be applied. For this purpose seedlings would naturally be preferred to plants produced vegetatively."— C. E. Myers. 229. Onslow, H. The inheritance of wing colour in Lepidoptera. III. Melanism in Boarmia consortaria (var. consobrinaria, BKH.). Jour. Genetics 9:339-346. 1 pi. Mar., 1920.— Melanism of consobrinaria, crossed with the grayish speckled type, is dominant. In No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 35 four species of Geometrids, Tephrosia consonaria and T. extersaria, Boarmia abieiaria and B. consorlaria, a melanic variety has appeared in south England remote from the industrial regions of the North. That melanism is common in industrial and urban districts is explained by the correlation of a greater hardiness with melanism. Natural selection, acting more dras- tically in the manufacturing areas "where the woods and vegetation upon which the larvae feed have been largely destroyed and elsewhere contaminated with a chemical deposit," weeds out individuals of the feebler type form, but permits melanic mutants to develop. Melanics of B. consorlaria as well as of T. consonaria (var. nigra) seem to the author to be "earlier, stronger and larger than the type forms. Moreover, there is often a slight excess of melanics in most crosses."— The author calls attention to a curious inverse relationship between sex and the melanism of consobrinaria which he regards as fortuitous, though it occurs in a single inbred strain and the numbers, in at least one family, are of considerable size. This relationship appears in reciprocal crosses between the heterozygous dominant (melanic) X recessive (type): Heterozygous (melanic) 9 X recessive (type) cf gives approximately: 9 9 7 heterozygous: 9 recessive (?&9 " :7 Recessive (type) 9 X heterozygous (melanic) cT gives: — 9 9 9 heterozygous : 7 recessive cTd" 7 " : 9 Nearly half of the recorded matings between heterozygote and recessive (6 out of 14) fall into this too symmetrical scheme [that suggests an unorthodox sex-linkage or a sex-linked lethal factor destroying 25 per cent of every brood]. The numbers are small except in the fol- lowing case: recessive (type) 9 X heterozygous melanic cT, giving 64 melanic 9 9 , 49 melanic d^cf ; 49 type 9 9,60 type cf cf .— /. H. Gerould. 230. Fetch, T. Variation in coconuts. Trop. Agric. Ceylon 54: 1. 1 pi. 1920. 231. Fhipps, William H. The law of hybridizing. Florists' Exch. 50:814. Oct. 16, 1920.— A criticism of Weston, T. A., Rev. of [Diener, R.], The law of hybridizing, etc. [See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 248.]— G. H. Shull. . 232. Powell, George T. Thirty years' experience in the application of bud selection in the fruit industry. California Citrograph 5:344, 364r-366. 4 fig- Sept., 1920.— A paper read at a meeting of California nurserymen. Over 30 years ago, the writer publicly advocated propagation from superior orchard trees. Discussion largely relates to the apple. Writer has several thousand apple trees, "practically all" propagated from carefully selected bearing trees; the apparent results are excellent, though comparative tests are not reported. The opinion is expressed that selection for resistance to cold and to disease is important. — Howard B. Frost. 233. Pridham, J. T. Natural crossing in wheat. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 457- 461. 2 fig. 1920.— Quotations from various authors are given, as to relative abundance of natural crosses. The author cites a few instances of natural crosses coming under his own observation and mentions one commercial variety, Marshall No. 3, an Australian wheat which originated as a natural cross. — L. R. Waldron. 234. Pridham, J. T. The selection of promising wheat plants. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:548. 1920.— Suggestions to farmers for selecting plants from fields suitable for future increase. — L. R. Waldron. 235. Rei CHERT, E. T. A biochemic basis for the study of problems of taxonomy, heredity, evolution, etc., with special reference to the starches and tissues of parent-stocks and hybrid stocks and the starches and hemoglobins of varieties, species and genera. Carnegie Inst. Wash- ington Publ. 270. Part l,xi + 376 p. , 34 pL, 820 fig. Part 2, vii + 377-834- 1919.— This memoir. 36 GENETICS BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, in two large volumes, is designated as complementary alid supplementary to the author's (and Brown's) well-known earlier crystallographic studies of the hemoglobins, and to his work on the stereochemistry of protoplasmic processes and products as displayed through the differentiation and specificity of starches (Nos. 116 and 173, respectively, of the Carnegie Institution of Washington) . Like its predecessors the present study is regarded as exploratory in character. The main thesis of the three sets of studies is that "in different organisms corresponding complex organic substances that constitute the supreme structural compo- nents of protoplasm and the major synthetic products of protoplasmic activity are not in any case absolutely identical in chemical constitution, and that each such substance may exist in countless modifications, each modification being characteristic of the form of proto- plasm, the organ, the individual, the sex, the species, and the genus." — Since the molecule of such a protein as serum-albumin may have as many as 1000 million stereo-isomers, the incon- ceivable number of possible constitutional differences in the corresponding proteins of differ- ent individuals is obvious. The author believes that the collective evidence available today indicates that every individual is a chemical entity that differs in characteristic particulars from every other, and that differences in chemical constitution and composition can account for all the differences which serve to characterize genera, species, and individuals. Being an inert, non-living synthetic product of metabolic activity which beavs no resemblance to the protoplasm that gives rise to it, starch may be used as an indicator in determining whether the products of synthesis are correspondingly modified with the stereochemical pecu- liarities of the protoplasm by which they are produced. Rei chert finds that such is the case. Moreover, since such differences are diagnostic, they constitute "a strictly scientific basis for the classification of plants." The present research treats mainly of the properties of parent- stocks and hybrid-stocks, and correspondingly, of heredity. The author thinks that the importance of hybridization in the genesis of species has been greatly underrated. He ex- presses the object of his research as follows: "In both of the preceding researches satisfactory evidence was recorded to justify the conclusion that complex organic substances exist in different stereo-isomeric forms in different organisms, and that the differences are specific in relation to genera, species, and varieties, and in general in striking accord with the accepted data of the systematist. Naturally it seemed to be a matter of the greatest fundamental importance to determine to what recognizable degrees these physico-chemical properties are transmitted from seed and pollen parents in altered or unaltered form in the hybrid; if it is possible to predict the heritability of this or that property: whether or not new physico- chen^iical properties appear in the hybrid; and if the phenomena of physico-chemical inherit- ance are not only cons stent with, but also in explanation of, the data of the systematist and with the experience of the plant breeder." In connection with a discussion of the criteria of hybrids and mutants he translates a lecture of Fockb (1881) rarely found in libraries, which summarizes under five propositions a great amount of data pertaining to hybrids and their offspring. Reichert regards Mendelism as of value merely in explaining certain phenomena of inheritance and but one of several types of mechanisms of heredity. He uses the term "unit-character" and "unit-character phase" repeatedly but apparently not in the accepted Mendelian sense, for he says: "The term character is used throughout this research in a con- ventional sense to signify any property that serves to characterize any part or property of starch or plant. Inasmuch as each such property is a unit of comparison, each may appro- priately and advantageously be referred to as a unit-character." What he finds regarding starch characters in hybrids when compared with those of parents may be summarized in his own words: "If starch characters are heritable they should, in order to meet theoretic require- ments, exhibit peculiarities of inheritance corresponding to those observed in gross and microscopic anatomic plant characters. This deduction will be found to have ample justi- fication in the results of this research. Herein it will be found that the starches of the hybrids frequently exhibit in histologic, polariscopic, and physico-chemic properties some degree of intermediateness between the parents, usually nearer one or the other. In any given hybrid certain of the propert'es may be exactly or practically exactly intermediate and other properties may be identical with the corresponding properties of one or the other parent. In many instances one or more of the characters of the hybrid, such as the relative No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 37 number and the types of compound grains, the degree of fissuration, the regularity or irregu- larity of the forms of the grains, the chara.cters of the hilum, the distinctness and size of the lamellae, the polariscopic properties, the temperature or gelatinization, the aniline reactions and the qualitative and quantitative reactions with the various chemical reagents, were developed or manifested in degrees beyond the parental extremes. Moreover, peculiarities of various kinds were observed at times in the hybrid that were not apparent in either parent." — In general he concludes that "the results of the hemoglobin and starch researches are mutually confirmatory in support of the existence of stereo-isomeric forms of complex organic substances that are specifically modified in relation to varieties, species, subgenera, and genera, and that these specificities indicate corresponding peculiarities of the protoplasm in which the substances are formed." — In Chapter VI of Volume 1, the author discusses the applications of the results of his researches under the following headings: specificity of stereo-isomerides in relation to genera, species, etc. ; protoplasm a complex stereo-isomeric system; the germ-plasm a stereochemic system; protoplasmic stereochemic system applied to the explanation of the mechanism of variation, sports, fluctuations, etc. ; protoplasmic stereochemic system applied to the genesis of species.— Part 2 (a separate volume), "Special, general and comparative laboratory data of the properties of the starches and of the tissues of parent-stocks and hybrid stocks," consists of the laboratory records prepared by two of the author's assistants. Dr. Elizabeth E. Clark, and Miss Martha Bunting. — M. F. Guyer. 2.36. RosE.VBERG, O. Weitere Untersuchungen iiber die Chromosomenverhaltnisse in Ctepis. [Further studies on the chromosome relations in Crepis.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. .'4: 319-325. 5 fig. 1920. — In Crepis Rente riana there are quite normal grains with only two (normally three) chromosomes to be found. This depends on abnormalities in the reduc- tion division. Of Crepis Reuteriana (2x = 6) a gigas mutation with 12 somatic chromosomes is found, each of the three chromosome types being represented by four chromosomes. A great deal of polyploidy is now known in the genus. Crepis biennis and others have 42 somatic chromosomes. These species may be interpreted as 14-ploid, possessing only the same 3 typos of chromosomes as we find in Crepis virens, but repeated 14 times.— X. V. Ossian Dahlgren. 237. RuNNSTROM, J. Bsfruktningens och fosterutvecklingens problems. [The problems of fertilization and embryology.] Vetenskap o. Bildniiig 30. 2S2 p., 109 fig. A Bonnier: Stockholm, 1920. — Contains a treatise on the origin and evolution of the cell-idea. Aims to give a comprehension of the physiology of cell-division and fertilization, illustrating chief problems of the mechanics of evolution by some examples. Last chapter treats of endo- crine secretion of sex-glands, etc. Some results are new, being taken from the author's own still unfinished studies on the mechanics of evolution as exemplified in sea-urchin eggs. Working with sea-w^ater free from K or Ca, may produce a symmetrical system perpendicular to the normal one. Author also demonstrates some experiments to eliminate the echinid rudiment which is to be found at the left side of the larva. In spite of the extirpation of this rudiment, certain symmetrical changes take place in the alimentary canal. A new mouth and a new oesophagus may be developed. The latter is often produced in a manner different from that of the normal metamorphosis. Changes of the rectum diiTering from normal development are also found. In some cases three quite atypical organs have been discovered: (1) A ciliated organ, that produces an excretion, in connection with the anus. (2) An outgrowth from the body, produced by cylindrical epithelium with capacity of secre- tion and liable to be regenerated. (3) A pocket-like formation with ciliated cells. The author considers that genes exist in sea-urchin eggs, the effects of which are normally sup- pressed by the great development of the echinid rudiment. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren. 238. Ruzicka, Vladislav. Restitution und Vererbung. Experimenteller, kritischer und synthetischer Beitrag zur Frage des Determinationsproblems. [Restitution and heredity. Experimental critical and synthetic contribution to the problem of determination.] Vortr. u. Aufsatze u. EntAvicklungsmech. Org. 23 : 69 p. 1919. 38 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 239. ScHRADER, Franz. Sex determination in the white-fly (Trialeurodes vaporariorum). Jour. Morph. 34: 267-305. 4 V^- Sept. 20, 1920. — Other workers had discovered that virgin females of this white-fly produce only males in America, but only females in England. Author shows that ,number of chromosomes in American race is 22 except in pseudo-vitelline or mycetoma cells, where number is 30 or more. In female, maturation includes two divi- sions, and mature egg contains eleven chromosomes. If egg is unfertilized, it produces male with eleven chromosomes. In spermatogenesis reduction division is completely suppressed and spermatozoa have haploid number of chromosomes. Whether egg is fertilized or not is in some way controlled in female. — Author suggests parthenogenetic production of females (as in England) may be due to reunion of polar nucleus with egg nucleus, or to doubling of number of chromosomes at some stage. If fertilized eggs of English race produce both sexes, explanation may be that entrance of spermatozoon causes reduction of chromosomes in egg (a process omitted or neutralized in parthenogenetic egg), but some of spermatozoa do not function any further, leaving egg to develop with haploid number and produce male. — English race is supposed to have originated from American, perhaps by mutation. Occur- rence of some males in England may be result of importation from America. — A. Franklin Shull. 240. Shamel, a. D., L. B. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer. Citrus-fruit improve- ment: a study of bud variation in the Eureka lemon. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 813. 88 p. 18 tables, 22 fig. June, 1920. — The methods employed in this investigation have been, in general, like those used in the three previously reported studies of orange and grapefruit varieties (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entries 707, 708, 709). Selected plots in Eureka lemon orchards including 252 trees altogether, have furnished detailed records of yield, grade, etc., while cooperative arrangements have given individual records for about 14,000 trees. Extensive statistical data, covering about 6 years (1911-1917) are presented. — Eight strains of Eureka lemon are described, all of which "have been traced to individual fruit or limb variations in trees growing under normal conditions," and have been experimentally propagated by budding. These strains differ in many characters, such as habit of growth, size and shape of leaves, productiveness, shape of fruit, thickness of rind, and season of production. The Eureka strain, which is that most typical of the variety as usually grown, is the only type desir- able for commercial lemon production. Trees of certain other types, such as the Shade- tree strain, are numerous in some orchards, evidently because of the former practice of using as budwood the vigorous non-bearing shoots, which are especially numerous with these strains. — The authors advise that all buds for propagation be taken from shoots bearing normal fruits, and that these bud sticks be cut only from superior performance-record trees; also, that orchard trees of inferior strains be top-worked or replaced. — Howard B. Frost. 241. Shamel, A. D., L. B. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer. Citrus-fruit improve- ment: a study of bud variation in the Lisbon lemon. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 815. 70 p., IS tables, 14 fi^. June, 1920. — The work with the Lisbon lemon closely paralleled that with the Eureka lemon (see Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 240) in methods, general results, and conclusions. Detailed records were secured for 128 trees in selected plots, and cooperative records for about 13,000 trees. Five definite strains are described in detail; others have been observed but not thoroughly studied. Of these five strains, the Lisbon strain, representing "the established ideal for the Lisbon variety," is the most productive. The Open strain, though less hardy and productive, has an advantage in its tendency to produce fruit throughout the year, resembling the Eureka strain of the Eureka variety in this respect. In some orchards the Open strain predominates, and in others the Lisbon strain. The other strains are mark- edly inferior. — Howard B. Frost. 242. Stark, Mary B. A benign tumor that is hereditary in Drosophila. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 5: 573-580. 5 fig. Dec, 1919.— A new benign tumor appeared in a stock of Drosophila. By inbreeding, a strain true to the tumor character was established. One gene for the tumor is situated in the third chromosome close to dichaete. Extraction of the No. 1, February, 1921J GENETICS 39 tumor character in only five per cent of the flies shows other genes also involved. These are under investigation. 780 larvae show from one to three tumors situated in 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14th segments. Metastases may or may not be present. Tumor may also be in head or may replace wing or other appendages. Tumor cells are rounded or polygonal and contain pigment. Pigment increases with age. Cells giving rise to tumor are originally hypodermal. Tumor in adult fly is permeated with black pigment. When tumor develops in abdomen, no shortening of life in fly results. Tumor was inoculated in 40 larvae; only 2 survived; both grew tumor and were sterile females. — C. C. Little. 243. Tackholm, G. On the cytology of the genus Rosa. A preliminary note. Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. 14: 300-311. 3 Jig. 1920.— Very brief summary of author's chief results. About 300 bushes, representing approximately 230 different forms, are investigated. The funda- mental haploid chromosome number in Rosa is 7. There are two very different groups of species: (1) the very polymorphous conmo-section (in the widest sense), and (2) all other sections. The latter group have only gemini (7, 14, or 21) in the diakinesis; the former pos- sess both paired chromosomes and single ones. The following table gives the observed numbers: TYPE BIVAlENTS SINGLES SOMATIC Z-PLOIDT 1 7 — 14 Diploid 2 14 — 28 Tetraploid 3 21 — 42 Hexaploid 4 7 7 21 Triploid 6 7 14 28 Tetra[)loid 6 7 21 35 Pentaploid 7 7 28 42 Hexaploid 8 14 7 35 Pentaploid 9 14 14 42 Hexaploid 10 Variable Variable 32-36 Anorthoploid The roses of types l-3^have only sexual reproduction. Some of this species have varieties with different chromosome numbers (haploid number 7 and 14; 14 and 21). Triploid roses (type 4) may be hybrids between types 1 and 2. Type 8 may be interpreted as the result of a cross between types 2 and 3. The reduction division in the anthers is quite in accord- ance with the Drosem-hybrid scheme of Rosenberg. The immense number of forms belong- ing to the section Caninae (in the widest sense) are distributed in the types 5-7. The reduction divisions of the Caninae in the anthers and the ovules are carried out in a quite different manner. In the pollen mother cells, the gemini first come to the equatorial plate. Later the univalent chromosomes which are scattered irregularly on the spindle are also arranged in the same plate surrounding the gemini. The partners of the bivalents first pass to the poles. The singles lag a little, divide, and then the halves pass to the poles. The bivalent and univalent chromosomes consequently have different anaphase stages. Not all the halves of the singles may be included in the daughter nuclei. By the second division the de- scendants of the bivalents are regularly distributed and included, without or with a few of the other chromosomes in the four ordinary microspores. There even arise a great num- ber of small microspores from each mother cell, containing only descendants from the uni- valent chromosomes. Some of the microspores — probably those containing descendants of the bivalents— develop into pollen grains, are able to germinate, and must be supposed to be capable of fertilization (hybrids between roses in the section Caninae are known). In the embryo-sac mother cells we have ordinarily the two equatorial plates — the bivalents next to the chalaza, the singles next to the micropyle. In the anaphase the partners of the gemini are separated; but in about four-fifths of the studied cases, all the singles pass undivided to the micropylar pole. In the second division all the chromosomes are divided. Consequently, the tetrad has two large nuclei and two smaller ones, with only 7 chromosomes. The former 40 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, are also included in the greater cells. Eggs which have taken their origin from the larger megaspores are capable of fertilization, as proved by the chromosome sets in hybrids between plants of the section Caninae and normally sexual roses. In spite of the sexual potency of the Caninae their propagation is almost exclusively apomictical. This fact explains the con- stancy of the mentioned chromosome sets. Type 10 must be supposed to be originated by fertilization. — "All species and forms investigated, belonging to the section Caninae — i.e., the majority of the examined roses, originated in Europe, North Africa and West Asia — are very ancient hybrids representing the Fi generation, which, ever since its origin thousands of years ago, has been maintained owing to apomictical reproduction." The anorthoploids rep- resent Fa or any later generation of crosses. The apomictical reproduction was probably induced by these ancient crosses. To explain all the chromosome sets in the Caninae, the existence of octoploid and decaploid sexual forms is assumed. The enormous polymorphy in the Caninae is to be ascribed to hybridism. Also vegetative mutations produced in apomic- tical stocks have no doubt contributed to the polymorphy. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren. 244. Thomson, Godfrey H. On the degree of perfection of hierarchical order among correlation coefficients. Biometrika 12: 355-366. 2 fig. Nov., 1919. — Derivation of Hart- Spearman criterion for degree of hierarchical order (degree in which correlations of anj' two mental tests with others are in same sequence of magnitude) neglects important term. With correlated dice throws, where true correlations are known a priori, criterion exaggerates perfection of hierarchy. — John Rice Miner. 245. Vandel, M. a. Sur la reproduction des Planaires at sur la signification de la fecondation chez ces animaux. [On the reproduction of some Planarians and on the signifi- cance of fecundation in these animals.] Compt. E,end. Acad. Sci. 171: 125-128. July, 1920. 246. Weatherw.\x, Paul. A misconception as to the structure of the ear of maize. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 359-362. 6 fig. Aug., 1920.— An attempt to refute the evidence published bj' Collins which indicated that the ear of maize may have developed through the twisting of yoked pairs of spikelets. The author contends from an examination of the cobs of several mature ears that dropping of rows of seeds is due to the discontinuance of a row of paired spikelets and not to the loss of the pedicelled spikelets from yoked pairs, as suggested by Collins. In conclusion it is stated that there is no in(Mcation that short rows represent long rows partially aborted, but that the abortion of spikelets or of rows in the ear seems to be much more constant as a characteristic of theories than of real ears. Figures four and six apparently have been transposed. — J. H. Kemplon. 247. W[eston, T. a.] [Rev. of: [Diener, Richard]. The law of hybridizing discovered by Richard Diener. SO .r 27 cm., 15 p., 8 fig. Richard Diener: Kentfield, California, [1920.] ] Florists' Exch. 50: 554. Sept. 11, 1920.— See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 231, 248. 248. W[eston, T. A]. The law of hybridizing. Florists' Exch. 50: 981. Nov. 6, 1920.— Reply to William H. Phipps's criticism of the author's review of [Diener, R.] The law of hybridizing discovered by Richard Diener. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 231, 247. — G. H. Shull. 249. WoLL, F. W., AND Paul L. Dougherty. Advanced registry testing of dairy cows. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 218. 15 p. 1920. — Presents arguments for the advanced- registry testing of pure-bred cows, cites records made in California, and gives instructions on how to initiate such a test in California. — John W. Gowen. No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 41 HORTICULTURE J. H. GouRLEY, Editor FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE 250. Allen, W. J., and W. C. Gay Brereton. Orchard notes, July. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 523-525. 1920. — A discussion of pruning of the apple and pear and its relation to the production of fruit buds. — L. R. Waldron. 251. Allen, W. J., and W. C. Gay Brereton. Thompson's Improved and Navalencia oranges. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 519. 1920. 252. Anonymous. American books on agriculture. [Rev. of : Gould, H. P. Peach grow- ing. (Rural Science Series.) xxi + 426 p., 32 pi. Macmillan Co.: New York, 1918.] Nature 104:49&-497. 1920. 253. Anonymous. American-grown fruit stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28^:215. 1 fig. 1920. — A brief history and description of the growing of fruit stocks in America is given. Practically all the apple seedlings in the United States are raised in the Kaw Valley, Kansas. Efforts to grow them on a large scale in other places have not met with marked success. — J. H. Gourley. 254. Anonymous. A pear tree trained in an unusual way. Nation. Nurseryman 28': 180. 1 fi^. 1920. — A description is given of a pear tree trained in the form of a table. It is grow- ing on the grounds of Bobbink and Atkins Nurseries, Rutherford, New Jersey. — J. H. Gourley. 255. Anonymous. La multiplicacion de las plantas. [The propagation of plants.] [Rev. of Calvino, Mario. Tratado sobre la multiplicacion de la? plantas. 264 p. 244 photographs. Graphical Arts Press: Habana, 1920.] Rev. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] 3: 149-151. 1 fi^. 1920.— The table of contents of the book is included in the review.— F. M. Blodgett. 256. Anonymous. Problems of the fruit grower. [Rev. of: Bedford, Duke of, and Spencer Pickering. Science and fruit growing: being an account of the results obtained at the Woburn experimental farm since its foundations in 1894. xxii + 351 p. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104: 558-559. 1920. 257. Anonymous. Tests with unfruitful plxmi trees. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 9. 1920. — Pruning, ring-barking, and root-pruning gave no results. Interpollination was effective. — N. J. Giddings. 258. Anonymous. The avocado in Trinidad. Agric. News [Barbados] 19:46. 1920.— A review of a paper on the subject by W. G. Freeman in the Bulletin of the Department oj Agriculture, Trinidad, in which the history, process of selection, etc., are discussed. A paper by R. O. Williams on budding the avocado is also reviewed. — J. S. Dash. 259. Brainerd, Ezra, and A. K. Peitersen. Blackberries of New England.— Their classification. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 217. 84 p., 36 pi. 1920. 260. Campbell, J. A. Natural cool-air fruit storage. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 166-167. 1920.— The methods in use in the United States are briefly outlined. It is feared that the same methods could not be used in New Zealand. — A^. J. Giddings. ^ 261. Campbell, J. A. The fruit industry in North America. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 24^27. 1920.— One of a series of articles. This deals with cooperation and standardiza- tion as practiced in the fruit regions of the United States and Canada. — N. J. Giddings. 42 HORTICULTURE Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, 262. Campbell, J. A. The fruit industry of North America. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 110-113. 1 fig. 1920. — The eastern and western sections of the United States are com- pared as to methods of apple culture and orchard practice. The possible relation of seedling stock to tree growth is also discussed. — A'^. J. Giddings. 263. GuNLiFFE, R. S. The propagation of some tropical fruits. Agric. News [Barbados] 19:52-53, 150-151. 1920.— The first part of the article deals principally with the avocado pear. Varieties of this fruit are discussed, and detailed information is given as to methods of budding and grafting, including seed-grafting. In the latter part of the article, the mango is dealt with in the same manner. — J. S. Dash. 264. Darrow, William H. Government inspection of fruit shipments. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17: 21-34. 1919.— This is an account of the w^ork of the Federal Govern- ment, through the Bureau of Markets, to assist the fruit growers all over the country in marketing their crops. — George P. Burns. 265. Button, W. C. Dusting and spraying experiments of 1918 and 1919. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Special Bull. 102. 50 p., 20 fig. 1920. 266. EsAM, G. Fruit cool storage. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 10-18. 1920.— Sev- eral varieties of apple and of pear were tested to determine best time for picking, best method of picking and handling, effects of delay between picking and storing, and possible advantage of wrapping. Fruits which had reached the stage denoted by a change of ground color kept best in storage. Fruits which were well advanced and showed good color deteriorated too quickly when removed. The importance of care in handling w^as shown in various tests. Delay in placing the fruit in storage greatly reduced its keeping quality. Wrapping was found to give better fruit, but this is to be tested further. — N. J. Giddings. 267. Galloway, Beverly T. Some promising new pear stocks. Amer. Nurseryman 322:34-35. 1920. 268. Gasser, G. W. Report of the work at Rampart Station. Rept. Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 34-57. PI. 3, 4. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 26. 269. Georgeson, C. C. Reports from seed and plant distribution. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. Rept. 1917:86-90. 1919.— Gives extracts from letters received from residents of Alaska giving their experience with the seeds and plants distributed by the Alaska stations. — J. P. Anderson. 270. Georgeson, C. C. Summary of the work at the several stations. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:5-33. 2 -pi. 1919.— After a review of weather conditions the author sum- marizes the work carried on at the Sitka, Rampart, Fairbanks, Kodiak, and Matamuska stations, and gives notes on cooperative work. The Sitka station is devoted to horticulture. Notes are given on potatoes, including the growing of plants from seed balls. Notes are also given on other vegetables, such as cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, Brussels sprouts, kale, kohl rabi, turnips, radishes, beets, carrots, onions, peas, broad beans, snap beans, asparagus, rhubarb, lettuce, celery, garden cress, parsley, and herbs. Beets, onions, snap beans, asparagus, and most herbs are not adapted to the climate, but the others mentioned above do well. In the orchard some apples blossomed, but owing to an unfavorable season no fruit matured. Gooseberries and currants did not fruit as well as usual. Raspberiies {Rubus strigosiis) produced fruit despite an unfavorable season. Strawberry-breeding work was carried on, and 1333 seedlings set out the previous season received numbers. A large amount of nursery stock was distributed to settlers. Reports are made on the behavior of 30 species of shrubs and of several shade trees. Thirty-five species of hardy perennial plants are reported favorably and 27 unfavorably. Of annual flowering plants 24 species are reported favorably and 13 unfavorably. All annual sand perennials listed are well-known sorts. Roses are also being tested in the trial grounds. Work at the other stations is given in more detail bv the assistants in charge of each. — J. P. Anderson. No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 43 271. Goodwin, W. T., and W. C. Hyde. Cooperative fruit variety testing. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 178-180. 1920.— The variety orchards are 7 years old and include about 75 varieties of apple, 24 varieties of pear, and several varieties of apricot, plum, and cherry. Tree growth and fruitfulness are the chief factors considered. — A'^. J. Giddings. 272. Gould, H. P. Fruit trees stocks used in propagation. Amer. Nurseryman 32=: 42-44. 1920. 273. Gould, W. M. Production of nursery stock. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17: 12-20. 1919. — The problems confronting the grower of nursery stock, including both fruit-producing trees and plants for ornamental use, are discussed, chiefly from the stand- point of production. — George P. Burns. 274. Halligan, C. P. Increasing the production of the bearing apple orchard. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 43. 18 p., 6 fig. 1920. 275. IIolde.v, Bertha A. Ways of using surplus fruits. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17:43-46. 1919. 270. Howard, W. L. Brown rot of apricots and its prevention. Better Fruit 15': 7. 1920. 277. Lewis, C. I., F. R. Brown, and A. F. Barss. Observations on the evaporation of prunes. Better Fruit 15^:5, 29-31. 1920. — A reprint from Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 145 (1917). 278. Magness, J. R. Investigations in the ripening and storage of Bartlett pears. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:473-500. 8 fig. 1920. — Fruits grown in Pacific-coast regions and picked at intervals from early summer until after the commercial picking season, were analyzed within a few days after picking and after being in storage Ij to 35 months at temperatures of 70', 40^, and 30° F. The total sugar in freshlj' picked fruit showed a uniform increase as the season advanced, the less rapid increase in reducing sugars during the latter part being counterbalanced by a greater accumulation of sucrose. Pears ripening at 70° contained the highest percentage of sugar, those ripening at 40° the lowest, and those held at 30° for 6 to 14 weeks an intermediate amount. The acid content decreased with an advance of the season in pears fom California, but increased in fruit from Oregon and Washington. Little change in acidity was found during storage of fruit that had been well matured at picking time; but an increase in acidity generally occurred during storage at 70° of fruit picked before maturity, while a decrease was often found after ripening at 40° and especially after being held at 30° F. There was a progressive reduction in the alcohol-insoluble, acid-hydrolyzable reducing materials as the season advanced, not only in the fruit as picked, but also in the same fruit after ripening in storage. The percentage of solids, lowest at about the opening of the season, tends to increase with the accumulation of sugar in late-picked lots. Although late-picked fruit tends to become yellow more quickly than early-picked lots, it remains free from scald and in firm, prime eating condition for a much longer period after becoming ripe. — The application of the results as applied to commercial handling are briefly discussed. — A. J. Heinicke. 279. Morris, R. T. Grafting with the aid of paraffin. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 157-159. pi. 250 1920. — A brief outline is presented, and the claim is niade that the graft- ing season can be extended over a period of 5 months. — H. A. Glea^on. 280. MuRRiLL, W. A. Trees girdled by meadow mice. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21 : 94-97. 1920. — The habits of meadow mice and the destruction to plants caused by them are discussed. — H. A. Gleason. 44 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 281. Ramsey, H. J., and S. J. Dennis. Operating air-cooled apple storage houses. Better Fruit 153 : 10, 32-34. 1920.— A verbatim excerpt from U. S. Dept. Agr. Farmers' Bull. 852 (1917). 282. RicALTON, Jas. The cocoa-nut palm. Amer. Forest. 26:529-531. 3 fig. 1920— A popular description of Cocos nucifera and its products. — Chas. H. Otis. 283. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II. Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228: 89-131. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 463. 284. Russell, E. J. Farming in the New Era. [Rev. of (1) Harris, T. S. The sugar beet in America, xviii + 3^2 p., 32 pi. 1919. (2) Fletcher, S. W. Strawberry growing. xxii + 325 -p., 24 pi. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1917.] Nature 104: 593-594. 1920. 285. Sears, F. C. Personal experiences in fruit growing. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17: 8-12. 1919. — The author discusses nine important factors in the producing, grading, and marketing of apples. — George P. Burns. 286. Stark, Lloyd C. French fruit stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28': 193. 1920. — A French syndicate has been organized which apparently controls a large part of the nursery stock grown in France. As a result the prices have increased to a prohibitive figure, despite the fact that there is a big crop this year of everything except plum, and this is more plentiful than last year. The respective prices per thousand for last year and this year are quoted for plums as $39 and $250, while this same stock formerly sold for $7. In France pear stock can be purchased for $19 per thousnd, whereas the price quoted for export is $70; in France quince stock, $17, for export $50. This situation is condemned, and it is stated that no stock will be purchased at these prices. — J. H. Gourley. 287. SuEMATSTj, Naoji, and Kikuji Kuwatsuka. Studies on the varietal resistance of the peach to artificial inoculations with Gloeosporium laeticolor Berk. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan V: 1-12. 1920. 288. Taylor, C. R. The auction method of distributing perishable food products. Rept. Vermont State Hort. Soc. 17:35-43. 1919. — The author describes the auction system, and shows that in cases of large production with a standardized commodity concentrated at one place it is the most efficient method of disposing of the product. — George P. Burns. 289. Thornber, H. Cover crops, tillage, and commercial fertilizers. Better Fruit 15^: 5, 20-22. Aug., 1920. — Experiments conducted for eight years in the Bitter Root Valley, Mon- tana, with clover and peas as cover crops resulted in a substantial increase of the nitrogen content of the soil. Clover was sown in May and plowed under in the fall of the following year. Peas were also sown in May, but were plowed in the same fall. The first soil analysis was made after the experiment had been in progress for eight years. The nitrogen content of the first two feet of soil of clean cultivated plots was 1514 pounds per acre, while the plot sown to a cover crop of clover contained 3019 pounds per acre. Another plot sown to clover but cut each year, the hay being removed, showed a total nitrogen content of 2167 pounds. The plot on which peas were used as a cover crop had 2375 pounds of nitrogen per acre. The yield of fruit (apples) was highest on the clover plot on which the clover had been plowed under, and lowest on the clean cultivated plot. The writer believes that growing a leguminous cover crop is by far the best and most reasonable way of supplying the soil with humus and nitrogen. — A. E. Murneek. 290. Watson, John. Aphis-resistant apple stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28^: 213-214. 1920. — The nurserymen of America must come to appreciate to a greater extent the impor- tance of securing nursery stock which will be resistant to aphis injury. The influence of the stock upon the scion as well as the influence of the scion on the stock is recognized. For No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 45 instance, apple grafts of Bechtel's Crab and of Transcendant will compel a far better root system in two years than scions of Baldwin or Yellow Transparent on seedlings of exactly the same grade.— Of all aphis-resistant stocks the Northern Spy is the best. It is largely used in England, South Africa, Australia, and New Zealand. The suggestion is made that the time will probably come when California will use nothing else. In Australia, where woolly aphis is a prolific pest, the nurserymen have developed more than 25 varieties of resistant stocks, but Northern Spy furnishes fully 95 per cent of the apple stock used. — Methods for propagation of the stock are given, which are much like those used for Paradise and Doucin stocks. — /. H. Gourley. 291. Whitten, J. C. Transplanting deciduous fruit trees. Better Fruit 15^: 19-20. Sept., 1920. — Reprinted from Monthly Bulletin of the Dept. of Agr., State of California, vol. 9, No. 3, March, 1920. FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE 292. Anonymous. Awbury Arboretum. Brooklyn Bot. Card. Rec. 9:23-24. Jan., 1920.— See Bot. Abstracts 7, Entry 77. 293. Anonymous. Koelreuteria paniculata. Nation. Nurseryman 28*: 198. 1920. — A description of the tree is given, with conditions for growth, and a recommendation is made to extend its planting for lawns. — /. H. Gourley. 294. Anonymous. Oxydendrum arboreum. Nation. Nurseryman 28*: 196. 1920.— A description of the sour-wood tree. — /. H. Gourley. 295. Anonymous. Propectus of courses offered by the Brooklyn Botanic Garden, 1920. Brooklyn Bot. Card. Record 9: 1-18. Jan., 1920. 296. Anonymous. Sweet pea flowering in the West Indies. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 105. 1920.— All efforts of horticulturists in the West Indies to cultivate the American and European sweet peas { Lathy r us odoratus) have resulted in failure to produce flowers in spite of the vigorous vegetative growth made by the plant. Dr. S. C. Harland at last succeeded in obtaining a single flowering spike after 3 months' growth, from a pink variety of the Spencer type procured from the United States Department of Agriculture. The flowers were very small and without scent. — J. S. Dash. 297. Anonymous. The climbing Polygonum. Nation. Nurseryman 28^:200. 1920.— Notes are given regarding P. Baldschuanicum and P. Auberti.—J. H. Gourley. 298. Brewster, A. A. Flowers of Haemodorum, blood root. Australian Nat. 4: 152. 1920. 299. Brixton, N. L. About Paulownia trees. Jour. New York Bot. Card. 21: 72-73. 1920. — Young Paulownia trees commonly grow 8-12 feet in a season and produce leaves as much as 30 inches in diameter. After 3 years they grow more slowly and become eventually 60 feet high or more. — H. A. Gleason. 300. Clarkson, Edward Hale. The story of a fern garden. II. Amer. Fern. Jour. 10:82-87. 1920. 301. Cowell, Arthur Westcott. Awbury Arboretum Address. Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia 17: 98-102. July 1919.— See Bot. Abstracts 7, Entr. 302. Gleason, H. A. Organization of The American Iris Society. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 39-40. 1920.— The society was organized on Jan. 29, 1920, to promote the cultiva- tion and further development of Iris in America. — H. A. Gleason. 46 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 303. Howe, M. A. The 1920 dahlia border. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 138. 1920. 304. Memmler, Hans. Paphiopedilum Rothschildianum und die Kultur der iibrigen mehrbliitigen Frauenschuharten. [Paphiopedilum Rothschildianum and the culture of the other several-flowered ladyslippers.[ Orchis 14: 17-21. 1920. — Short descriptions are given of P. Rothschildianum, its numerous hybrids, and closely related species. Cultural directions are included. — E. B. Payson. 305. MiETHE, E. Cjrpripedium insigne Wall, und einige seiner Varietaten. [Cypripedium insigne Wall, and some of its varieties. [ Orchis 14: 4-7. 1920. 306. Nash, G. V. Hardy woody paints in The New York Botanical Garden. Jour. New York. Bot. Gard. 18:65-68, 86-90, 111-115, 137-140, 167-170, 189-192, 203-207, 217-224, 246- 250, 259-263. IDEM. 19: 11-15, 58-62, 86-91, 108-111, 139-142, 167-171, 192-196, 222-225, 293-296, 315-318. 1918; 20: 11-14, 41-45, 67-70, 87-90, 107-111, 128-132, 144-148, 164-167, 221-225, 232-235. 1919; 21:56-60, 74-77, 119-124. 1920.— A complete enumeration of the hardy woody pants cultivated in the botanical garden, with their location on the grounds and their natural distribution. — H. A. Gleason. 307. Sands, W. N. Some tropical variegated-leaved plants. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 154-155, 171. 1920. — The following are mentioned as the plants chiefly grown for the color effects of their foliage: varieties of Dracaena, Acalypha, Codiaeum (Croton), Caladium, Graptophyllum, Coleus, Dicffenhachia, Agave, Aloe, Begonia, Maranta, and Tradescantia, together with Pandanus Veitchii, Panax Victoriae, Ficus elastica var., Furcroea cubensis, Aralia Guilfoylei, Sanchezia nobilis, Cissus discolor, Hibiscus rosa-sinensis, var. Cooperi, Phyllanthus nivosus. Several of these are discussed in detail, information being given as to the appearance of the leaves, the causes of variations, and the inheritance of the phenomena. Several plants which are not well known in the West Indies but which are under cultivation at the John Innes Horticultural Institution, Surrey, England, are also dealt with. — J. S. Dash. 308. ScHLECHTER, R. Die Verbreitung und das Auftreten der Orchideen in Europa nebst Winken uber ihre Kulture. [The distribution and occurrence of orchids in Europe together with hints as to their culture.[ Orchis 13: 19-25, 35-40. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 541. 309. Snodgrass, M. D. Report of the work at Fairbanks Station. Rep. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:57-72. PL 5-7. 1919. 310. Waugh, F. a. How to improve home grounds. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17:62. 1919. 311. WoLTER, P. Die Anzucht der Odontoglossum aus Samen. [The raising of Odonto- glossum from seed.] Orchis. 13: 12-13. 1919. — Odontoglossum seeds were sown in glasses on sterilized Sphagnum and Polypodium to which a mixed culture of root fungi had been added. More than a thousand seedlings were obtained which in the third year are beginning to bloom. — E. B. Payson. VEGETABLE CULTURE 312. Anonymous. Onion growing in Grenada. Agric. News [Barbados] 18: 374-375. 1919. — Experiments show that onions can be profitably grown. Two crops per annum may be obtained. The yield per acre, as calculated from the experiments, was 3.38 tons of market- able onions. — /. S. Dash. 313. Anonymous. The storage of onion seed in the Tropics. Agric. News [Barbados] 18:375. 1919. — Experiments carried out in Grenada have shown that onion seed can be successfully kept for at least nine months when placed in air-tight containers in the presence of calcium chloride. — /. S. Dash. No. 1, February, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 47 HORTICULTURE-PRODUCTS 314. Fabre, J. -Henri. Precedes modernes de vinification en Algeria et dans les pays chands. [Modern methods of wine mailing for Algeria and the warm regions.] 2 ed. 184 V- J. -Henri Fabre : Maison-Carre, 1920. 315. Jones, J. Cacao production in Dominica. Agric. News [Barbados] 19:91. 1920. — Attention is drawn to the fact that owing to the losses of trees during the hurricanes of 1915 and 1916 (in the latter over 10,000 trees were lost on the estates and even more from the peasants plots) and to the large amount of cacao smuggled to the neighboring foreign islands where the product was in great demand, the figures of export given by the Customs Depart- ment are hardly an index of the production. These figures are: 1917, 3169 cwt. ; 1918, 4239 cwt.; and 1919, 3214 cwt. for the months of January to November. The writer remarks that while the trees which survived the hurricane have returned to pre-hurricane production, little or no effort has been made to replace the trees destroyed. — J. S. Dash. MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR PLANTS E. W. SiNNOTT, Editor 316. Andrews, E. F. Habits and habitats of the North American Resurrection Fern. Torreya 20: 91-96. 1920. 317. Anonymous. Applied plant morphology. [Rev. of : Barber, C. A. Studies in Indian sugar canes. Mem. Dept. Agric. India Bot. Ser. 10: 39-153. June, 1919]. Nature 104: 578. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 7. 318. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem of conifers. Vermont Agric. E.\p. Sta. Bull. 219: 1-10. PL 4, 10 fig. 1920.— This bulletin is a discussion of the relative importance of compression and gravity as factors in the pro- duction of redwood in conifers, based on experimental work in the greenhouse and in the open on spruce and white pine. The author concludes that compression does not stimulate the cambium to rapid division to produce redwood. The pressure of mechanical forces did cause, in the white pine, a differentiation into summer wood and spring wood, but no redwood for- mation. The conclusion is, therefore, that the production of redwood is a morphogenic response of the tree to the stimulus of gravity. — B. F. Lutman. 319. Chemin, E. Observations anatomiques et biologiques sur le genre "Lathraea." [Anatomical and biological observations on the genus "Lathraea."] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 2: 125-272. 1 pi., 88 fig. 1920. — A contribution to knowledge of parasitic plants. After reciting the generic and specific characters in Lathraea, recognizing the five species listed in Index Kewensis, the author presents observations on the two French species L. clandestina and L. squamaria, dealing with root, with development, penetration and feeding of haus- torium, with leaves present as scales bearing glands (which, according to the author's hypo- thesis, function as excretory organs), and with germination. The author supposes that origi- nally an accidental and partial parasitism caused adaptation to dark places, and that this led to complete disappearance of chlorophyll and to obligate parasitism. — /. P. Kelly. 320. Church, Margaret B. Root contraction. Plant World 22: 337-340. 1 fig. 1919. 321. Gluck, H. Blatt-und blutenmorphologische Studien. [Studies in the morphology of leaf and flower.] 284 p., 7 pi., 284 fig- Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1919. — A broad morpho- logical survey' of stipular structures in general, of intervaginal papillae and of the leaf sheath, with a resulting interpretation of the morphological nature of bracts and floral envelopes. The venation of these latter organs plays an important part in any study of their nature, and considerable emphasis is therefore placed upon it and upon the ontogenetic development of the structures investigated. — E. W. Sinnott. 48 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 322. GoEBEL, K. Die entfaltungsbewegungen der Pflanzen und deren teleologische Deutung. [The growth movements of plants and their teleological meaning.] 17 X 26 cm., vii + 4S3 p., 239 fig. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. — This volume is in the nature of a supple- ment to the author's "Organographie" and is concerned -with plant movements in general,, both those which are strictly movements of growth and development and those which are part of the functional activity of organs. Among the subjects discussed are: the movements of jointed organs; the nutation of shoots; the unfolding of leaves and their orientation; developmental torsions and asymmetry; resupination in flowers; successional development; irritability in floral organs; the behaviour of sensitive plants and the "sleep" movements of plants. The author seeks an interpretation of all these movements from the point of view of their usefullness to the plant, and concludes that the common conception of these phe- nomena as adaptations is erroneous. He denies that teleology in any sense, either that of purposeful acquirement or that of Darwinian adaptation through natural selection, has been concerned with their origin, but believes that they have arisen fortuitously and when useful have been seized and preserved by the organisms. — E .W. Sinnott. 323. Hamilton, A. A. Abnormal branching in a palm. Australian Nat. 4: 156-157. 1920. 324. HoLDEN, H. S. Observations on the anatomy of teratological seedlings. III. On the anatomy of some atypical seedlings of Impatiens Roylei, Walp. Ann. Botany 34: 321-344. 106 fig. 1920. — The anatomy of the normal seedlings of Impatiens Roylei and the modifica- tions which it has undergone in a number of abnormal seedlings are fully described. The atypical seedlings are of two main kinds, the first being undoubtedly syncotylous, and the second showing no macroscopic evidence of syncotyly. The members of the first group can be arranged in a graded series in which the syncotyly becomes more and more intimate. Its effects are (1) the suppression of the two lateral bundles of the normal cotyledon and of the root pole on the symphysis side, (2) the reduction and ultimate disappearance of the first epicotyledonary leaf, and (3) in extreme cases the modification of the leaves at the third node. The seedlings of the second group which show no macroscopic evidence of syncotyly may be either truly syncotylous or heterocotylous, and the evidence in favor of both interpre- tations is mentioned. — W. P. Thompson. 325. Jaccard, p. Inversion de I'excentricite des branches produite experimentalement. [The experimental inversion of the eccentricity of branches.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 273-281. $ pi, 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 431. 326. Lecomte, Henri. Sur les principaux caracteres de structure des Bois. [The prin- cipal characters in wood structure.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 26: 166-171. 1920. — A study of the dicotyledonous woods of Indo-China has been made in order to assist in the identifica- tion of specimens from that region. The structures of secretory tissues, vessels, woody paren- chyma and medullary rays are reviewed, and their peculiarities in various genera indicated. — E. B. Payson. 327. Lenoir, M. Evolution du tissu vasculaire chez quelques plantules de dicotyledones. {Development of vascular tissue in certain dicotyledonous seedlings.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X. 2: 1-123. 91 fig. 1920. — Author deals with very young fibro-vascular bundles at their passage from root, where arrangement of xylem and phloem is alternate, to stem and coty- ledon, where collateral disposition is found. He presents and criticises two theories on subject: (1) that which claims the splitting radially into two of the primary xylem masses of root ("redoublement"), and the turning through 180° ("torsion") of each half in passing up to become inner part of collateral bundle of stem or cotyledon; and (2) the theory of successive stages, which states that conducting apparatus of plant shows an ontogenetic series of stages — centric, excentric, alternate, intermediate, and collateral — and that there is not a real identity of root bundle and cotyledonary bundle. Author sets forth obser- vations on species of Veronica, Lamium, and other genera, and concludes that no true radial No. 1, February, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 49 splitting occurs; that in all there is more or less of an inversion of the fibro-vascular bundle upon itself; that no absolute identity of cotyledonary and radicular bundles exists, but that always there are additions of recent tissues in higher parts. Passage from alternate to col- lateral arrangement follows two methods. A gradual differentiation of vessels occurs along certain lines, curved in cross-section, connecting the xylem and phloenf poles. Considered longitudinally a progressive displacement of vessels combined with appearance of new ele- ments in appropriate directions takes place. — /. P. Kelly. 328. MiLBRAED, J. Paraphyadanthe Mildbr. nov. gen. Flacourt. Ein interessanter Fall von "Rhizanthie" aus Kamerun. [Paraphyadanthe Mildbr., a new genus of Flacourtiaceae. An interesting case of "rhizanthy" from Kamerun,] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7:399-405. Fig. A-0. 1920. 329. Nicolas, G. Biologie florale de quelques ombelliferes Nord-Africanes. [Floral biology of some North African umbellifers.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 230-234. 1920.— Andro- monoecism, or the presence of staminate and hermaphrodite flowers on the same plant, is very rare in the plant kingdom as a whole, but is comparatively common in the Umbelliferae. LoEW found this condition in more than forty out of sixty-six European species. Some species are staminate, hermaphrodite, and andromonoecious in dififerent geographic regions. To the list of sixteen species stated by Loew to be exclusively hermaphroditic in Europe, four North African species are added: Ptychotis ammoides Koch., Daucus aureus Desf., Torilis neglecta Roemer & Schultes, and T. nodosa Gaertn. The andromonoecious condi- tion holds in Scandix Pecten-Veneris L., Hippomarathrum pterochlaenum Bossier, Ferula communis L., F. sulcata Desf., and Daucus setifolius Desf. In these forms the hermaphroditic flowers always occupy the summits of the primary and secondary axes, while the more numer- ous staminate flowers are either mixed with them or are grouped alone on the secondary and tertiary axes. — L. W. Sharp. 330. Prankerd, T. L. On some new types of statocyte occurring in vascular plants. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 335. 1920. 331. Rydberg, p. a. [Rev. of: Henry, Augustine, and Margaret G. Flood. The Douglas Fir. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Sec. B. 35:67-92. PI. 12-14. 1920.] Torreya 20: 102-104. 1920. 332. Salisbury, E. J. Monocotyledonous features of the Ranunculaceae with special reference to the floral structure. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:336. 1920. 333. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. xii + SS4 p. Wil- liam Wesley and Son: London, 1919.— A reprint of the author's series of papers under the same title which have appeared during the last two years in the New Phytologist. (See Bot. Absts. 2: 72, 73, 74, 75; 3: 1142; 5: 720, 721.) 334. Soueges, Ren^:. Embryogenie des Oenotheracees. Developpement de I'embryon chez 1' Oenothera biennis L. [The embryogeny of the Oenotheraceae. The development of the embryo of Oenothera biennis.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:946-949. 11 fig. 1920.— The 4-celled stage resembles that of most angiosperms. The upper 2 cells give rise to the cotyledons and the hypocotyl. The middle cell develops very early into the hypo- physis, and the lower to the few-celled suspensor. — C. H. Farr. 335. Thompson, John McLean. The morphology of the stele of Platyzoma microphyllum. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:332-333. 1920. 336. Vuillemin, P. L'amphigonelle et la phylogenie des amentales. [The "amphigonelle" and the phylogeny of the Amentales.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1: 139-200. 1919.— Author is adverse to use of word flower for precise scientific writing; amphigonelle is his term for type of 50 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, reproductive apparatus widespread in lower groups of Dicotyledons, especially in Amentales. He distinguishes three stages of evolution of reproductive apparatus or "gonelle:" (1) Am- phigonelle, which represents lowest degree of differentiation among Dicotyledons, and is characterized by diffuseness, for axis is polycentric — i.e., with many centers of growth; (2) Acrogonelle with*a concentration of parts making a monocentric axis; and (3) Anthogonelle, which is set off from preceding by development of corolla. The last corresponds best with pop- ular conception of flower. Bound up with above ideas is author's theory of stem evolution — that there are two principal stages, the stage of the stipe with its Jrondomes and stage of the caulome with its phyllomes. The amphigonelle is considered stipular in character, as shown in polycentric axis; its receptacle is broken up into gonoclines, each of which builds a part of the gonelle called gonelette. The amphigonelle is one of the characteristics of Amentales; and the catkin, capitulum, or glomerulus are amphigonelles rather than flowers or inflores- cences. Amentales afford opportunity to study modifications of amphigonelle and its transi- tion to acrogonelle. Author devotes most of work to morphological analysis of class Amen- tales, applying above and other details of his conceptions. — In a second (smaller) portion he presents his ideas of the phylogeny of class, in which he includes the following orders: Jug- landales, Salicales, Casuarinales, Cupuliferae, Myricales, Piperales, and Chloranthales. — James P. Kelly. 337. Winkler, Hans. Verbreitung und Ursache der Parthenogenesis im Pflanzen— und Tierreiclie. [The occurrence and causes of parthenogenesis throughout the animal and plant kingdoms.] vi + 231 p. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES Alexander W. Evans, Editor 338. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23 : 205-210. 1918. — The species of Sphagnum listed number 33 and represent the specimens offered for exchange by the Club during 1917. Several of the species include named varieties and forms. Critical notes by J. A. W[heldon] are interspersed throughout. — A. W. Evans. 339. Anonymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:210-214. 1918. — Under the "true mosses" only the Acrocarpi are included. The species listed num- ber 65, and critical notes are furnished by R. N. M[eldrum], W. E. N[icholson], and J. A. W[heldon]. — A. W. Evans. . 340. Anonymous. Pleurocarpi. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23 : 214-217. 1918. — The pleurocarpous mosses listed number 33, and the critical notes included are by H. N. D[ixon], W. I[ngham], and J. A. W[heldon]. — A. W. Evans. 341. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:217-219. 1918. ^The species listed include 5 Ricciae, 33 Jungermanniales, and 1 Anthoceros. Lepidozia intermedia Schiffn. is recognized as a valid species, although Schiffner had proposed it pro- visionally. The critical notes are by H. H. K[night] and S. M. M[acvicar]. — A. W. Evans. 342. Anonymous. Synopsis of the European Sphagna [Corrections and additions]. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:219-221. 1918.— The data here given are supple- mentary to J. A. Wheldon's work, published under the above title. The "additions" relate to varieties and forms of 19 species of Sphagnum, all supposedly new to the British Isles. Two of these are varieties of S. franconiae Warnst., a species not included in earlier lists of British Sphagna. — A. W. Evans. 343. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 229-234. 1919. — The species of Sphagnum listed number 26 and include numerous varieties and forms. As in the previous Annual Report many of the specimens cited are accompanied by critical remarks, signed "J. A. W[heldon]." — A. W. Evans. No. 1, Febuuary, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES 51 344. Ano.xymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 234-241. 1919 —The acrocarpous mosses listed number 9G and include 6 species from continental Europe and 1 each from New Zealand and Canada, the remaining species being all repre- sented by British specimens. Critical notes by H. N. D[ixon], H. H. K[night], W. E. N[iCH0LS0i\], P. G. M. R[hodes], and W. I[ngham] accompany the citations, one of the most important of these notes relating to Dicranum Bonjeani var. alaium Barnes.— A. W. Evans . 345. Anonyjious. Pleurocarpi. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 241-243. 1919.— Except for 1 species from Switzerland the 35 pleurocarpous mosses listed are all from the British Isles. Hypnum fluitans var. atlanticum Ren. and //. uncinatum var. plumulosum Schp. are discussed at some length by J. A. W[heldon], and shorter notes by the same writer and by W. I[ngham] are included. — A. W. Evans. 346. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 244-247. 1919.— The 6(5 species listed include 5 from Tasmania, 3 from continental Europe and 1 from Africa, the remainder being represented by British specimens. Notes by P. G. M. R[iiodes], H. H. K[night], and S. M. M[acvicar] accompany the citations, the note by the last having reference to the recently described Herberta Hntchinsiae (Gottsche) Evans.— A. W. Evans. 347. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25: 257 259. 1920.— The Sphagna distributed during 1919 numbered 25 species, several of which were represented by numerous varieties and forms. One specimen came from Canada, the others from the British Isles. A few short critical notes by J. A. W[heldon] are included in the report. — A. W. Evans. 348. Anonymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25:259-264. 1920.— Both the Acrocarpi and the Pleurocarpi are here included under the "true mosses," 97 species in all being listed. Of the specimens cited 14 came from Scandinavia, 7 from other parts of continental Europe, 4 from Canada and the remainder from the British Isles. The notes accompanying the citations of specimens are by H. N. D[ixon], D. A. J[ones], H. H. K[night], W. E. N[icholson], W. I[ngham], and J. A. W[heldon].— .4. W. Evans. 349. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25: 264-266. 1920.— Of the 46 species listed 10 came from continental Europe, the others from Great Britain. All except 3 are Jungermanniales. H. H. K[xight] and D. A. J[ones] have con- tributed a few critical remarks. — A. W. Evans. 350. Brotherus, V. F. Contributions a la fiore bryologique de I'Ecuador. [Contribu- tions to the moss flora of Ecuador.] Rev. Bryologique 47: 1-16. 1920.— The present report is based on a collection of mosses made in 1909 and 1910 by the late Abbe Allioni in the provinces of Oriente and Azuay, Ecuador. The majority of the specimens came from Oriente, a region heretofore unknown bryologically. In the first part of the report (which is to be continued) 95 species belonging to 19 families are listed with definite data regarding stations. The families most largely represented are the Neckeraceae with 25 species, the Dicranaceae and the Pottiaceae with 12 each. The following species, 20 in all, are described as new: Barbula ecuadoriensis , B. hijalinobasis , B. linguaecupes, Breulelia Allionii, B. brachyphylla, B. reclinata, Bryum Allionii, Campylopus tener, Fissidens Allionii, F. altolim- batus, Grimmia Allionii, Hyophila grossidens, Molendoa subobtusifolia, Pilopogon macro- carpus, Pilotrichella Allionii, Pleurochaete ecuadoriensis, Porothamnium gracile, Syrrhopo- don macrophyllus, S. subrigidus, and S. subscaber. The following represent new combinations : Campylopus liliputanus (C. Miill.) Broth. {Pilopogon liliputanus C. Mtill.) and Porotricho- dendron superbum (Tayl.) Broth. {Leskea superba Ta.j\.).—A. W. Evans. 351. LuisiER, A. Les mousses de Madere. [Mosses of Madeira.] Broteria, Ser. Bot. 18:79_97_ 1920.— This is the eighth article of a series previously noticed, which discusses completely the mosses of Madeira. The present installment covers the two families Sema- 52 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, tophyllaceae and Brachytheciaceae. Besides the usual data upon collections and local dis- tribution, the author gives detailed notes upon the species or varieties listed below, all of which are of restricted occurrence or little known. These species are: H omalothecium seri- ceum (L.) B. & S. var. Mandoni (Mitt.) R. & C, Brachythecium CardotiWint., Oxyrrhynchium orotavense R. & C, Rhynchostegiella Bourgeana (Mitt.) Broth., Rh. surrecta (Mitt.) Broth., and Rhynchostegium Winteri Card. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 156.] — E. B. Chamberlain. 352. Pearson, Wm. Hy. Apolozia Pendletonii Pearson, n. sp. Bryologist 23:50-52. PI. 2. 1920. — This new hepatic is related to Jungermannia cordifolia Hook. It was collected at Sisson, California. — E. B. Chamberlain. 353. Wheldon, J. A. Recent new Sphagnum records. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 247-252. 1919. — The specimens cited represent new county records for Great Britain. Thirty-four species of Sphagnum are listed, including numerous varieties and forms, some of which are here reported for the first time from the British Isles. — A. W. Evans. 354. Williams, R. S. Grimmia (Guembelia) brevirostris, sp. nov. Bryologist 23: 52-53. PI. 3. 1920. — A detailed description of a new species of moss from Plumas County, California. — E. B. Chamberlain. MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA AND MYXOMYCETES H. M. FiTZPATRiCK, Editor FUNGI 355. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Blanc, Georges and Gabriel Brun. [A further case of black-grain mycetoma (Madura Foot) in Tunisia.] Bull. Soc. Path. Exotique. Dec. 10, 1919.] Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 43-44. 1920. — Reports the seventh case found in Tunisia of Madura Foot. This is a mycetoma. The cause was found to be a fungus closely related to Madurella tozeuri Nicolle and Pinoy but differing in several characters and named accordingly M. tabarkae. — E. A. Bessey. 356. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Smith, Theobald. Mycosis of the bovine foetal membranes due to a mould of the genus Mucor. Jour. Exp. Med. 31: 115. 1920.] Jour. Comp. Path, and Therap. 33 : 60-64. 1920. — A description of infection of foetal membranes of cattle due to a species of Mucor closely related to M. rhizopodiformis. On inoculation into rabbits, it caused their death. — E. A. Bessey. 357. Anonymous. The species concept among fungi. [Rev. of: Brierly, W. B. — Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 4. Sept., 1919.] Nature 104: 708. 1920.— The author protests against specific descriptions based on growths as found in nature, especially for species on cultivated plants. The only exact method is by quantitative data derived from cultural treatment under standardized physico-chemical conditions. — 0. A. Stevens. 358. Brierly, William B. The fungal species. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Sci. 1919:340-341. 1920. 359. Castellani, Aldo. The etiology of thrush. Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 17-22. 1 pi. 1920.— The author claims that instead of the one fungus, Oidium albicans Robin, many fungi in the genera Monilia, Oidium, Hemispora, Willia, Endomyces, and Saccharomyces may cause this disease. The generic differences are given. The clinical varie- ties of thrush are described, with the causal organism for each. — E. A. Bessey. No. 1, Februaky, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 53 360. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol- ogy. (Lecture I.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 101-110. Fig. 1-9. 1920.— A brief sur- vey is given of the discovery of fungi pathogenic to man. The general classification of fungi is given and in particular that of the families containing such pathogenes. Notes are given on physiology and on the use of sets of fungi for biochemical analysis. — E. A. Bessey. 361. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol- ogy. (Lecture n.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 117-125. 10 fig. 1920.— The author discusses thrush, broncho-mycoses, tonsillo-mycoses, certain mycoses of the nervous system and organs of special sense, and certain mycoses of the urogenital system. A key is given to the physiological determination of the pathogenic Monilia species, showing their reaction to various carbohydrates, gelatin, litmus milk, etc. — E. A. Bessey. 362. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol- ogy. (Lecture III.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23 : 133-138. 2 pi, 6 fig. 1920.— The sub- jects treated are trichomycoses and dermatomycoses. The former affect only the hairs and may be caused by species of Aspergillus, Penicillium and Nocardia. The true dermatomy- coses are very numerous and caused by a great variety of fungi, which are described in some detail. — E. A. Bessey. 363. Chalmers, Albert J., and Norman Macdonald. Bronchomoniliasis in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and Egypt. Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 1-7. 1 pi. 1920.— The article discusses several types of bronchomycosis and the causal fungi. The latter were grown in culture and identified by the aid of cultural as well as morphological characteristics. The species concerned were Monilia krusei, M. pinoyi, and M. pseudoguillermondi. A discus- sion is given of the nomenclatorial history of the name Monilia. — E. A. Bessey. 364. Chiovenda, E. Nuova localita italiana per il Myriostoma coliliforme (Dichs.) Corda. [New station for Myriostoma coliliforme in Italy.] Nuova Gior. Bot. Ital., Nucva Ser. 27: 7-11. 1920. — Myriostoma coliliforme was collected in Ossola (Piemootz) for the first time. The fungus was found growing in close association with the roots of Polygonum persicaria, forming with the latter an endotrophic relationship. Only once before, in 1902, has this fungus been observed in Italy. — Ernst Artschwager. 365. Garrett, A. O. Some unique rusts. Utah Acad. Sci. 1:132-136. 1918. — Paper presented to the Academy, April, 1915. — Review of recent work on life-history studies. — D. Reddick. 366. Hemmi, Takewo. Kurze Mitteilung iiber drei Falle von Anthraknose auf Pfianzen. [Short report on three cases of anthracnose of plants.] Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1^: 13-21. 1 pi, 5 fig. 1920. 367. KuNKEL, L. O. Further data on the orange rusts of Rubus. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 501-512. PI D (colored) and 92-94. 1920.— Collections were made of the long-cycled rust, Gymnoconia inter stitialis, and the short-cycled rust occurring on Rubus spp. about Wash- ington, D. C. A study of these specimens has shown that the rust on the black raspberry is always long cycled while the rust on the blackberry and dewberry is always short cycled. Spores of the two rusts were germinated on water and Beyerinck agar at temperatures from 5° to 30°C. Spores taken from blackberry leaves always produced promycelia, while those from black raspberry leaves produced long germ tubes. Additional morphological differ- ences in the two rusts were observed. The spores of the short-cycled rust are small, angular, and in mass cadmium orange, while the spores of Gymnoconia are larger, more regular, and in mass xanthine yellow. The author considers that a genetic relationship exists between the two rusts, since spores of the long-cycled species at times produce promycelia bearing sporidia. The occurrence of a suppressed short cycle in Grjmnoconid leads him to believe that long- cycled rusts are the more primitive. — \V. H. Burkholder. 54 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 368. Namyslowski, B. Etat actuel des recherches sur les phenomlnes de la sexuality des Mucorinees. [The status of researches on sexuality in the Mucorineae.] Rev. G6n. Bet. 32: 193-215. 9 fig. 1920. — A summarj' of the results of experimental researches on reproduc- tion and hybridization in this group of fungi. A bibliography of 34 titles is appended. — L. W. Sharp. 369. Rick, J. Contributio ad monographiam Agaricacearum brasiliensium. [Contribu- tion toward a monograph of Brazilian agarics.] Broteria (Ser. Bot.) 18:48-63. 1920. — This list contains 106 species and a few varieties, without citation of authorities except for new species, apparently all from the province of Rio Grande do Sul. In case of species already described, only a line or two of notes appear. In case of new species the descriptions are more complete. Of these the author says: "In this contribution many species are described whose identity with European species is quite probable, but not certain. I have therefore given a full description and a new name. At the same time I have indicated the old species with which the new is perchance identical." New species are proposed in Lepiota, Hypho- loma, Armillaria, Tricholoma, Collybia, Pluteolus, Eccilia, Clitopilus, Claudopus, Inocybe, Nauconia, Galera, Tubaria, Pilosace, Psilocybe, and Hygrophorus. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 20i.]—E. B. Chamberlain. 370. Thaxter, Roland. New Dimorphomyceteae. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci. 55: 211-282. 1920. — The author discusses in general the unisexual forms of the Laboul- beniales and in particular the distinction between the genera Dimeromyces and Dimorpho- myces. Polyandromyces is described as a new genus with one species and a variety as the known representatives. Eleven new species of Dimeromyces and fifty-one new species of Dimorphomyces are described. — E. B. Payson. LICHENS 371. MoREAU, F. (M. ET MME.) Recherches sur les lichens de la famille des Pelti- geracees. [Researches on lichens of the family Peltigeraceae.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1: 29-138. 13 pi., 23 fig. 1919. — Authors are especially interested in reproduction of fungus of the lichen and in morphological influence of one symbiont on other. Their presentation is in three parts: (1) the fungus, (2) the alga, and (3) the alga-fungus complex. Authors empha- size mycelium as constituting colorless part of lichen. Underground or substratal mycelium is typical and generally neglected by students; authors call attention to occasional fusions among underground hyphae and to evidence for method of formation of septa. Typical mycelium appears also in the gonidial layer. Each cell is here described as having a single nucleus and metachromatic granules. In considering medullary region and pseudoparenchy- matous region (plectenchyma), character of walls is emphasized. Authors refer to two kinds of reproductive bodies set free by Peltigeraceae; viz., spermatids and ascospores. They note that status of spermatids is uncertain. They found spermatids only in genus Nephro- mium, but did not make out fate of spermatids after being set free. Their studies showed that ascospore formation proceeds in absence of spermatids, and they deny to latter gametic functions. Ascospores an uncertain means of maintaining species, since a proper alga must be met when spore germinates. Soredia are certain to lead to new lichens. A consideration is next presented of beliefs of Stahl and Bachmann, of FuNFSTtTCK, and of Dangeard con- cerning occurrence of sexual phenomena at formation of apothecia in fungi, and hypothesis of Dangeard is favored. — Authors point^ out that the kind of alga (gonidia) whether of Cyanophyceae or Chlorophyceae, determines sub-generic groups in each of three genera of Peltigeraceae. Chlorophyceous Peltigeraceae may enclose Cyanophyceae in cephalodia. The authors point out necessity of pure culture methods in study of lichen algae. — Mutual relationships of alga and fungus studied in following exceptional formations which begin with algae in unusual positions: (a) tubercles resembling very large soredia on lower sur- face of thallus (displaced gonidia cause neighboring hyphae to assume special character); (b) soredial aberrations; (c) foliar ramifications of thallus, and (d) cephalodia formation due to action on hyphae of foreign alga. — Desirable further lines of study are mapped out at close. — James P. Kelly. No. 1, February, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 55 372. Riddle, L. W. Two publications on tropical American lichens. [Rev. of: (1) de Lesdain, Bouly. Lichens de Mexique (Etats de Puebla et du Michoacan) recueillis par le Frere Arsene Brouard. Brochure. PI. 1-31. 1914. (2) Wainio, Edvard. Additamenta ad Lichenographiam Antillarum illustrandam. Ann. Acad. Sci. Fennicae Ser. A. 6: pt. 7. 1915.] Bryologist 23: 60-61. 1920. — The reviewer calls attention to these two publications, which contains many descriptions of new species, since neither seems likely to have a wide distribution. That upon Mexican lichens is a wholly independent publication; the other publication, reviewer states, is received in America only at the Smithsonian Institution. — E. B. Chamberlain. BACTERIA 373. Bokura, Umenojo. A new bacterial disease of Gypsy-moth caterpillars. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan P: 34-55. 1920. 374. Cauda, A. Gruppi vegetal! fissatori di azoto libero. [Plant groups that fix free nitrogen.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26: 169-178. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 846. 375. Gentxer, G. Eine Bakteriose der Gerste. [A bacteriosis of barley.) Centralbl. Bakt. 502 : 428-441. 1920. [From Absts. Bact. 4: 292. 1920.] 376. Paillot, a. Sur le polymorphisme des Bacteries. [The polymorphism of bacteria.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 905-906. 2 fig. 1920. — Two bacilli which cause disease in caterpillars are described. When in the caterpillar they present various forms. It is sug- gested that polymorphism may in some cases be due to the effect of the tissues or liquids of the living host.— C. N. and W. K. Farr. 377. Peterson, W. H., and E. B. Fred. The fermentation of glucose, galactose, and mannose by Lactobacillus pentoaceticus. n. sp. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 273-287. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1338. PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY E. W. Berry, Editor 378. Adami, J. G. Medical contributions to the study of evolution. 8vo, 272 p. Mac- millan and Co. : London, 1920. Price, $7.25. 379. Anonymous. Gymnospermic history. [Rev. of: Seward, A. C. Fossil Plants: A text-book for students of botany and geology. Vol. 4, Ginkgoales, Coniferales, Gnetales. xvi + 543 p. University Press: Cambridge, 1919.] Nature 105:97-93. 1920. It is disap- pointing but perhaps not surprising that the work closes with this group. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2517.)— 0. A. Stevens. 380. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Wieland, G. R. Classification of Cycadophyta. Araer. Jour. Sci. 47: 391-406. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1620.)] Nature 104: 509-510. 1920. 381. [B., F. O.] The origin of plant life on land. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Thalassio- phyta and the subaerial transmigration. Bot. Mem. No. 3. 95 p. Oxford Univ. Press: Lon- don, 1919.] Nature 104: 624. 1920. — A real contribution full of originality and of interesting though bluff criticisms. The cautious philosopher would probably prefer greater elasticity of the thesis. Omits reference to the important discoveries of Lower Devonian fossils in the Rhynie-Chert and to question of transference of the tetral division in the course of descent to a fresh position in the life cycle. — 0. A. Stevens. 56 PALEOBOTANY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 382. Berry, Edward W. Fossil plants from the late Cretaceous of Tennessee. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 333-334. 1920.— The Gulf Coastal Plain presents a comparatively complete paleobotanical record from the Cretaceous to the present. The two large gaps have been the late Upper Cretaceous and the Miocene. In 1919, in western Tennessee, Dr. Bruce Wade discovered abundant material in clay lenses of the Ripley formation — the latest Cretaceous of the region. Remains of 124 species (86 new) have been identified. The species are referred to 62 genera (30 extiijct), 38 families, and 25 orders; 5 ferns, 6 gymnosperms, 7 monocotyledons, and 105 dicotyledons are included. "A complete account .... will be published by the U. S. Geological Survey." — Howard B. Frost. 383. Berry, Edward W. Fossil plants. [Rev. of: Seward, A. C. Fossil plants. Vol. IV. Cambridge Univ. Press: Cambridge, 1919.] Plant World 22: 341-342. 1919. "On the whole it seems to the reviewer that Professor Seward has performed a difficult task about as well as could be expected, and despite their obvious shortcomings, which have been freely criticised, these four volumes are a mine of information for the student interested in the floras of the past." — {Author's summary.) 384. Berry, Edward W. New specific name. Torreya 20: 101. 1920. — Inga oligocaen- ica Berry (Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. 103: 32. 1918.) from the Oligocene of the Canal Zone is antedated by Inga oligocaenica Engelhardt (1898), from the Oligocene of Bohemia. The name Inga culebrana is accordingly proposed.- — J. C. Nelson. 385. Berry, E. W. The ancestors of the sequoias. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2:207-208. 1920. — A reprint of an article which appeared in a recent number of Natural History. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 793.]—^. W. Berry. 386. Berry, E. W. The teaching of paleobotany. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 31:389-392. 1920. — Outlines the content of a universitj^ course in paleobotany. — E. W. Berry. 387. Berry, E. W. The age of the Dakota flora. Amer. Jour. Sci. 50: 387-390. 1920.— Discusses the age of the flora found in the Dakota sandstone of the western United States and shows that it cannot be Lower Cretaceous in age. The thesis is maintained that the Dakota sandstone is intimately associated with the Upper Cretaceous marine transgression of the Benton and is probably Turonian in age. — E. W. Berry. 388. Carpentier, A. Contribution a I'etude des fructifications du Culm de Mouzeil (Loire-Inferieure). [Contribution to the study of the fructifications from the Culm of Mou- zeil.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32:337-350. 2 pi., 5 figs. 1920. — The basin of the Basse-Loire con- sists of two SE-NW synclines, known respectively by the names of Ancenis and Teill6-Mou- zeil. Fossil plants of this region were described by Brongniart, but the fructifications of the Pteridospermae were made known chiefly by. Grand 'Eury and Bureau. The author has studied further the imprints of fructifications found here. — On the whole the Culm flora is less rich in genera and species than the Westphalian flora of the coal basin of Valenciennes. Among the most common impressions are those of Sphenopteris Dubuissoni, S. elegans, and S. dissectiim (Brongt.). The Neuropterideae are rare: the genus Neuropteris is repre- sented only by a few fragments of A'', antecedens and N. Schlehani. The Lepidodendreae, including Lepidodendron lycopodioides, Lepidophloios laricinus, and Ulodendron, are fairly common. — Descriptions are given of the following seeds, with or without cupules: Lageno- spermum tenuifolium Nathorst g., {E. Bureau sp.), associated with Neuropteris antecedens Stur and a Sphenopteris ; L. crassum n. sp., associated with Sphenopteris Dubuissoni Brongt.; L. inflatum n. sp., possibly representing the escaped seeds of the cupule known as L. cras- sum; L. aff. nitidulum (Heer) Nathorst, associated with Sphenopteris dissectum and one other species; L. sp.; Carpolithus L. (cf. Rhabdocarpus turbinatus) E. Bureau sp.; C. sp. Three types of microsporangia are described: Telangium sp., associated with Sphenopteris Dubuis- soni; Pterispermotheca n. gen.; Cf. Diplotheca (D. stellata Kidston). Two uncertain impres- sions, one of them known as Guilielmites, are also mentioned. — L. W. Sharp. No. 1, February, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 57 3S9. Chaney, Ralph W. The flora of the Eagle Creek formation. Cont. Walker Mus. 2^: 115-182. PI. 5-2.2. 1920. — The paucity of described fossil floras from the Pacific coast region renders this an important contribution. The Eagle Creek flora, as described in this contribution, comprises 72 species, of which 38 are described as new and referred to the genera Equisetum (?), Picea (?), Pinus, Cyperacites, SabalUes, Smilax, Phyllites, Populus, Myrica, Hicoria, Juglans, Alnus, Betula, Conjhis, Castanea (?), Fagus (?), Quercus, Ulmus, Liriodendron, Magnolia, Laurophyllum, Liquidarnbar, Crataegus, Prunus, Cercis, Legumino- sites, Acer, Tilia, Nyssa, Fraxinus (?), and Carpolithus. These all appear to be well founded except the Liriodendron. The local sections where the fossils were found along the present Columbia River gorge, the composition, physical environment, ecology and correlation of the flora are fully and satisfactorily discussed.— The Eagle Creek formation is entirely volcanic in origin and stream laid. It is considered, on the basis of the intermediate character of the flora between known upper Eocene and Miocene floras, to be of Oligocene age. The flora, which is largely dicotyledonous, shows a striking resemblance to the mixed hardwood flora of the eastern United States— this resemblance extending to even the relative representation of the families, the only departures being a shortage of Salicaceae and Rosaceae and an excess of Fagaceae and Hamamelidaceae. Oaks are the most abundant forms, both individually and specifically. Maples and elms are also prominent elements. The flora is considered to represent two principal distinct ecological types; namely, xerophytes that are thought to have grown on the water poor ridges and uplands, and the contemporaneous mesophytes of the well-watered valley bottom and sides.— £^. W. Berry. .390. De La Vaulx, R., and P. Marty, avec introduction de Ph. Glangeaud. Nou- velles recherches sur la f.ore fossile des environs de Varennes (Puy-de-Dome). [New researches on the fossil flora of the vicinity of Varennes.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 282-300, 327- 336, 351-368. 3 pi., 2 fig. 1920.— A study of the fossil flora of three fossiliferous beds in one of the volcanic regions of France, based on a critical examination of the material described, by BotTLAY (Flore Pliocene du Mont-Dore, Paris 1872) and on new collections. The paper is prefaced by a brief account of the stratigraphy of the region by Ph. Glangeaud, who agrees with Boulay in assigning the beds in question to the upper Miocene or lower Pliocene. The list of fossil trees, shrubs, and herbs now reported from this locality comprises 47 forms rep- resenting 23 families; 37 of them have been specifically determined. The following 14 are newly discovered by the authors: Ginkgo biloha Kaempf., Sparganium sp. CeUis Japeti Ung., Lauris nobilis L., Carya minor Sap. et Mar., Paeonia motiton Sims., Myriophyllitis sp., Cercis slUquastrum L., Raphiolepis indica Lindl., Bumelia Rieufi Marty, Fraxinus oregona Nutt., Ilex decidua Walt., Ilex balearica Desf., and Rosa Glangeaudi Marty. A list of about 50 species of diatoms is also included.— After a discussion of the palaeontological and geologi- cal evidence the authors conclude that the fossil flora of Varennes was buried during the Mio-Pliocene in the sediments of a lake into which volcanic ashes were thrown. This flora was continental, montane, and temperate, less than one-tenth of the species being sub-tropical. The mean temperature in this region during the Mio-Pliocene was probably from 12° to 14°C. Since that time some of the elements of the flora have migrated 5 geographical degrees southward. — Bibliography of 67 titles. — L. W. Sharp. 391. Galipps, V. Recherches sur la resistance des microzymas a Paction du temps et sur leur survivance dans I'ambre. [The longevity of microzymas and its survival in amber.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:850-858. 1920.— A microscopic examination of amber after dissolving in ether reveals the presence of microzymas and of ovoid and rod-shaped bacilli.— C. A^ and W. K. Farr. 392. Lull, R. S. Organic evolution. 8vo, 729 p. The Macmillan Co. : New York, 1920. Price, $3.25. 393. MacFarland, J. M. The causes and course of organic evolution. 8vo, 875 p. The Macmillan Co. : New York, 1920. Price, H.OO. 58 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 394. Metcalf, Matnard M. Upon an important method of studying problems of relation- ship and of geographical distribution. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 432-433. 1920.— A family of "frogs," the Leptodactylidae, occurs in tropical and south-temperate America, and elsewhere only in Australia and Tasmania. This fact has been explained as a result of former land connection or as a result of convergent or parallel evolution. In both conti- nents, however, the Leptodactylidea have parasites of the genus Zelleriella, "and the Austral- ian Zelleriellas so closely resemble the American forms that it is difficult to separate them specifically." Since it is extremely improbable that both host and parasite have evolved so similarly on distant continents, the hypothesis of former land connection is held to be definitely confirmed. This procedure of considering together the distribution of host and parasite is strongly recommended, as promising definite solution of various problems of phylogeny, migration, etc., with both animals and plants. — Howard B. Frost. 395. T., E. N. Botany at the British Association. Nature 104: 520-521. 1920. PHYSIOLOGY B. M. DuGGAR, Editor Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor GENERAL 396. LiNHART, G. A. A new and simplified method for the statistical interpretation of biometrical data. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 4: 159-181. 12 fig. 1920.— Describes graphic methods for determining the values of k and h in the fundamental equation, y = ke-'^'^' (1) When X = 0, y will equal k. Therefore k may be defined as the probability of error zero and as the largest number of measurements of a given set having the same numerical value. Substitution of yo for k gives 1. = e-'^'^' (2) Vo By use of logarithms this may be transformed into the linear equation, log (2.303 log- J = 2 logx + 2 log A (3) log (log -) =2 1ogx + 2 log ;i- 0,3623 (4) Let X = 2 log /i - 0.3623, then log (log ^\ =2\ogx +K (5) This will be recognized as the equation to a straight line having a slope of 2 and intercept K, when log ( log — ) is plotted as ordinate and log x as abscissa. The vajue of K being thus easily determined the value of h, the index of precision, may be calculated from K + 2logh- 0.3623 and is ^ K + 0.3623 f.. h = (10) 2 ^6) or No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 59 The value of hx corresponding to the integral value 0.5 {vide probability integral table) is 0.4769. Then _ iv +0.3623 X = 0.4769 (10) 2 (7) which gives the probable error of a single observation. The probable error of the mean is equal to the probable error of one observation divided by the square root of the total number of observations, X 0.4769 , . _ ^±M^ X(i — = — r^- (10) 2 (8) Vn Vn In the case of skew frequency distributions the above equations do not strictly apply because of a preponderance of either positive or negative errors. For such cases the equation, ^ = e-^<'-?J. (9) y is proposed. Here m represents the numerical value of any measurement and mo the value of the geometric mean. This may be transformed into the equation, log - = 2.303 h^ (log — Y (10) or log ^" = xflog ^Y ... (11) y \ mo/ Numerous examples of the use of the equations are given, in which the values obtained are compared with those computed by other methods. — H. S. Reed. DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY 397. Priestley, J. H. Root pressure. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:337. 1920. WATER RELATIONS 398. Harris, F. S. The effect of soil moisture on the morphology of certain plants. [Abstract.] Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 65. 1918. 399. Livingston, Burton E., and Riichiro Koketsu. The water-supplying power of the soil as related to the wilting of plants. Soil Sci. 9:469-485. 1920.— Plants of Coleus blumei and Triticum sativum grown in 12 mixtures of varying amounts of glass sand, clay loam, and humus, were allowed to wilt until permanent wilting was evident. Dry, unglazed porcelain cones ("soil points") were then thrust into the soil and the amount of water which they absorbed in a given length of time ("water-supplying" power of soil) was determined by removing and weighing. This amount for a 2 hour period was from 0.04-0.11 g. The average value was the same for both plants and practically the same for all 12 soils. — W. J. Robbins. 400. Zeller, S. M. Humidity in relation to moisture imbibition by wood and to spore germination on wood. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7: 51-74. 1 pi, 5 jig. 1920.— The rnoisture contents of wood at various atmospheric humidities are presented, the temperature being held at 25°C. Graphs are given to illustrate the relation between water content and humidity, for sap and heart-wood of both longleaf and shortleaf pine. By testing at various humidities the moisture content of any one species of wood, it was possible to approximate the fiber- saturation point. The moisture-humidity curves of highly resinous samples illustrate the 60 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, water-proofing effect of resin — especially above 50 per cent humidity. The germination curve for spores of Lenzites saepiaria illustrates the fact that spore germination is greatly accel- erated when the atmospheric humidity is high enough to maintain fiber saturation of the wood. — A humidor for maintaining constant humidity and temperature is described. It is provided with a dew-point apparatus for the determination of humidity, and a weighing device by means of which the samples can be weighed without opening the humidity chamber. —S. M. Zeller. MINERAL NUTRIENTS 401. BoTTOMLEY, W. B. The growth of Lemna plants in mineral solutions and in their natural medium. Ann. Botany 34:345-352. 1920. — Lemna major and Lemna yninor cannot grow normally in Knop's or Detmer's solution, but the addition of certain organic substances to these solutions permits rapid and healthy growth. These organic substances essential to the metabolism of the plants are to be found in the w^ater of the ponds in which the plants normally grow, and maintain the plants in health, although lack of sufficient quantities of nitrates and phosphates under these conditions acts as a limiting factor, retarding their rate of multiplication. — G. M. Armstrong. 402. DuGGAR, B. jNL Hydrogen ion concentration and the composifcion of nutrient solutions in relation to the grov/th of seed plants. Ann. Missouri Bot. Card. 7: 1-50. 7 fig. 1920. - For several years the author has been examining the effect of the reaction of the medium on growth in certain physiologically balanced nutrient solutions and has secured many data concerning the extent of change of the Ph value of the solution in which the plants have grown, as well as concerning growth relations with the variations in active acidity. Thus in this report of experimental work particular reference is not made to the proportions of the different salts involved in the nutrient solutions except as they may influence the active acidity. For this report four solutions were used, as follows: Solution A was a slight modi- fication of Shive's solution, having the following partial volume-molecular proportions — KH2PO4, 0.0180; Ca(N03)2, 0.0052; MgS04, 0.0150; and "soluble ferric phosphate," 0.0044 gm. per liter. Solution B was an extreme modification of the Crone solution, having the following proportions of salts— KNO.,, 0.00495; CaS04, 0.000726; MgSO,, 0.000526; and "sol- uble iron phosphate," 0.125 gm. per liter; this is a four-salt solution having a higher pro- portion of iron than the usual nutrient solution. Solution C was the Livingston and Tot- tingham solution, modified by the addition of "soluble ferric phosphate" as in Solution A— KNO,, 0.0216; CaCHzPOJj, 0.0026; and MgSO,, 0.0150. It is assumed that the osmotic value of solutions A and C is approximately that of Shive's solution — 1.75 atmospheres — while that of Solution B is much less. — The culture methods employed were essentially those described before. Seedlings of corn, field peas, and vv^heat were used. For the determination of active acidity the standard solutions and indicators suggested by Clark and Lubs were emploj'ed. The total green weight with the remains of the seed, or cotyledons, cut away was used as an index to growth. In this way the health and growth of the plant is most favorably expressed. — The experiments were conducted under a considerable range of environ- mental conditions. "Under the most favorable conditions, the three solutions mentioned above, without other modifications, may all yield excellent growth. Plants grown in Solu- tion B are invariably a deeper green, presenting a finer appearance and the average of the growth quantities is higher for wheat and corn than in either of the other two solutions. In the unmodified Solutions A and C, the green weight of peas averages higher than in the unmodified Solution B." Solutions A and C contain a monobasic phosphate and should have a Ph value of about 4.5. Experience shows that Solution B varies in active acidity from Ph 5.4 to Ph 7.1; although it is frequently 6.6 to 7.1. "Culture solutions prepared with monobasic phosphates may, however, exhibit a hydrogen-ion concentration which is too high for .... best growth under certain conditions, and especially is this true in the case of wheat." Solutions made with monobasic potassium or calcium phosphate, unless previously purified, may yield a Ph which is distinctly toxic. Correction to Ph 4.8 to 5.2 by means of NaOH or by use, in part, of a dibasic salt generally yields better growth. Under No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 61 conditions resulting in a high transpiration rate more alkaline solutions give better results. "Wheat, corn, and peas are sensitive in the order named to high hydrogen ion concentra- tion." — "Usually the addition to Solution B of small amounts of dibasic potassium phosphate, of solid calcium carbonate, and of aluminum hydroxide has given increased yields, often considerably above that of the unmodified solution." — The results indicate in general that there is no "best" solution for the growth of any of the plants used for this work. When the "Ph of the solution is considerably less than neutrality there is generally a tendency for this to be shifted toward the neutral point," depending upon the composition of the solution and upon the plant. — S. M. Zeller. 403. Greaves, J. E. The antagonistic action of calcium and iron salts toward other salts as measured by ammonification and nitrification. Soil Sci. 10: 77-102. 20 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 451. 404. JoHxsTo.x, Earl S. Nutrient requirement of the potato plant. Plant World 22: 329-336. 4 fig- 1919. — Difficulty was experienced in securing uniform potato plants for the experiments. Cuttings from potato vines, and sprouts removed from tubers at an early stage of development were not satisfactory. Somewhat older sprouts which had well devel- oped roots at time of separation were used. The nutrient solutions employed were made up to one atmosphere osmotic pressure with monobasic potassium phosphate, calcium nitrate, and magnesium sulphate. Roots showed a tendency to rot in the culture solution. The best growth was obtained in a three-salt solution in which the larger amount of the osmotic pressure was due to calcium nitrate. — Chan. A. Shull. 405. MoLLiARD, M. Influence d'une dose reduite de potassium sur les caracteres physio- logiques du Sterigmatocystis nigra. [The influence of an insufficient supply of potassium on the physiological characteristics of Sterigmatocystis nigra.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:949-951. 1920. — This is a comparison of cultures of Sterigmatocystis nigra containing potassium in an amount which insures optimum development and those which have the amount reduced. Full nutrient solutions contained 0.95 g. of KH2PO4 to 1000 cc. of water, the potassium-low solution contained 0.0119 g. It is found that in potassium-starved cul- ture the increase in dry weight is much slower; the sugar consumed in 20 days is equal to that consumed in full nutrient solution in two and two-thirds days. The sugar consumed instead of giving rise to CO2 gives rise to oxalic apid. There is an absence of conidia and black pigment and the rapid formation of a yellow pigment. A liquid is also produced which is soluble in the solutions and stains blue with iodine. — C. H. Farr. 406. Parker, F. W., and E. Truog. The relation between the calcium and the nitrogen content of plants and the function of calcium. Soil Sci. 10: 49-56. 1 fi^. 1920. — A tabulation of data on the ash content and nitrogen content of crop plants shows a close correlation between the calcium content and nitrogen content. Potassium, phosphorus, and magnesium show no such relation. The important agricultural plants can be divided into those having a low calcium-nitrogen ratio and low lime requirement, and those having a high calcium- nitrogen ratio and a higher lime requirement. The calcium neutralizes the plant acids formed in protein metabolism. — W . J . Rohhins. METABOLISM (GENERAL) 407. Allen, E. R. On carbohydrate consumption by Azotobacter chroococcum. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7: 75-79. 1 fig. 1920. — With a knowledge of some of the defects of pres- ent experimental methods for the study of the physiology of Azotohacter, three improve- ments are suggested for cultures. They are (1) renewal of the energy source in order to in- crease growth and to produce more marked changes in the amounts of metabolic products; "(2) simultaneous determination of nitrogen and of residual carbohydrates at short inter- vals" so as to obtain "a more complete picture of the growth processes of Azotohacter f and (3) "operations to facilitate experimental manipulation and possibly obtain even better 62 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, results from mechanical agitation." One experiment lacking in the second improvement is reported. "The results show that the rate of carbohydrate consumption in Azotobacter cultures does not proceed in a manner similar to the rate of increase in cell numbers pre- dicted by Duclaux Indeed, the curves resemble the antipode of the Duclaux curve." The fact that the organism utilizes renewals of carbohydrates seems to contradict the idea that there is an accumulation of metabolic products which are toxic to growth. The production of such substances in very short intervals in cultures as slow-growing and as dilute as those used in this experiment seems unlikely. — S. M. Zeller. 408. Anonymous. The red coloring matter of plant galls. [Rev. of: M. Niekenstein. Trans. Chem. Soc. 115: 1328-1332. 1919.] Nature 104:707. 1920.— Investigation of galls on British oak trees caused by Dryophanta divisa resulted in isolation of a red pigment to which the name of "dryophantin" was given. This was concluded to be a diglucoside of purpuro- gallin (the first to be found in nature) and of pathological origin. The author is of the opinion that the other so-called anthocyans obtained from plant galls are not properly anthocyans, but are related to "dryophantin," and he proposes to classify these under the name "gallo- rubrones." The reviewer considers the evidence insufficient clearly to establish the absence of anthocyan pigments. — 0. A. Stevens. 409. Anontmotjs. Scientific study of the sugar group. [Rev. of : Armstrong, E. Frank- land. The simple carbohydrates and the glucosides. 3d ed. x + 239 p. Longmans, Green and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104:526-527. 1920.— The chief import of the review is brought out in the quotation which follows, to the effect that the book ' 'is something more than a new and revised issue; it is to all intents and purposes a new book Students of the sugar group will have access to a thoroughly satisfactory book." — 0. A. Stevens. 410. BiBERFELD, JoHANNES. Ergcbnissc der experimentelien Toxikologie. Teil II. Organische Substanzen. A. Alkaloide. [Experimental toxicology. Part II. Organic sub- stances. A. Alkaloids.] Ergeb. der Physiol. 17: 1-362. 1919. 411. CosTANTiN, J. Physiologie de I'anthocyane et chimie de la chlorophylle. [Physi- ology of anthocyan and chemistry of chlorophyll.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X. 1 : xxxviii-lii. 1919. — The author discusses the present status of the knowledge of anthocyan and chloro- phyll. He refers to Combes' work in 1913 in which a treatment of a yellow flavone pigment derived from Vitis with nascent hydrogen gave a substance said to have been anthocyan. The author states that the reverse process of oxidation of anthocyan gave yellow flavone. The work of Willstatter confirmed Combes' conclusions. Such work linked up with the problems concerning glucosides and Combes' experiments with absorption of these in plants is referred to. The author calls attention to the belief of some that anthocyan results from an oxidation. This hypothesis is supported by the discovery that oxydase distribution paral- lels anthocyan distribution. Palladin made anthocyan one of his respiration pigments. Wheldalb's attempt to explain anthocyan production in Antirrhinum on a genetic basis is "curieuse" to the author, but he deems it preferable to Bateson's assumption of deter- minants. Nicolas in 1919 suggested a study of green and purple plants of the same species in an attempt to re-solve contradictions in oxidation and reducing theories of anthocyan for- mation. Nicolas found greater acidity in the red-leaved varieties and the formation of these organic acids locked up some oxygen, reducing therefore the respiratory quotient. The using up of oxygen therefore is not directly a result of anthocyan production. Chlorophyll is thought now to have the formula: (C20H39OOC) [C3,H29N4Mg] (COOH) (COOCH3). Treatment with alcohol will produce a substitution of C2H5 for phytol group C2oH39 and give Willstatter's crystallizable chlorophyll. — James P. Kelly. 412. Dangeard, p. a. La structure de la cellule vegetale et son metabolisme. [The structure of the plant cell and its metabolism.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 709-714. 1920. No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 63 413. Free, E. E. Sugar metabolism in cacti. [Rev. of : Spoehr, H. A. The carbohydrate economy of cacti, Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. 287. 1919.] Plant World 22:308-309. 1919. 414. Gatin, C. L., and M. Molliard. Utilisation comparee de divers constituants de la membrane par le Xylaria Hypoxylon L. [The comparative utilization of various constituents of the cell wall by Xylaria Hypoxylon L.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 216-225. 1920.— A study of the digestive action of a wood-destroying fungus (Xylaria Hypoxylon) on isolated constituents of the cell wall in aseptic cultures. The constituents under investigation were added to a mineral nutrient solution made up as follows: tap water, 100 cc; potassium nitrate, 0.2 g.; ammonium phosphate, 0.05 g. ; magnesium sulphate, 0.05 g. Glucose and starch were also used for comparison. Of all the substances tried, pectin was the most readily utilized by Xylaria; 1.633 g. were used in building up 0.693 g. dry weight of mycelium. Then followed in order xylose and glucose, mannogalactan of the carob, arabinose (about half as well used as pectin), starch, and xylane. Good growth was also obtained on corrozo and the mucilage of flax, whereas cherry gum was only slightly used, and gelose not at all. A further experi- ment showed lignin to be very readily utilized. — L. W. Sharp. 415. Hammarsten, Harold. Quantitative Versuche iiber Cannizzaro's Reaktion bei der Kondensation der Acetaldehyde mit wassrigen Alkalien. [Quantitative experiments on Can- nizzaro's reaction in the condensation of acetaldehyde by aqueous alkaline solution.] Ann. Chem. [Liebig] 420: 262-275. 1920.— Acetaldehyde was subjected to N /2 KOH, N /3 Ba(0H)2, or buffer salt mixtures for periods ranging from 1 to 240 hours and at temperatures of 0°, 18°, and 50°C. At Ph 6.8 and 50° the aldehyde underwent Cannizzaro's reaction (simultaneous oxidation and reduction) to the extent of 2 per cent in 3 hours, with no formation of wax. The reaction extended to 3.8 per cent in 3 hours, with no wax formation, at Ph 9.6. At Ph 10.7 the Cannizzaro reaction extended to 5.8 per cent of the aldehyde in 18.5 hours, with a yield of 10 to 20 per cent of wax. The Cannizzaro reaction is quite insignificant, relative to the velocity of the aldol condensation; for the latter proceeds so rapidly that only very little acid or alcohol can be formed. The limited extent of the Cannizzaro reaction at 50° is ascribed to condensation of acetaldehyde to acetaldol, the latter decomposing to crotonic aldehyde. — W. E. Tottingham. 416. Legroux, ReniS, and Joseph Mesnard. Vitamines pour la culture des bacteries. [Vitamines in the culture of bacteria.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 901-904. 1920.— It is found that certain globules are necessary for the growth and development of the bacilli of Pfeiffer (influenza). — C. H. and W. K. Farr. 417. MuLLER, Erich. Die Dehydroxydation der Aldehyde. Mechanismus ihrer Oxyda- tion. [The dehydroxydation of aldehydes. Mechanism of their oxidation.] Ann. Chem. [Liebig] 420:241-263. 1920. — Dehydroxydation is electrochemical or chemical oxidation of formaldehyde, acetaldehyde, and benzaldehyde in alkaline solution, with the production of gaseous hydrogen and an acid. Formaldehyde yields hydrogen by the action of certain metals which also accelerate the Cannizzaro reaction (simultaneous oxidation and reduction). The results of experiments with CuO, CU2O and AgaO as catalysts are given. The mechan- ism of dehydroxydation in the case of ^cetaldehj'de is supposed to proceed in two alternate ways, with the oxyaldehyde as a primary product, as follows: (1) Acetaldehy de-water + electrical charge = oxyacetaldehyde + hydrogen ion. And (2) Oxyacetaldehyde + electri- cal charge = acetic acid + hydrogen ion. (The H-ion apparently functions in the reduc- tion of aldehyde to alcohol.) Or (3) Oxycetaldehyde -f electrical charge + acetic acid -|- molecular hydrogen. — If reaction (3) is more rapid than (2) dehydroxydation occurs, and . hydrogen appears. — W: E. Tottingham. 418. Strand, E. [Rev. of: Lipschutz, A. Pflanze und Tier. [Plant and animal.] J^p.ySfig. Theodor Thomas: Leipzig.] Arch. Naturgesch., Abt. A, 83, Heft 4:209. 1919.— The author discusses the origin of the living substance of the plant and the formation of the living substance of the human body out of food. — C. E. Allen. 64 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 419. TocHiNAi, YosHiHiKO. Studies on the food relations of Fusarium lini. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1^:22-33. 1920. — The following substances were tested as sources of carbon: nine carbohydrates — viz., glucose, levulose, galactose, sucrose, maltose, lactose soluble starch, inulin, and arabin — in 2 per cent solutions; six organic acids — viz., malic, succinic, maleic, fumaric, racemic, and citric — in 1 and 0.1 percent solutions; and glycerine, mannite, vanillin, thymol, and a-napthol in 2 per cent solutions. The chemicals were added in the above indicated quantities to a standard nutritive solution prepared as follows, NH.NOs, 1 g. ; KH2PO4, 0.50 g. ; Mg SO4, 0.25 g. ; and redistilled water 1000 g. As sources of nitrogen, ammonium sulfate, sodium nitrate, potassium nitrate, peptone, and urea in 2 per cent solutions, and acetamide, succinamide, dicyandiamide, and asparagine in 1 per cent solutions were tested. Each chemical was added to a standard nutritive solution of the fol- lowing composition : KH2PO4, 0.50 g. ; MgS04, (crystal) 0.25 g. ; cane sugar, 20 g. ; and redistilled water 1000 cc. Results were checked at the end of two weeks growth. The carbohy- drates tested gave the following dry weights in grams of mycelia: inulin 0.299; glucose 0.274; arabin 0.147; maltose 0.151; soluble starch 0.125; levulose 0.084; galactose 0.072; sucrose 0.044; and lactose 0.039. Organic acids as sources of carbon were unfavorable to the fungus, which could develop only in low percentages, such as 0.1 per cent. As indicated by the growth made, the organic acids may be arranged as follows in descending order: succinic, malic, citric, fumaric, maleic, and racemic. In the nutritive solution containing racemic acid the d-tartaric was more readily assimilated than the 1-tartaric acid, as determined by the change in optical activity. Mannite was a favorable source of carbon, 0.24 g. (dry weight) of mycelium being produced, while glycerine gave but 0.024 g. The phenol derivatives prevented growth. Organic nitrogen compounds are far better sources of nitrogen than inorganic compounds, the dry weights of mycelium in grams being as fol- lows: peptone 0.448; urea 0.251; sodium nitrate 0.198; ammonium phosphate 0.194; ammo- nium sulphate 0.038; and potassium nitrate 0.012. The amides are generally good sources of nitrogen for this fungus, the following dry weights in grams of mycelia being obtained: asparagine 0.288; acetamide 0.173; dicyandiamide 0.516; and succinamide 0.143. — L. M. Massey. METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION) 420. Andersox, J. A., E. B. Fred, and W. H. Peterson. The relation between the num- ber of bacteria and acid production in the fermentation of xylose. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27: 281-292. 1920. — The rate of growth of Lactobacillus pentoaceticus was compared with its rate of acid production in the fermentation of xylose. Both the plate and the direct counting method of Breed were used for the counting of the bacteria. The volatile (acetic) and the nonvolatile (lactic) acids were determined. It was found that the acid production is most rapid during the period of maximum growth of the organisms, and a decline in the rate of growth is accompanied by a decrease in acid production. The bacterial numbers reach a maximum within 48 hours after inoculation, while the maximum acidity is found only after several days. In the presence of calcium carbonate, the bacteria multiply more rapidly and reach a higher number, accompanied by a more nearly complete fermentation. — Selman A. Waksman. 421. Sherman, H. C, I. D. Garard, and V. K. La Mer. A further study of the process of purifying pancreatic amylase. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1900-1907. 19_~0. ORGANISM AS A WHOLE 422. Anonymous. The tenacity of prickly pear seedlings. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:571. 1920.— Prickly pear, Opimtia sps. seedlings without water remained alive for 12 months in an office. — L. R. Waldron. 423. Chemin, E. Observations anatomiques et biologiques sur le genre "Lathraea." [Anatomical and biological observations on the genus "Lathraea."] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X. 2: 125-272. / pL, 88 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 319. No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 65 424. LoTKA, Alfred J. Analytical note on certain rhythmical relations in organic systems. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 410-415. 1920. — A discussion of mathematical laws of some types of periodic phenomena. Certain applications of the laws of chemical dynamics indicate the occurrence of damped (transitory) oscillations, and only such were expected "in the absence of geometrical, structural causes." The author finds, however, that in certain cases his method indicates undamped oscillations. Consider a system in evolution, where species of matter (organic or inorganic) having the masses Xi, X2 . . . Xn are character- ized by certain parameters Q and physically conditioned by other parameters P. "For a very broad class of cases, . . . the course of events in such a system will be represented by a system of differential equations of the form -^ = FiniXr, X, • • • The author here considers especially a simple case, that of the quantitative relations between a plant species and an animal species feeding upon it. Undamped oscillations in the abun- dance of the species are shown to result. — Howard B. Frost. 425. MoREAU, F. (M. and Mme.) Recherches sur les lichens de la famiUe des Pelti- geracees. [Researches on lichens of the family Peltigeraceae.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bof. X. 1: 29- 138. IS pi, 23 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 371. 426. PiETSCH, Albert. Wie erklart sich daslange Hangenbleiben der Blatter an einigen phanerogamen Holzgewachsen im Herbste 1919? [What is the explanation for the late reten- tion of the foliage of several phanerogamous woody plants in the fall of 1919?] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 150-155. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 140. GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION 427. Bernbeck. Das Wachstum im Winde. [Growth and wind.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 27-40, 59-69, 93-100. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 113. 428. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem of conifers. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 219. 10 pp., 4 pi, 10 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 318. 429. Harvey, E. N. An experiment on regulation in plants. Amer. Nat. 54:362-367. 1 fi^. 1920. — An analysis of factors retarding lateral outgrowths of plants. The author recalls the already known facts that growing stem tip or apical bud has inhibitory influences on lower latent buds and that active root inhibits growth of others above it. He reports an experiment to support the idea that regulatory influence of one part over another in plants is not due to transport of materials. The author thinks that it is dependent on living proto- plasts in the organism whose selective permeability leads to an electrical polarity that deter- mines the biological polarity of the organism. — J. P. Kelly. 430. Reed, H, S. The dynamics of a fluctuating growth rate. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 397-410. 5 fig. 1920.— This is a study of the growth rate of a selected lot of shoots on young apricot trees, with reference not only to the type of growth, but also to the intraseasonal periodicity of growth. The growth rate exhibited its greatest velocity in the early part of the growing season and declined as the season advanced, exhibiting three intra- seasonal cycles of growth. The growth during each cycle is expressed by the formula of autocatylysis, log — ^— = K (t - ti) BOTANICAL ABBTBACTB, VOL. VII, NO. 1 66 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, The growth rate for the entire season conforms to that of a chemical reaction consisting of two unimolecular reactions, one of which alternately accelerates and retards the other, X = 210 [1 - e- 095(1-1)] +19.1 L-.osst cos ^ t1 If growth be assumed to be proportional to the amount of active catalyst present, a method is available for studying the dynamics of the growth process. — H. S. Reed. MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES 431. Jaccard, p. Inversion de I'excentricite des branches produite experimentalement. [The experimental inversion of the eccentricity of branches.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32:273-281. 2 jpl., 1 fig. 1920. — Many authors have considered the eccentric growth of the lateral branches of trees to be the result of the polarizing action of a geotropic excitation having its seat in the terminal portion, and have therefore called the wood of the larger side "geotropic wood." If growing branches are tied in the form of a circle with the upper face on the inside, thus reversing the usual tension-compression relation of the upper and lower faces, a reversal of the eccentricity occurs. The eccentricity is therefore due to the mechanical action of weight (tension and compression) on the growing tissues, and not to a geotropic excitation. This conclusion is supported by the behavior of plants kept for some months on a large clinostat. Here also the eccentricity is reversed; because of a slight centrifugal force (1/20 gravity) developed by the clinostat, the upper face of the branch is more strongly compressed during one half of the rotation than is the lower face during the other half. The same stimulus, such as longitudinal compression, accelerates wood formation in some species and retards it in others. Conifers and dicotyledons differ in this respect. The increase in the thickness of the wood on one side compensates for a decrease on the other; eccentricity involves no abso- lute increase in the mass of woody tissue in a given length of the branch. — L. W. Sharp. GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY 432. Anonymous. Notes and comments. Australian Nat. 4: 160. 1920. — A seed ger- minating in one year instead of the usual two. — T. C. Frye. 433. Lesage, p. Contributions a I'etude de la germination des spores de mousses. [Germination of moss spores.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 166: 744-747. 1918. — The author shows that the spores of certain mosses are capable of germination after being dried for periods of from 3 to 7 years. In the case of Funaria hygrometrica, which proved an espe- cially good species for experimental purposes, he found that the optimum temperature for germination was between 21 and 22°C.; that darkness retarded the germination; and that spores sown in distilled water germinated better if the vessels of distillation were glass rather than copper. — A. W. Evans. TEMPERATURE RELATIONS 434. CoviLLE, Frederick V. The influence of cold in stimulating the growth of plants. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 434-435. 1920. — The attainment of winter dormancy by trees and shrubs is not dependent upon exposure to cold. Experiments with controlled temperatures further indicate that a period of chilling is necessary for normal resumption of growth in the spring; in plants kept warm throughout the winter, the spring growth is delayed and abnormal. Exposure to cold results in transformation of stored starch to sugar, with the consequent development of high osmotic pressures. — Howard B. Frost. 435. Matisse, G. Action de la chaleur et du froid sur I'activite des etres vivants. [Action of heat and cold upon the activity of living organisms.] u + 556 p., 175 fig. Emile Larose; Paris, 1919. — According to the author he has attempted in this work to correlate the viewpoint No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 67 of the physical sciences with that of physiology. He assumes that the organism is not the sum of the functions of its organs, and that it is important to study the reactions of the organism complete. His experiments are intended to be in this direction. While drawing something from botanical material in the historical discussion, the experiments are based largely on animal forms. — B. M. Duggar. RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS 436. Aston, B. C. Radio-active fertilizers and plant growth. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 172-173. 1920. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 457. 437. Blackman, V. H, Radioactivity and normal physiological function. Ann. Botany 34: 299-302. 1920. — The writer presents a brief resume of H. Zwaardemaker's researches dealing with the radio-activity of certain substances in relation to physiological function. Though the results here obtained are primarily of fundamental importance to animal physi- ology, their probable application to plant physiology is indicated. — R. W. Webb. TOXIC AGENTS 438. Bertrand, Gabriel. Action de la chloropicrine sur les plantes superieures. [The effect of chloropicrine on the higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:858-860. 1920. — Concentrations of chloropicrine of 200 g. or less per cubic meter were tried on trees and shrubs. This concentration was reduced progressively in an attempt to find the minimal effect. Twelve to twenty grams gave the same effect as is found in autumnal coloration and abscission. Two to three grams gave an effect similar to frost or anesthetfcs. * Astill smaller amount caused the leaves to fall off without change of color or alteration in turgescence. It was found that young leaves were less sensitive than herbaceous. It is suggested that chloro- picrine might be found valuable in ridding plants of their leaf parasites. — C. H. and W. K. Farr. 439. Bertrand, Gabriel. Des conditions qui peuvent modifier I'activite de la chloro- picrine vis-a-vis des plantes superieures. [The conditions which frequently modify the effect of chloropicrine upon the higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 952-954. 1920. — In this study leafy shoots of eight species of trees were used. Concentrations were tried between from 1 to 200 g. per cubic meter for periods of from 10 to 60 minutes. The effect is about the same, providing the product of time and concentration is the same. Humidity does not seem to alter the effect, nor is temperature a very important factor. — C. H. Farr. 440. Medes, Grace and J. F. McClendon. The effect of anesthetics on living cells. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6:243-246. 1920.— Certain anesthetics were applied to animal cells (Cassiopea) in sea water and to plant cells (Elodea) in a solution of NaHCOa in distilled water. The effects differed with the organism and the anesthetic employed, and with the particular cell activity or property considered. In the case of Elodea, four anes- thetics — alcohol, ether, chloroform, and chloretone— all increased respiration and permea- bility, but decreased photosynthesis; while they sometimes increased and sometimes decreased protoplasmic rotation. — Howard B. Frost. PHYSIOLOGY OF DISEASE 441. Jodidi, S. L. a mosaic disease of cabbage as revealed by its nitrogen constituents. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42 : 1883-1893. 1920. — This disease is characterized by denitrifica- tion taking place in the affected tissues. The nitrates are, in part, reduced to ammonia, whichk'is lost; and, in part, to nitrites. The latter reacts on the ammonia group of various organic compounds and brings about the elimination of elementary nitrogen. — /. M. Brannon. 68 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 442. JoDiDi, S. L., S. C. MouLTON, and K. S. Markley. The mosaic disease of spinach as characterized by its nitrogen constituents. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1061-1070. 1920. — The author jfinds that the lower nitrogen content of the diseased tissues may safely be con- sidered as one of the striking characteristics of the mosaic disease of spinach. The leaves of the normal plants have higher nitric-nitrogen content than the blighted spinach. The difference in nitrate content of healthy and blighted root is slight. The higher ammonia content and presence of nitrites may be said, also, to be characteristic of spinach blight. The diseased plants were found capable of building up proteins. The leaves of the diseased plants have a smaller proportion of acid amide, basic, and non-basic nitrogen, but a larger proportion of peptide and protein nitrogen than the corresponding normal tissues. It is because of these findings — together with the difference in total nitrate, nitrite, and ammoniacal nitrogen content already reported — that we logically and forcibly come to the conclusion that the pathological condition is brought about by the process of denitrification which takes place in the spinach tissues. — J. M. Brannon. MISCELLANEOUS 443. Galippe, V. Recherches sur la resistance des microzymas I. I'action du temps et sur leur survivance dans I'ambre. [The longevity of microzymas and its survival in amber.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 856-858. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 391. 444. Hamblin, C. O. To infect lucerne seed with nodule organisms. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 466. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 30. 445. T., E. N, Botany at the British Association. Nature 104: 520-521. 1920. 446. Thompson, Leonard R. Advantages of solid paraffin for sealing anaerobic fluid cultures. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27 : 240-244. 1920. — A method is described for sealing tubes with solid paraffin. A greater percentage of positive growths with stock anaerobic cultures has been obtained than with parallel tubes sealed with liquid paraffin. — Selman A. Waksman. SOIL SCIENCE J. J. Skinner, Editor F. M. ScHERTZ, Assistant Editor ACID SOILS 447. Hartwell, Burt L., and F. R. Pember. The effect of dicalcium silicate on an acid soil. Soil Sci. 10:57-60. 1920. — Pot experiments on an acid soil show that the beneficial effect of "dicalcium silicate" on the growth of lettuce is due to its neutralizing effect. "Dical- cium silicate" and "hydrated silica" do not appear to be of benefit because of their silicon content. — W. J. Rabbins. 448. Martin, W. H. The relation of sulfur to soil acidity and to the control of potato scab. Soil Sci. 9:393-409. 1920. ■ 449. MiRASOL, Jose Jison. Aluminum as a factor in soil acidity. Soil Sci. 10: 153-217. 12 pi. 1920. — Experiments were performed to determine the effect of aluminum salts alone or in combination with calcium carbonate or with acid phosphate on the growth of sweet clover in sand; the effect of limestone and acid phosphate on the acidity and productivity of soil ; the effect of the removal of some aluminum from the soil on the growth of sweet clover and whether iron and manganese are factors in the acidity of the soils investigated. Alumi- num salts were highly toxic to sweet clover when applied in amounts chemically equivalent to the acidity of the soil and fatal in amounts five times the acidity of the soil. Calcium carbonate or acid phosphate decreased or eliminated the toxicity of aluminum salts. Alu- minum hydroxide was not toxic. Both limestone and acid phosphate reduced the acidity of No. 1, February, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 69 t"he soil and increased the crop yield. The reduction in acidity is due to the formation of insol- uble aluminum salts. Leaching soil with potassium nitrate until the leachings are neutral removes as much as 59 per cent of the aluminum, reduces the acidity 99 per cent, and improves the growth of sweet clover. Iron and manganese are apparently not important factors in the soils studied. — W. J. Robbins. 450. Shedd, O. M. a proposed method for the estimation of total calcium in soils and the significance of this element to soil fertility. Soil Sci. 10: 1-14. 1920. — A rapid and accurate method for the determination of total calcium in soils is described. The total calcium content of some Kentucky soils is so low that their deficiency in this substance is important, as well as is the deficiency in phosphorus and nitrogen. Cultivation causes a loss in calcium. The best soil types contain the most calcium; the poorest, the least. A ton of limestone or rock phosphate per acre may add more calcium than is already present. — W. J. Robbins. INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS 451. Greaves, J. E. The antagonistic action of calcium and iron salts toward other salts as measured by ammonification and nitrification. Soil Sci. 10: 77-102. W fig. 1920. — A determination was made of the ammonification and nitrification of dried blood in soil in tumblers to which salts in fractions of gram molecules were added. True antagonism as measured by ammonification was found between calcium sulphate, and sodium carbonate, sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, and magnesium sul- phate. The same is true of nitrification with the exception of sodium sulphate and calcium chloride and calcium sulfate. With some exceptions, the sulphate, chloride, carbonate, and nitrate of iron were found to antagonize the salts of sodium, calcium, and magnesium. Iron carbonate reduced the toxicity of magnesium sulphate to ammonification 75 per cent, artd iron nitrate increased the nitrification in the presence of magnesium chloride 420 per cent. The quantity of iron required for maximum effect varies with the iron compound and the specific alkali. — W. J. Robbins. 452. Greaves, J. E. The influence of arsenic upon the biological transformation of nitrogen in soils. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 128-129. 1918.— Complete paper published in Biochem. Bull. 3: 2-16. 1913. 453. Peterson, E. G., and E. Mohr. Nitrogen fixation by bacteria in Utah soils. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 97-98. 1918. 454. Neller, J. R. The oxidizing power of soil from limed and unlimed plots and its rela- tion to other factors. Soil Sci. 10: 29-39. Fig. 1, pi. 1. 1920.— The carbon dioxide evolution, and nitrate and ammonia production, from added organic matter were determined for soil samples from plots which have been cultivated for more than ten years under limed and unlimed conditions. Nitrate accumulation and bacterial numbers were higher on the limed than unlimed soil, but the ammonia accumulation was about the same. The average crop yield for the past ten years varies closely with the present oxidizing power. — W. J. Robbins. 455. Robbins, William J., and A. B. Massey. The effect of certain environmental conditions on the rate of destruction of vanillin by a soil bacterium. Soil Sci. 10: 237-246. 1 fi^. 1920. — Studies in solution cultures containing nutrient salts show that the destruction of vanillin by a soil bacterium is favored by aeration and inhibited by slight concentrations of hydrochloric acid. In mixtures of sodium nitrate, potassium sulfate, and calcium acid phosphate, the destruction of vanillin is most rapid in the cultures high in phosphate and least rapid in cultures high in sulfate. The number of species capable of destroying vanillin is limited. — W. J. Robbins. 456. Singh, Thakur Mahadeo. The effect of gypsum on bacterial activities in soils. Soil Sci. 9:437-468. 1920.— Determinations were made of the effect of calcium sulphate, calcium carbonate, or combinations of the two on the ammonification of dried blood, nitri- 70 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, fication of ammonium sulfate, fixation of nitrogen, fixation of nitrogen by B. radicicola, and yield of plants. Ammonification was decreased by gypsum and by mixtures of lime and gyp- sum. Nitrification was decreased by calcium sulphate but increased by calcium carbonate and gypsum together. Nitrogen fixation was stimulated by 100 pounds per acre of gypsum, but larger amounts had less stimulative effect. The yield and potassium content of red clover was increased by 1000 pounds of gypsum per acre, but other leguminous crops or wheat were not affected. Gypsum increased the soil acidity and, in some cases, the amount of soluble potassium. — W. J. Robbins. FERTILITY STUDIES 457. Aston, B. C. Radio-active fertilizers and plant growth. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 172-173. 1920. — A brief review of work in England and America. — A^. /. Giddings. 458. Harris, F. S. Effect of soil alkali on plant growth. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 131-132. 1918. 459. Leiningen-Westerburg (Graf zu.) Rauchschaden und einschlagige boden- kundliche Fragen. [Smoke injury and related matters of soil science.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 18-93. 1920. — There is a close relation between soil composition and quality, and the damage which may result to vegetation from various fumes and dusts. Smoke damage to plants is usually indirect, as the effect of the fumes is on the soil and humus. Lime is espe- cially necessary in soils exposed to acid fumes, and should be added in the cheapest waj possible where soils are poor in lime; otherwise the acids will remove all the lime present. This applies both to open and to forest lands. It has been computed that in the vicinity of Stolberg (Rhine province) approximately 800 grams of sulphuric and hydrochloric acids are deposited annually per square meter of soil. Lime also combines with poisonous zinc, copper, iron, and mercury salts and renders them harmless to plants, but has little or no effect on arsenic compounds. Some of these compounds in small quantities stimulate plant growth, but in large quantities hinder or destroy it. Dust from lime, cement, or magnesite ovens, etc., may act as a fertilizer, or if in too great volume and not occasionally harrowed into the soil may form a crust which will injure vegetation. Soot does not in itself injure plants, but does so indirectly by sticking on the foliage and adsorbing poisonous gases from the air. In case of many substances, such as calcium, magnesium, chlorine, fluorine and sul- phur compounds, which are already present in soil not exposed to smoke, it is difficult to deter- mine the amount of injury due to fumes, since chemical analysis of the plants will not show the origin of the poisons they may contain. — W. N. Sparhawk. 460. McCooL, M. M., and C. E. Millar. The formation of soluble substances in soils taken from widely separated regions. Soil Sci. 10: 219-235. 1 fig. 1920.— Samples of air- dry soils were leached with distilled water until the freezing-point depression of the soil was zero. The soil was then incubated at 25 °C., and the freezing-point lowerings were deter- mined after 5, 10, 30, and 60 days. Sub-soils and new soils formed soluble salts very slowly. New soils are less active than somewhat older soils, and aged soils are almost inert. Soils from acid regions were not more soluble than those which had weathered more. The formation of soluble material increased with grinding and with treatment with sodium nitrate. — W. J. Robbins. 461. NiKLAS, H. Ubersicht uber Bayerns Bodenverhaltnisse. [Summary of Bavarian soil conditions.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 123-135. 1920.— The author discusses the con- struction of a general soil map for Bavaria, based on the prevailing crops grown. Complete soil surveys are lacking. Soils may be classified according to climatic conditions, geological origin, or to texture. For practical purposes the latter classification is the best, both for agriculture and for forestry. The 434 districts of Bavaria are classified in 7 soil groups as follows: (1) very heavy; (2) heavy; (3) medium; (4) heavy and light; (5) light and medium; (6) light, and (7) meadow soils due to climatic conditions regardless of texture. — (1) This group comprises 13 per cent of the total area of Bavaria, and grows principally wheat and No. 1, February, 1921] ' SOIL SCIENCE 71 grass; (2) 12 per cent, and grows wheat and barley; (3) 14 per cent, growing barley, (4) and (5) 17 per cent; (6) 31 per cent, and (7) 13 per cent. The lighter soils grow principally rye and oats. The value of such a map is discussed. — W. N. Sparhawk. 462. Parker, F. W., and E. Truog. The relation between the calcium and the nitrogen content of plants and the function of calcium. Soil Sci. 10: 49-56. Fig. 1. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 406. 463. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II. Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228:89-131. 1920.— Results are reported from eight experiments fields on as many different soil areas of the state, ranging over periods of four to nine years. The requirements for phosphorus, potassium, nitrogen, and limestone were determined, and a comparison was made of acid phosphate and rock phosphate on limed and unlimed soil. The rotation employed in most cases is corn, soy beans, wheat, and clover. None of the treatments give any material increase in crops on the Lexington field, representing the highly phosphatic soils of the Central Blue Grass region. On all the soils represented by the other fields, limestone and phosphates give very large increases. The returns from potassium salts in connection with phosphates or in connection with phosphates and limestone give little or no increase in yields. Nitrate of soda gives prac- tically no increase for corn, but gives small or medium increases for wheat and tobacco. In the comparison of acid phosphate and rock phosphate at the average annual rate of 200 pounds per acre of 16 per cent acid phosphate and 400 pounds per acre of 32 per cent rock phosphate, the rock phosphate has generally given the larger increases on unlimed ground, while the acid phosphate has generally given the larger increases on limed ground. — George Roberts. 464. Robinson, C. S. The determination of carbon dioxide in water-soluble carbonates. Soil Sci. 10: 41-47. Fig. 1. 19'20. — A description is given of precautions used and modifi- cations in the apparatus made in determining the carbon dioxide content of limestones, marls, and soils by Van Slyke's titrometric and gasometric methods. — W. J. Bobbins. 465. Schollenberger, C. H. Organic phosphorus content of Ohio soils. Soil Sci. 10: 127-141. Fig. 1. 1920. — The relation of the organic phosphorus content of twelve soils in relation to other soil constituents is reported. Virgin soil samples are richer in total phos- phorus than cultivated soils of the same type, and the organic phosphorus contents stand in the same order as the contents of total phosphorus. From average data one-third of the phosphorus in the surface and one-fifth in the subsurface is organic. Organic phosphorus is probably not of a high order of availability. — W. J. Bobbins. 466. Thornber, H. Cover crops, tillage and commercial fertilizers. Better Fruit 15^: 5, 20-22. Aug., 1920. 467. Thorne, Charles E. Carriers of nitrogen in fertilizers. Soil Sci. 9: 487-494. 1920. — Field experiments since 1894-5 with cereals and clover or potatoes and clover rotations fertilized w'ith sodium nitrate," linseed meal, dried blood, ammonium sulfate, and tankage show in 40 comparisons with but 2 exceptions that sodium nitrate has produced the largest yield. The same is true of a tobacco-wheat-clover rotation except on limed land, where the yields from the ammonium sulphate slightly exceed those from sodium nitrate — W. J. Bobbins. MOISTURE RELATIONS 468. Cunningham, Brysson. Rainfall and drainage. [Rev. of: Craster, J. E. E. Esti- mating river flow from rainfall records (Engineering. Jan. 2, 1920). Nature 105: 42. 1920.] — Craster finds the proportion of run-off to rainfall varies in both England and America from 33 to 67 per cent. That not less than 1 mm. (0.04 inch) of rainfall is required to wet vegeta- tion and surface of ploughed land; this being lost by evaporation after every rain. Percola- tion may be estimated roughly at not less than 10 per cent. Mentions also data on transpiration. — 0. A. Stevens. 72 SOIL SCIENCE ' [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 469. Gardner, Willard. A capillary transmission constant and methods of determining it experimentally. Soil Sci. 10: 103-126. Fig. 1-8 B. 1920. — A capillary-transmission-con- stant similar to the specific conductivity of metals and the specific thermal conductivity of heat conductors is defined, and methods for its measurement are described. Using this con- stant, a calculation is made which shows that in a certain soil 12 inches of water may be available from a 12 foot water-table in 30 days. — W. J. Robbins. 470. Karraker, p. E. The effect of the initial moisture in a soil on moisture movement. Soil Sci. 10: 143-152. 1920. — Soils were placed in vertical tubes with their lower ends in water, and the penetration of water was determined. The rate of water movement was about as great in air or oven dry soils as in soils containing up to about 6 per cent initial moisture. In saturated sand the movement was 1.56 times that in air-dry sand. — W. J. Robbins. 471. Livingston, Burton E., and Riichiro Koketsu. The water-supplying power of the soil as related to the wilting of plants. Soil Sci. 9: 469-485. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 399. 472. WoLKOFF, M. I. Effect of various soluble salts and lime on evaporation. Capillary rise and distribution of water in some agricultural soils. Soil Sci. 9: 409-436. 4 fig- 1920. — Soluble salts added to soil materially decreased the evaporation of soil moisture. The eflSciency of a salt in decreasing evaporation was shown to depend upon the osmotic concen- tration of salts in the surface inch of soil. The soils from which the least water evaporated showed the greatest osmotic concentration in the first inch. There was practically no diffusion of the salts downward against the rise of capillary water. In two agricultural soils used, sodium chloride decreased the capillary rise of water. Calcium oxide in drab clay and potassium phosphate in brown silt loam accelerated water rise. In these soils the addition of the salts increased the water content in the first 8 inches, as compared with untreat'.d soil. The crust formed on the surface of the soil by some of the salts did not retard evapora- tion. With untreated soils, the texture of the soil influences the extent of evaporation. Soils having a greater amount of fine material show greater loss of water by evaporation. — Dorothy Wilson. PEAT 473. Alwat, F. J. Chemical requirements of peat soils in the light of European experience. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13:327-341. 1920.— European peat soils are placed in two classes, those with (1) low lime requirement, and (2) high lime requirement. — G. B. Rigg. 474. Levin, E. The use of peat as a fertilizer in Michigan. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13: 319-327. 1920.— Fertilizer prepared by composting peat and manure gave good results on uplands. — G. B. Rigg. 475. Ptjchner, H. Hysteresis of aqueous solutions of peat soil. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13: 351. 1920. — An aqueous extraction of peat soil contained gels of silicic acid, ferric hydroxide, and alumina. On ignition the extract yielded alumina, ferric oxide, manganese oxides, lime, magnesia, sulphate, phosphate, and silicate. — G. B. Rigg. 476. RosT, C. O. Pyrites and its toxic oxidation products in peat soils. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13: 303-306. 1920.— Iron sulphide is widely distributed in peat soils. It appears mostly as pyrite, which is insoluble in water. In air it is oxidized to ferrous sulphate and sulphuric acid, both of which are soluble and toxic to plants. — G. B. Rigg. MISCELLANEOUS 477. L'inhart, G. A. A new and simplified method for the statistical interpretation of biometrical data. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 4: 159-181. 12 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 396. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 73 478. NiKLAS, H. Die Bedeutung der Geologie fiir die land- und Forstwirtschaftliche Bodenkunde. [The significance of the science of geology with relation to agricultural and forest soil science.] Naturvviss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:22-35. 1920. — After consider- ing all cultural conditions of the soil in 434 agricultural precincts, Niklas divid* s the soils in seven classes, based on heavy, intermediate, and light soils, and variety of products pro- duced. The prepared chart showed a marked coincidence with the geological charts, although these were not considered in preparing the soil chart. In so far as forestry is concerned, a soil study is still more imperative, because of the longer period of time in which mistakes must be realized. It will be necessary to make a study of the chemical and physical proper- ties of the various soils of each geological formation, and to relate this study to one of the principal tree species. The employment of agriculturists and foresters in the various geologi- cal bureaus, whose duties would be to prepare the geological charts for practical use, is recom- mended. — J. Roeser. 479. Niklas, H. Eine landwirtschaftliche Bodeniibersichtskarte von Bayern. [An agri- cultural soil survey chart for Bavaria.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 62-65. 1920. — As a temporary guide for constructing a soil chart for Bavaria, for forestry and agriculture, the author has made use of the official cultivation statistics, which have been kept for the past 20 years He contends that the knowledge of the soil gained through long years by agricul- turists and foresters shows itself in the choice of cultural species growing on the ground. The author essentially repeats his observations of an earlier article. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 478), appearing in the previous issue of this paper. — J. Roeser. 480. Schuster, Matth.^us. Wie soil der Land- und Forstwirt Geologische Karten lesen? [How shall the agriculturist and forester read geological charts?] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 10-22. / fig. 1920. — The principal reason why agriculturists and foresters have not reconciled themselves to geological charts is that they cannot familiarize themselves with the manner of representation used. The modern charts often contain a mass of colors and symbols, which are apt to confuse the user. The Bavarian charts have been prepared to meet both the scientific and practical demand, and are easily legible without detailed expla- nations. The author gives a detailed description of the method of preparation and the methods of interpreting these charts; and by means of a short field trip over the terrain rep- resented on a model chart, shows the relation existing between rock and soil and the cultural use of the soil, and also explains the methods employed by the geologist to show the relations. — J. Roeser. TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS J. M. Greenman, Editor E. B. Patson, Assistant Editor GENERAL 481. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Blatter, Ethelbert. Flora Arabica. Part 1. Rec. Bot. Surv. India 3, No. 1.] Nature J04: 609. 1920.— Includes list of thirty-eight families (Ben- tham and Hooker arrangement) including vernacular names and uses, also discussion of botanical regions. — 0. A. Stevens. 482. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Gamble, J. S. Flora of the Presidency of Madras. Part 3. P. 391-577. Legiiminosae—Caesalpiniodeae to Caprifoliaceae. Aldard and Son, and West Newman, Ltd.: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 36. 1920. 483. Benoist, R. Plantes recoltees par M. E. Wagner en Republique Argentine. [Plants collected by M. E. Wagner in the Argentine.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 655-661. 1919. — Detailed notes concerning some 20 species collected in the province of Santiago include information as to habitat, economic importance, common name, etc. — E. B. Payson. 74 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 484. Blatter, E., and F. Hallberg. The flora of the Indian desert, (Jodhpur and Jaesalmer). Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 218-246; 525-551; 811-818. 89 -pi. 1918-19.— A systematic enumeration with extensive notes and citation of specimens. The following new forms are described : Farsetia macrantha, Cleome brachycarpa Vahl var. glauca, Gynandrop- sis pentaphylla DC. var. nana, Melhania magnifolia, Zizyphus truncata, Psoralea odorata, TephrOsia incana Grah. var. horizontalis, T. muUiflora, T. petrosa, Rhynchosia rhombifolia, R. arenaria, Angoeissus rotundifolia, Trianthema pentandra Linn. var. rubra, var. flava, Pulicaria rajputanae, Glossocardia setosa, Convolvulus densiflorus, C. gracilis, Aerua pseudo- tomentosa. The seventy-eight photographic illustrations of desert scenes and vegetation accompanying this paper are excellent. — E. D. Merrill. 485. BoLzoN, P. Ricerche botaniche nel bacino della Dora Baltea. [Botanical researches in the basin of the Dora Baltea.] Nuovo Giorn. Bot. Ital. 25: 309-376. 1918.— The author presents a detailed enumeration of an extensive collection of plants recently made in the valley of the Dora Baltea in northern Italy. — /. M. Greenman. 486. Brown, William H., and Elmer D. Merrill. Philippine palms and palm products. Forestry Bur. Philippine Islands Bull. 18. 129 p., U pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 533. 487. Farwell, Oliver A. Notes on the Michigan Flora, II. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 345-371. 1919. — Reference is made to several species whose range is known to cross Michigan and which should, therefore, be sought in the state. Among these may be men- tioned: Phegopteris Rober liana (Hoffm.) A. Br., Asplenium viride Huds., Calamagrostis hyperborea Lange, Woodsia glabella R. Br. and Calamagrostis Pickeringii var. laciistris (Kearney) Hitch. The author claims that the application of the principles of priority in nomenclature produces the following changes : Elodea canadensis Mx. for philotria canadensis (Mx.) Britton, Digitaria Heist, for Syntherisma Walt., Ginania Bub. for Holcus Authors, Reboulea Kunth. for Eatonia Authors, Trichoon Roth, for Phragmites Trin., Trichophyllum Ehrh. for Eleocharis R. Br., Iria castanea (Mx.) n. comb, for Fimbristylis castanea (Michx.) Vahl., Eriophorum for Scirpus in part, and Phaeocephalum Ehrh. for Rijnchospora Vahl. Changes in family names, in whole or part, are recommended as follows: Scheuchzeriaceae becomes Juncaginaceae, Alismaceae becomes Alismoidaceae, Potamogetonaceae becomes Fluvialaceae, Valisneriaceae becomes Hydrocharidaceae, Gramineae becomes Graminaceae, Polygonaceae becomes Persicariaceae, Chenopodiaceae becomes Blitaceae, Leguminosae be- comes Leguminaceae, Rhamnaceae becomes Ziziphaceae, Tiliaceae becomes Tiliataceae, Ona- graceae becomes Cornicidataceae, Umbelliferae becomes Umbellataceae, Fagaceae becomes Castanaceae, Scrophulariaceae becomes Ringentaceae, and Compositae becomes Compositaceae. — H. T. Darlington. 488. Hemsley, W. Botting, and others. Flora of Aldabra: with notes on the flora of neighboring islands. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 108-153. 1919. — A description of the Alda- bra atoll in the Indian Ocean is followed by paragraphs concerning the climate, history of botanical investigation, and relation of its flora to that of some other small islands of the Western Indian Ocean. There is given a systematic enumeration of the vascular plants of Aldabra with the citation of exsiccatae. — E. B. Payson. 489. Jeanpert, Ed. Enumeration des plantes de Macedoine. [Enumeration of plants of Macedonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 662-668. 1919.— This series of papers listing the plants of Macedonia is here concluded. — E. B. Payson. 490. Lecomte, Henri. Sur les principatix caracteres de structure des bois. [Concerning the principal characters of wood structure.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 166-171. 1920. —See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 326. 491. McAtee, W. L. Specific, subspecific, and varietal categories of insects and the naming of them. Entomol. News 31: 46-55, 61-65, 1920. — The author does not regard inter- gradation a sufficient reason for "lumping" closely related species which exhibit it. Men- No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 75 tions plant families Rubiaceae and Caprifoliaceae among examples of groups separated by no absolutely trenchant character. Considers recognition of geographical subspecies a useful feature even though they may intergrade completely where their ranges meet. Discusses also color phases and formation of names. Names should be chosen which are least liable to prove inappropriate, avoiding too free use of those derived from personal or geographical names. — 0. A. Stevens. 492. MiYOSHi, Manabu. tJber der Erhaltung einer neuen wildwachsenden hangenden Varietat des Kastanienbaumes als Naturdenkmal. [Concerning a new wild chestnut with weeping branches and its preservation as a natural monument.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 185- 188. / photo. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 452. 493. Rock, Joseph F. One government forest. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 39-40. 3 pi. February, 1919. — A description of Reserve lands at Kulani, Hawaii. The forest is mainly a tree-fern forest made up of the two common types Cibotium Chamissoi and Cihotium Menziesii. Apart from these, representatives of the genus Metrosideros are the most com- mon. Dispersed through the region is also a beautiful native fan palm with large orbicular fruits described by the writer as a new species under the name of Pritchardia Beccariana. — Stanley Coulter. 494. ScHONLAND, S. Phanerogamic flora of the divisions of Uitenhage and Port Elizabeth. JMem. Bot. Surv. South Africa [Pretoria] 1: 1-118. 1919. — The present work consists of an annotated list of the flowering plants of the territorial divisions mentioned in the title. Valuable information is recorded on the topography, climate, rainfall, plant formations, etc. The total number of species listed is 2416, of which 2312 are indigenous and 104 are non-native species. — J. M. Greenman. 495. TuRRiLL, W. B. Contributions to the flora of Macedonia: H. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 105-108. 1919. — A list of species of flowering plants collected by J. M. Russell in Central Greek Macedonia in 1918. — E. B. Payson. 496. TuRRiLL, W. B. Botanical results of Swedish South American and Antarctic expedi- tions. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:268-279. 1919. PTERIDOPHYTES 497. Brause, G. Bearbeitung der von C. Ledermann von der Sepik- (Kaiserin-Augusta-) Fluss-Expedition 1912 bis 1913 und von anderen Sammlern aus dem Papuagebiete friiher mitge- brachten Pteridophyten, nebst Uebersicht iiber alle bis jetzt aus dem Papuagebiet bekannt gewordenen Arten derselben. [Revision of the Pteridophytes collected by Ledermann on the Sepik River Expedition, those brought out by earlier collectors in Papuasia, and a summary of all known species of this group from the Papuasian region.] Under the general heading: C. Lauterbach, Beitrage zur Flora von Papuasien VII, no. 62. Bot. Jahrb. 56: 30-250. 1920.— This is a very extended treatment of the Pteridophytes of Papuasia, with references and notes on distribution, structure, classification, and nomenclature. The following new varie- ties, species and combinations are proposed: Trichomanes papuanum, T. concinnum Mett. var. emarginata, T. subtilissimum, T. Ledermanni, T. maluense, T. Englerianum, T. meifo- lium Bory var. linearis and var. contracta, Hyjnenophyllum Ledermanni and var. nutans, H. Herterianum, H. Rosenstockii, H. sabinifolium Bak. var. irregularis and var. imbricata, Dicksonia Ledermanni, D. Hieronymi, Cyathea Rosenstockii, C. procera, C. cincinnata, C. subspathidata, C. sepikensis, C. Ledermanni and var. dilatata, C. Hunsteiniana and var. acuminata, Hemitelia Ledermanni, Alsophila recuryata, A. marginata, A. Rosenstockii, A. Hunsteiniana, A. rubiginosa, A. Dielsii, A. gregaria, A. dryopteroidea, A. tenuis, A. brunnea, A. olivacea, A. Ledermanni, A. scandens, Dryopteris Hunsteiniana, D. diaphana, D. calcarata (Bl.) O. Ktze. var. ciliata {Aspidium ciliatum Wall.), D. subnigra, D. coriacea and var. elata, D. ensipinna and var. acuminata, D. glaucescens, D. alta, D. pallescens, D. 76 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, fulgens, D. Icdermanni, D. notabilis, D. Metteniana Hieron. var. novoguineensis , D. subdigi- tata, D. urophylla (Wall.) C. Chr. var. cuspidata {Menisciuni cuspidatum Bl.), D. stellato- pilosa, D. mutabilis, D. micans, D. dimorpha, D. sepikensis, D. hispida, D. transversaria {Ne- phrodium transversarium Brack.), D. mollis (Jacq.) Hieron. var. amboinensis {Aspidium am- boinense Willd.), D. superba, D. muricata and var. marginata and var. obscura, D. austera, D. oblonga, D. farinosa, D. Ridleyana {Goniopferis rigida Ridley), D. hastato-pinnata, Aspid- ium Ledermanni, Leptochilus novoguineensis, Humata Ledermanni, Davallia Ledermavni, Lindsaya marginata and var. falcata, L. Rosensiockii, L. Boryana {Davallia Boryana Pr.), L. Ledermanni, L. sepikensis, L. obscura, Athyrium Ledermanni Hieron., Diplazium pseudo- shepherdioides Hieron., D. Nymani Hieron., D. Naumanni Hieron., D. Schlechteri Hieron., D. Schultzei Hieron., D. Schraderi Hieron., D. scotinum Ros. var. contracta Hieron., Asple- nium nidus L. var. ficifolia {Aspl. ficifolium Goldm.), A. comosum Christ var. subcrispa Hieron. and var. furcata Hieron., A. Lauterbachii Christ var. elongata Hieron., A. acro- carpum Hieron. (Diplazium acfocarpum Ros.), A. caudatum Forst. var. Ledermanniana Hieron., A. Ledermanni, Hieron. and var. lobulata Hieron., Blechnum saxatile, B. Leder- manni, B. deorsolqbatum, B. Hieronymi, D. decorum and var. dilatata, B. pendulum, B. papuanum, B. Fraseri (A. Cun.) Luers. var. novoguineensis, Coniogramme macrophylla (Bl.) Hieron. var. undulata Hieron., Hypolepis punctata (Thbg.) Mett. var. obscura, Vit- taria rubens Hieron., V. Ledermanni Hieron., V. Nymani Hieron., V. semipellucida Hieron., V. latissima Hieron., V. exigua Hieron., Antrophyum Ledermanni Hieron., Drymoglossum Schlechteri Hieron. & Brause, Polypodium trichopodum F. v. Muell. var. serrato-lobatum, P. ornatissimum Ros. var. dichotomum, P. glanduloso-pilosum, P. sepikense, P. politum, P. eximium, P. flagelliforme, P. ctenoideum, P. celebicum, Bl. var. aurita, P. dichotomum, P. truncata-sagittatum, P. redimiens, P. balteiforme, P. ochrophyllum, P. ferreum, P. cyathi- sorum, P. egregium, P. ingens, P. alloiosorum, P. polysorum, P. ulotheca, Cyclophorus Leder- manni, Dryostachyum novoguineense Brause var. lanceolata, Gleichenia dolosa (Copel.) C. Chr. var. virescens Hieron., G. linearis (Burm.) Clarke var. subferruginea Hieron., G. novoguineen- sis, Schizaea papuana, Angiopteris evanidostriata Hieron., A. Lauterbachii Hieron., A. Dahlii Hieron., A. undulaio-striata Hieron., A. crinita Christ var. sepikensis Hieron., A. Hellwigii Hieron., Selaginella Ledermanni Hieron., S. Kerstingii Hieron. var. brevimucronata Hieron., S. Thurnwaldiana Hieron., S. Schatteburgiana Hieron., S. Biirgersiana Hieron., S. Behrmanniana Hieron., (S. Roesickeana Hieron., S. Stolleana Hieron., S. gracilis Moore var. subbiflora Hieron., S. Bamleri Hieron., S. Schraderiana Hieron., and S. sepikensis Hieron. Papuasia is one of the richest regions in the world in ferns. The geographical fern region of Papuasia extends to the neighboring islands in all directions, and the limits are given. A table is given of the number of species in each genus common to Papuasia and each of the surrounding groups of islands as well as countries more distant. Trichomanes is espec- ially well developed. Dryopteris is also highly developed with 112 species. Polypodium is the largest genus with 168 species. Aspidium and Polystichum are poorly represented. The Pterideae are little developed. Azolla, Marsilea, Salvinia, and Pihilaria have as yet not been found. Botrychium is not known, though Ophioglossum is moderately represented. Selaginella is represented by 58 species. — K. M. Wiegand. 498. Brause, G. tJber die von C. R. W. K. van Alderwerelt van Rosenburgh neu auf gestellte Gattung Thysanobotrya. [On van Alderwerelt van Rosenburgh's new genus Thysano- botrya.] Hedwigia 61: 401. 1920.— Gepp described a new fern from Dutch New Guinea as Polybotrya arfakensis. Van Rosenburgh separated this under a new generic name as Thysanobotrya arfakensis Gepp) v.A.v.R. The present author finds that the original description and figures correspond to Alsophila biformis Ros. He considers Alsophila the proper genus for this plant and sees no reason for the creation of a separate genus Thysano- botrya. — K. M, Wiegand. 499. Hierontmus, G. tJber Cheilanthopsis Hieron., eine neue Farngattung. [Cheilan- thopsis, a new genus of ferns.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 406-409. 1920. — The genus dif- fers from Cheilanthes in its dorsiventral spores; from Hypolepis, to which it is closely related in its ascending rhizome and fascicled leaves. Although based on Cheilanthes straminea Brause, no transfer of that species to the new genus is made. — H. A. Gleason. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 77 500. Holm, Theo. Internal glandular hairs in Dryopteris. Rhodora 22: 89-90. 2 fig. 1920.— See liot. Absts. 6, Entry 1183. 501. House, Homer D. The Genus Aetopteron, Ehrhart. Amer. Fern Jour, 10:88-89. 1920. — The author revives the name of Aetopteron of Ehrhart to replace Polystichum and makes the following new combinations: Aetopteron aculeatum {Polystichum aculeatum L.), A. acrostichoides (Nephrodium acrostichoides Michx.), A. Braunii (Aspidium Braunii Spenner), A. Lemmoni {Polystichum Lemmoni Unden\^), A. lonchites {Polypodium lonchites L.), A. munilum {Aspidium munitum Kaulf.), A. scopulinum {Ascidium aculeatum var. scopu- linum D. C. Eaton). — F. C. Anderson. 502. Weatherby, C. A. Varieties of Pityrogramma triangularis. Rhodora 22: 113-120. 1920. — The author recognizes three geographic varieties in addition to the typical P. tri- angularis. The separation is based on the presence or absence of glands on the lamina and stipe, and on the character of these glands when present. A key to the varieties and the bibliography of each is given. — James P. Poole. SPERMATOPHYTES 503. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decades XCII & XCIII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:221-231. 1919. — The following species are described as new: Aconitum funiculare Stapf, Indigofera Barberi Gamble, Erythrina mysorensis Gamble, Smithia Venkobarowii Gamble, Desmodiiim wynaadense Bedd., Vigna Bourneae Gamble, Rosa Saundersiae Rolfe, Bruguiera Hainesii C. G. Rogers, Sonerila pulneyensis Gamble, Memecylon flavescens Gamble, M. Lawsonii Gamble, M. Lushingtonii Gamble, M. madgolense Gamble, M. sispa- rense Gamble, Pimpinella pulneyensis Gamble, Schefflera Bourdillonii Gamble, 5. bengalen- sis Gamble, Linociera Parkinsonii Hutchinson, Sarcococca vagans Stapf, Chrysopogon seti- folius Stapf.— E. Mead Wilcox. 504. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decas XCIV. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 403- 407. 1919.— The following species are described as new: Calathodes oxycarpa Sprague, Osbeckia travancorica Bedd., Oldenlandia Bourdillonii Gamble, 0. eualata Gamble, 0. Rama- rowii Gamble, 0. villosostipulata Gamble, 0. wynaadensis Gamble, Ophiorrhiza Barberi Gamble, 0. codyensis, 0. pykarensis Gamble. — E. Mead Wilcox. 505. Anonymous. Diagnoses Africanae: LXXII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 263-267. 1919_ — The following species are described as new: Kalanchoe densiflora Rolfe, Anisophyllaea tomentosa Rolfe, Scyphosyce pandurata Hutchinson, Kniphofia Snowdeni C. H. Wright, Erio- caulon recurvifolium C. H. Wright, Brachiaria nana Stapf, Panicum uvulatum Stapf, P. epacridifolum Stapf, P. bambusiusculum Stapf, Rutenbergia Usagarae H. N. Dixon. — E. Mead Wilcox. 506. Blatter, E., and F. Hallberg. A revision of the Indian species of Rotala and Ammannia. Part II. Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26:210-217. 1918.— Completed from the preceding volume, the second part covering six species of Ammannia; no new names appear. — E. D. Merrill. 507. Briquet, J. Decades plantarum novarum vel minus cognitarum. [Decades of new or little-known plants.] Annuaire Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20: 342-427. 1919.— This is the twenty-sixth of a series and includes the families from Celastraceae to Valeri- anaceae. The new names are: Maytenus pilcomayensis (Paraguay, Rojas 401), M. Hassleri (Paraguay, Hassler, 1342), M. Mathewsii (Peru, Mathews), M. Pavonii (Peru, Pavon 53), M. evonymoides var. Minarum (Brazil, Glaziou 12538, 13665) and var. pycnodonta (Paraguay, Hassler, 7358), M. retusa {Celastrus retusus Poir.), M. durifolia (Peru, Pavon 564), M. Jame- sonii (Ecuador, Jameson 222), M. vexata {M. myrsinoides Urb. not Reissek), M. Trianae {M. buxifolius Tr. & PI. not Griesb.), M. Schottii {M. repanda Reiss. not Turcz.), M. Lorentzii 78 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, (Argentina, Lorentz 1198), M. paraguariensis (Paraguay) var. genuina (Hassler 2564) and var. grandifolia (Rojas 508), M. Fendleri (Venezuela, Fendler 215), M. ebenifolia var. Poeppigii Brazil, Poeppig 3008) and var. Ulei (Brazil, Ule 6084), M. macrocarpa {M. multiflorn Loesen., not Reissek), M. longipes (Colombia, Smith 454), M. laurina (Brazil, Spruce 2284), M. Sprucei (Brazil, Spruce 3970), M. tarapotensis (Peru, Spruce 4329), M. controversa (Brazil, Glaziou 13666), M. Blanchetii (Brazil, Blanchet 3780), Columellia Matheivsii (Peru, Mathews), Clethera Broadwayana (Trinidad, Broadway 2594), C. Schlechtendalii (Mexico, Schiede & Deppe), C. Galeottiana (Mexico, Galeotti 1820), C. confusa (Mexico, Pringle 2425). C. guad- alajarensis (Mexico, Pringle 2502), C. Smithii (Columbia, Smith 2422), C. angustinensis (Venezuela, Funk 163), Callisthene durifolia (Brazil, Claussen), C. Clausseniana (Brazil, Claussen), C. robusta Briq. & Glaz. (Brazil, Glaziou 20679), C. Glazioui (Brazil, Glaziou 20681), C. mucronata (Brazil, Glaziou 20680), C. Hassleri (Paraguay, Hassler 10638), Qualea obtusata (Brazil, Spruce 3341), Vochisia alternifolia Briq. & Galz. (Brazil, Sello), Vochisia Haenkeana var. genuina (Peru, Haenke), var. Sprucei (Spruce 4078) and var. microphylla (Mathews 1650), V. grandis var. Douvillei (Brazil, Douville), V. stenophylla (Brazil, Glaziou 13807), Hypericum connatum var. obscurum (Brazil, Czermak. & Reineck 590), var. para- guariense (Bolivia, Fiebrig. 2361) and var. Fiebrigii (Bolivia, Fiebrig 2361 p. p.), H. cordiforme var. genuinum (Brazil, Guillemin315), var. Hilairei (var. /3 St. Hil.) and var. Glazioui (Brazil, Glaziou 14534), H. Stolzii (Nyassa, Stolz 2223), Hydrangea Schlimii (Columbia, Schlim 1139), H. platyphylla (Colombia, Linden 894), H. Trianae (Columbia, Triana), H. Goudotii (Colombia, Goudot), H. durifolia (Colombia, Funck & Schlim 1393), H. Oerstedii {H. peru- viana Hemsl. not Moric.) H. Preslii (Sarcostyles peruviana Presl not H. peruviana Moric), H. ecuadorensis (Ecudaor, Spruce 5058), H. umbellata (Cornidia umbellata Ruiz. & Pav.), H. Sprucei (Colombia, Spruce 4328), H. mathewsii (Peru, Mathews), H. tarapotensis (Peru, Spruce 4349), Escallonia illinita var. pubicalicina (Argentina, Bade), var. angustifrons (Chile, Bertero 984), var. eu-illinita (E. illinita Presl), E. pycnantha (Chile, Bridges), E. modesta (Chile, Bridges), Hex Merrillii (Philippines, Merrill 881), Eucryphia lucida {Carpo- dontos lucida Labill.), Sollya fusiformis {Billardiera fusiformis Labill.), Turpinia hetero- phylla (Staphylea heterophylla Ruiz. & Pav.), Sorindeia Goudotii (Madagascar, Goudot), Valeriana Bornmuelleri (Brazil, Bornmiiller 198). A correction to page 80 is, Loeflingia Vaucheri Briq. is L. micrantha var. Vaucheri Briq. — A. S. Hitchcock. 508. Camus, Aim:6e. Especes et varietes nouvelles de Graminees de I'Asie Orientale. [New species and varieties of Gramineae from eastern Asia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25:669-672. 1919. — The following varieties, subspecies, and species are described as new: Pollinia phaeotrix Hack. var. genuina, Pollinia phaeotrix Hack. var. aurea, P. phaeotrix Hack. var. tonkinensis, Miscanthus nudipes Hack, subsp. yunnanensis, M. japonicus Anders, var. formosanus, Cymbopogon Martini Stapf var. annamensis, Themeda arguens Hack. var. cochinchinensis, T. ciliata Hack. var. breviaristata, Isachne Eberhardtii, Panicum sarmento- sum Roxb. var. mekongense, Leptochloa filiformis R. & S. var. subuniflora G. & A. Camus, Dendrocalamus sericeus Munro var. latifolius G. & A. Camus, and Arundinaria ciliata. — E. B. Payson. 509. Camus, Aim^e. Note sur le Vetiveria zizanioides Stapf (Graminees). [Note on Vetiveria zizanioides Stapf (Gramineae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 673-674. 1919.— A key is given to the four recognized varieties of Vetiveria zizanioides with notes on distribu- tion and citation of specimens. V. zizanioides Stapf var. tonkinensis is described as new to science. — E. B. Payson. 510. C[orbishley], a. G. Nectaropetalum zuluense. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:449- 450. 10 fig. 1919. — The plant previously known as Erythroxylon zuluense Schonl. is found to be a true species of Nectaropetalum, and so becomes N. zuluense (Schonl.) Corbishley. — E. Mead Wilcox. 511. Coulter, J. M. Cactaceae. [Rev. of: Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. The Cactaceae. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 248. 236 p., 36 pi., 302 fig. 1919.— (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1824:)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 391. 1919. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 79 512. Davidson, Anstruther. [Without title.] Bull. Southern California Acad. Sci. 19: 10-12. 1920. — Linanthus saxiphilus, Draba saxosa and Hutchinsia calif ornica are de- scribed as new. There are also notes on certain species of Lwpinus and Linanthus. — Roxana Stinchfield Ferris. 513. Eberhardt, Ph. Sur une variete indochinoise du Quisqualis indica (Combretacees). [On an Indo-Chinese variety of Quisqualis indica (Combretaceae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 675-676. 1919.— A variety, Quisqualis indica L. var. annamensis, is described as new to science.— -E. B. Payson. 514. Ehinger, M. Odontoglossum Rossii Lindl. Orchis 13 : 33-35. 1919.— Notes on this species and some of its varieties are given with an illustration of the species.— iS. B. PaTjson. 515. Engler, A. Sterculiaceae africanae. VL [Sterculiaceae of Africa. VI.] Bof Jahrb. 55: 350-380. 1919.— A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur Flora von Afrika. XLVII. herausgegeben von A. Engler.," continued from Bet. Jahrb. 45: 339. Three genera, Melhania, Hermannia, and Cola are treated, the main portion of the paper being an extended elaboration of the genus Hermannia. Since K. Schumann's monograph of the African Sterculiaceae in 1900 the explorations in the Transvaal and other portions of South Africa have contributed a vast amount of material. Especially rich in this genus have been the collections of Dinter in Dutch-Southwest-Africa, Range and Schafer in Namaqualand, and Schlechter in the Transvaal and Namaqualand. In 1907 Engler described eleven species. In the present paper, begun in 1918, about forty species are described as new, three of which are proposed by Diels and four by Schlechter. Engler has retained most of Schumann's subgenera as sections but Schumann's subdivision of Euhermannia he could not retain; rather Harvey's groups in this subdivision were found to be more natural though they are here increased to seven. The section Acicarpus has been much elaborated beyond the treatment of Harvey. The systematic subdivisions of Her- mannia have natural geographic ranges. Engler's sections are as follows: (1) Mahrenia, north and east Africa, (2) Euhermannia, center of development southwestern Cape Colony, (3) Scaphiostemon, Damaraland, (4) Acicarpus, Abyssinia to the Transvaal and Namaqua- land, and (5) Mahernia, mainly South Africa. The general distribution of the genus shows it to be very old and long established in its present range. That it dates back to a time when the continents probably had a different configuration than at present is indicated by the occurrence of one endemic species in South Australia and three in Texas and Mexico. Fifty-five species of Hermannia are treated in the paper. The following species, varieties, and combinations are new: Section Mahrenia; H. Uhligii Engl. Massai Steppes. Section Euhermannia; H. glabripetala, Engl, Little Namaqualand; H. cinerascens Engl., Little Nama- qualand; H. Juttae Dinter & Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. melissifolia Engl., S. W. Africa; H. prismatocarpoides Engl., East Cape Colony; H. patellicalyx Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. arida Diels, Southwest Cape Colony; H. memhranifiora Schltr., Southwest Cape Colony; H. myrioclada Diels, Southwest Cape Colony; H. suhsquamulata Engl., Southwest Cape Colony; H. Bachmannii Engl., Southwest Cape Colony; H. minutiflora Engl, Little Nama- qualand to Damaraland; H. macra Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. longiramosa Engl., North Hereroland. Section Scaphiostemon; H. tenuipes Engl., southwest Africa. Section Aciocarpus; H. longicornuta Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. spinulosa Engl., Great Nama- qualand; H. deserticola Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. intricata Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. aspericaulis Dint. & Engl., Little Namaqualand; H. modestus (Ehrenb.) Planch, var. elatiorK. Schum. subvar. virgatissima Engl., Damaraland; subvar. brevicornis Engl., Trans- vaal; subvar. macropetala Engl., Transvaal, Damaraland and Hereroland; subvar. mediipetala Engl., Damaraland; var. tstimebensis Engl., Hereroland; H. Stuhlmannii Engl, East Africa; H. pseudo-Mildbraedii Dint. & Engl., Damaraland; H. sideritifolia Engl., Transvaal; H. Seitziana Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. glandulosissima Engl., Damaraland; H. teitensis Engl., Kilimanjaro; H. tomentosus (Turcz.) Schinz Msc. var. brevifolia Engl., Damaraland; H. Seineri Engl., north Hereroland, and var. latifolia Engl. Section Mahernia; H. sparsipilosa Engl., Transvaal; H. pulchella L. var. picta n. comb., Great Namaqualand; H. bicolor Dint. 80 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, & Engl., Damaraland; H. Wilsmii Engl., Natal; H. hantamensis Engl., Little Namaqualand; H. coccocarpoides Engl., Transvaal; H. collina Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. Meyeri Engl., Little Namaqualand; H. leucantha Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. Vetteri Engl., North Hereroland; H. linnaeopsis Dint. & Engel., Damaraland; H. chloroleuca Diels, north- west Cape Colony; H. Medleyi Engl., Natal; H. Dieterlenii Engl., Highland of southeast Africa; H. Thodei Engl., Highland of southeast Africa. Besides the new species and varie- ties of Hermannia, there are a few others as follows: Melhania Dinteri Engl., North Herero- land; M. ferrugineoides Engl., North Hereroland; Cola subglaucescens Engl., South Kamerun; C. edeensis Engl. & Krause, South Kamerun; and C. Tessmannii Engl. & Krause., forest province of Guinea. — K. M. Wiegand. 516. Engler, a. Guttiferae africanae. III. [Guttiferae of Africa. III.] Bot. Jahrb. 55: 381-396. 1919. — A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur Flora von Afrika. XLVII, herausgegeben von A. Engler," continued from Bot. Jahrb. 45: 339. The tropical African genus Psorospermum Spach is greatly in need of revision. In Oliver's "Flora of Tropical Africa" only four species were described. Besides these, Schweinfurth described one, and Engler three, and C. H. Wright one. In the present paper thirteen new species and two new varieties are proposed as follows: P. Baumannii, Togo, and var. Afzelianum, Sierra Leone; P. Baumii, Kunene-Kubango-Land; P. aurantiacum, Kamerun; P. Staudtii, Kamerun; P. parviflorum, Kamerun; P. Kerstingii, Togo; P. laxiflorum, Togo; P. densipunctatum, Kamerun; P, Mechowii, Angola; P. adamauense, Soudan Park-steppe Province; P. Ledermannii, Soudan Park-steppe Province, and var. Doeringii, Togo; P. glaucum, Soudan Park-steppe Province; P. suffruticosum, Soudan Park-steppe Province. Other new species described are as follows: Haronga scandens, Kamerun; Garcinia Living- stonii T. And. var. pallidinervia, Kondeland; G. Stolzii, north Nyassaland; G. ifl)angensis, Soudan Park-steppe Prov.; G. Chevalieri, French Guinea; G. viridiflava, Kamerun; G. benien- sis, Lower Prov. of Cent. Africa; G. mbulwe, North Nyssaland; G. arbuscula, Kamerun; G. quadrangula, Kamerun; G. tibatensis, Soudan Park-steppe Prov.; G. tenuipes, Kamerun; G. tschapensis, Soudan Park-steppe Prov. ; G. Danckelmanniana, Soudan Park-Steppe Prov. ; G. ndongensis, Kamerun; G. nitidula, Kamerun; G. Buchneri, Angola; Pentadesma Ker- stingii, Soudan Park-steppe Province, and Guinea forest Province. — K. M. Wiegand. 517. Engler, A. Violaceae africanae. IV. Zur Kenntnis der afrikanischen Hybanthus- Arten. [Violaceae of Africa. IV. Toward a knowledge of the African species of Hybanthus.] Bot. Jahrb. 55: 397-400. 1919. — A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur Plora von Afrika, XLVII." A key to the African species is given, and nine species are listed. The new species, combinations, and varieties are: H. enneaspermus (L) F. v. Muell. var. serratus, Transvaal; H. densifolius, southwest Africa; H. Hildcbrondtii, North Somaliland; H. hirtus {Jonidium hirtum KlotzSch); H. hirtus var. Klotzschii, Mozambique, Zanzibar; H. hirtus var. glabrescens, Somaliland, Zanzibar, Mozambique, Katanga; H. Fritzscheanus, Huilla; H. caffer {Jonidium caff rum Sond.); H. caffer var. angustifolius ; H. nyassensis {Jonidium nyassense Engl.); H. capensis {Jonidium capense Roem. & Schult.); H. thymifolius {Jonidium thymifolium Presl). — K. M. Wiegand. 518. FtJCHS, Alfred. Orchis Traunsteineri Saut. Erster Tell. Ber. Naturw. Vereins Schwaben u. Neuburg 42: 3-174. 47 fig. 1919. — The author gives a full account of Orchis Traunsteineri, a member of the Dactylorchis group occurring in Central Europe. He divides this species, as ordinarily understood, into two species, the true 0. Traunsteineri of Sauter and 0. pseudo-Traunsteineri, which he describes as new. Under the second species he dis- tinquishes and describes in detail the following new subspecies: bavaricus, suevicus, gabre- tanus, gennachiensis , Hoeppneri, eifliacus and Koningweenianus . To these subspecies he ascribes a hybrid origin, regarding them as more or less complex crosses between O. Traun- steineri and certain other members of the Dactylorchis group, such as O. incarnatus L. and O. latifolius L. The subspecies suevicus, for example, he expresses by the formula, {Orchis incarnatus + latifolius) + Orchis Traunsteineri; some of his other formulas are even more complicated. In the course of his discussions h'e describes the following new races: 0. incar- m No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 81 natus race trminsteinerifolius and O. maculalus race falcatm. The illustrations depict details of floral structure and especially variations in the form and lobing of the lip. In connec- tion with the various plants described the author calls attention to the distinctive features of their habitats and lists the species, both bryophytes and spermatophytes, which are asso- ciated with them. — A. W. Evans. 519. GuiLLAUMiN, A. Contribution a la Flore de la Nouvelle-Caledonia. [Contribution to the Flora of New Caledonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25:645-652. 1919.— Species are listed with the citation of specimens made by various collectors. Tapeinosperma Pen- nelii is described as a species new to science. — E. B. Payson. 520. Haines, H. H. Indian species of Carissa. Indian Forester 45: 375-388. PI. 17-20, 7 fig. 1919. — Five species of Carissa are known in India, and a botanical description is given of each, with a key for their identification. — E. N. Munns. 521. Hall, Cuthbert. On a new species or form of Eucalyptus. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43:747-749. PI. 75. 1918.— Eucalyptus Marsdeni, forma vel sp. nov. is described in regard to its seedling, juvenile, and mature leaves; inflorescence; fruit; bark (unusual for a Eucalypt, to be classed with the stringy-barks, yet laminated with a sort of ochreous deposit on the outer surface of each layer, branch bark smooth and greyish, a half bark); timber, which is light brown, straight grained, has few gum-veins and works well, resembling E. viminalis in physical characters. The only known tree has been cut. The oil from leaves and terminal branches is thick and viscous, and its characteristics are discussed in detail. — Eloise Gerry. 522. Hansen, W. Die Bestimmungen der echten Graser nach ausseren Merkmalen. [The determination of the true grasses according to their external characters.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 266. 1919.— For the identification of the grasses the writer presents a plan based primarily on the form of the inflorescence. — John W. Roberts. 523. Hassler, E. Bromeliacearum paraguariensium conspectus. [A conspectus of the Bromeliaceae of Paraguay.] Annuaire Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20: 268-341. 2 fi^. 1919.— There is a short introduction, a technical description of the genera and species, and an index. Full notes with synonymy and bilbiography are given. The genera are Bromelia, Acanthostachys, Ananas, Aechmea, Billbergia, Deuterocohnia, Dyckia, Vriesea, Tillandsia. The new names are: Aechmea polystachia var. myriophylla {A. myriophylla Morr.), A. (subg. Platyaechmea) plalyphylla (Santo Thomas, Sierra de Amambay, Hassler 11283 leg. Rojas), A. ampullacea var. typica (Yaguarazapd, Fiebrig 5431) and var. longifolia (Yhii, Hassler 9691), Billbergia magnifica var. acutisepala (Esperanza, Hassler 10726), Deuterocohnia paraguarien- sis (Cerro Margarita, Hassler 11098), Dyckia ferox f. australia (D. ferox Mez), f. vulgaris (Cerro-hu, Hassler 1447 et al), subsp. hamosa {D. hamosaMez), D. commixta (Tobaty, Chod. & Vischer 97), D. microcalyx var. inermis (Villa Rica, Hassler 8787), var. micrantha (Alto Parand, Fiebrig 5941), D. distachya (Fiebrig 5648), f. induta (Fiebrig 5824), D. tobatiensis (Tobaty, Hassler 2099), D. Hassleri f. gracilis (Hassler 1120), var. arenosa (Cerro Cord, Hassler 10500), var. subinermis (Hassler 10500a), subsp. basispina (Esperanza, Hassler 10884), var. montana (Cerro Cord, Hassler 9789), D. vestita (Centurion, Fiebrig 5311), D. Nissionum var. breviflora (San Ignacio, Hassler 142), D. insignis (Centurion, Fiebrig 4615), var. ma- crantha (Centurion, Fiebrig 5310a), var. obtusiflora (Centurion, Fiebrig 5310), Vriesea glu- tinosa var. viridis (Santo Tomas, Hassler 3768), Tillandsia stricta var. paraguariensis (Hass- ler 3286 p.p.), T. streptocarpa var. filifolia (Balansa 615), T. decomposita var. minor (Hassler 3683), T. confxisa (Lake Ypacaray, Hassler 3101), var. saxatilis (Hassler 3416), T. arhiza var. rupestris {T. rupestris Mez), T. bandensis var. intermedia (Santa Elisa, Hassler 2778), T. tricholepis var. argentea (Hassler 8517).— A. S. Hitchcock. 524. HowARTH, W. O. Festuca rubra near Cardiff: a taxonomic morphological, and ana- tomical study of three sub-varieties of Festuca rubra L., subsp. eu-rubra Hack., var. genuina Hack., growing near Cardiff, S. Wales. New Phytol. 18: 263-286. U fig- 1919.— A detailed 82 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, study of the subvarieties grandiflora (Hack.), tenuifolia (new), and a third probably corre- sponding to Hackel's glaucescens. The new subvariety is xerophytic and generally associ- ated with halophytic conditions; fairly densely caespitose; rhizomes short and more or less curved and ascending from the base; leaves slender and dark glaucous green, with a "bloom;" panicle more compact than in grandiflora: internodes rough; spikelets fewer, but the individual glumes large and as numerous as in grandiflora, with shorter awns. — I. F. Lewis. 525. JoRGENSEN, E. Ajuga pyramidalis X reptans. Bergens Mus. Aarb. (Naturh. Raekke) 1917-1918. 4 p. 1918. — At Nygaard Park in Bergen, specimens of Ajuga reptans, rare in Norway, were found with the common A. pyramidalis. Their hybrid was also found. The species and hybrid are described. — A. Gundersen. 526. JoRGENSEN, E. Die Euphrasia-Arten Norwegens. [Euphrasia species of Norway.] Bergens Mus. Aarb. (Naturh. Raekke) 1916-1917: 5-337. 11 maps, 14 tables, 54 fi^., bibliog- raphy. 1919. — Detailed discussion of characters and distribution of Norwegian species. These differ in degree, not in definite characters, representing an almost inextricable jumble answering the Mendelian splitting up of hybrids. Numerous new forms are described; one new species, E. hyperborea. In the usual sense of species there are only two, E. .salis- burgensis, and all other forms taken together. Summary given in English. — A. Gundersen. 527. KoiDztJMi, Geniti. Contributiones ad Floram Asiae Orientalis. [Contributions to the flora of eastern Asia.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 217-223. 1919.— The author describes as new, Lactuca grandicolla, Senecio muninensis, Pyrus Yoshinoi, Salix paludicola, S. Hidewoi, S. tsukoshiana, Cirsium Yoshizawae, Campanula microdonta, with notes on other Japanese plants, and gives as a new combination, Zanthoxylon inerme (Rehd. & Wils.) Koidz. — Roxana Stinchfield Ferris. 528. Lazaro e Ibiza, B. Revision critica de las especies peninsulares del genera Viola. (A critical revision of the peninsular species of the genus Viola.] Revista R. Acad. Cien. Exactas, Fisicas y Nat. [Madrid] 17: 249-280, 391-421. 5 pi. 1919.— The species are divided into 3 groups and 8 sections. The following new species and varieties are described: Viola longifolia, V. palustris var. genuina, V. odorata var. genuina, V . hirta var. genuina, V. biflora var. uniflora, V . canina var. genimia, V. sylvestris var. genuina, V. rupestris var. genuina, V. cornuta var. genuina, V. lactea var. genuina, V. parvula var. genuina, and V. lutea var. genuina.— L. L. Harter. 529. MiETHE, E. Cattleya superba Schomb. Orchis 13 : 10-12. 1919. — This species is here redescribed and illustrated. — E. B. Payson. 530. Pellegrin, FRANgois. Note sur le Banda rouge et sur un Ombega du Gabon. [Con- cerning the red Banda and an Ombega of Gabon.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 653-654. 1919. — Sindora Klaineana Pierre is described as new to science. It is known locally as the red Banda. Ombega is the vernacular term applied to Entandrophragma rufa Chevalier. — E. B. Payson. 531. PoNzo, Antonio. Sul genere Acacia. [The genus Acacia.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 25: 271-307. 1918. — A historical review of the position and limitation of the genus, a critical consideration of the essential and secondary taxonomic characters, and a regrouping and description of the species. The following subdivisions are recognized: (1) Phyllodinae with 29 species, (2) Botryocephalae with 4 species, (3) Pulchellae with one species, and (4) Gumi- ferae with 10 species. — Ernst Artschwager. 532. Prain, D., AND I. H. Burkill. "Dioscorea sativa." Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 339-375. 1919.— After an exhaustive enquiry into the aggregate that Linnaeus included under the name Dioscorea sativa, it is shown that that name is one which can not be used. — E. Mead Wilcox. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 83 533. R., J. K. [Rev. of: Standard Cyclopedia of Horticulture. Vol. VI. S-Z with Supple- ment p. S04S-S639, fig. 3516-4056. Edited by L. H. Bailey. 1917.] Jour. Botany 57: 198-200. 1919. 534. ScHELLENBERG, G. Connaraceae africanae. III. [Connaraceae of Africa. III.] Bot. Jahrb. 55:436-456. 1919. — The paper is made up of the descriptions of new species, and the designation of new combinations found necessary in the preparation of a mono- graph of the famil}' soon to appear in "Das Pfianzenrcich." The new species are: Cnesiis liberica, Liberia; C. Dinklagei, Liberia; C. cinnabar ina, Kamerun; C. longiflora, Lagos; C. leucantha Gilg, Kamerun; C. calantha, Kamerun; C. gabunensis, Gabun; C. Zenkeri, Kamerun; C macrophylla Gilg, Kamerun; Manotes Tessmannii, Gagun; M. Zenkeri Gilg, Nigeria, Kamerun, etc.; M. rosea, Gabun and Kamerun; M. rubiginosa, Angola; M. Soyauxii, Loango; Paxia calophylla Gilg. Kamerun; P. Zenkeri, Kamerun; P. cinnabarina, Kamerun; P. lancea, Kamerun; Byrsocarpus Ledermannii, Kamerun; B. tomentosus, Dutch East Africa, Rodesia, etc.; B. papillosus, Kamerun; Santaloides urophyllum, Kamerun; Jolly- dora glandulosa, Kamerun. New combinations are as follows: Cnestis Mannii {Connarus Mannii Baker); C. pseudoracemosa {Connarus pseudoracemosus Gilg); Roureopsis Thonneri {Rourea Thonneri De Wild.); Spiropetalum Reynoldsii {Connarus Reynoldsii Stapf); Santa- loides gudjuanum {Rourea gudjuana Gilg); S. splendidnm {Rourea splendida Gilg); S. baman- yense {Rourea bamanganense De Wild.). Notes are given on Paxia my riantha (Baill.) Pierre, Byrsocarpus orientalis Baill., B. Poggeanus (Gilg) Schellenb., and B. maximus Bak. — K. M. Wiegand. 535. ScHELLENBERG. G. Ucber die Connaraceen-Gattung Jaundea Gilg. [On the genus Jaundea Gilg of the family Connaraceae.] Bot. Jahrb. 55: 457-463. 1919.— Gilg described in 1895 a genus Jaundea based on a plant which he named J. Zenkeri collected by Zenker near the station Jaunde in Kamerun. The new genus was included in Natur. Pflanzenfam. where in one place it was spelled Yaundea, an unjustifiable spelling of the word. Gilg admitted later that he was deceived by the young inflorescence and the position of the anthers in the Zenker material, and that his name should be a syrtbnym of Rourea pseudo- baccata. Later Schellenberg in his inaugural dissertation made Jaundea a section of Byrsocarpus; but he now recognizes it as a genus containing the original plant of Gilg, but having different characters and limits. As thus understood it contains a portion of the species originally ascribed by Schellenberg to Jaundea as a section of Byrsocarpus. The unimportance of certain biological characters from a taxonomic point of view is discussed, as for instance the appearance of the flowers with or after the leaves. The nervation of the leaf and the type of inflorescence are important in separating Jaundea and Byrsocarpus. A diagnosis of the genus is given and the characters which separate it from Byrsocarpus are tabulated. The species and forms included are as follows: Jaundea Baumannii {Rourea Baumannii Gilg); J. congolana; J. Leskrauwaetii {Rourea Leskrauwaetii De Wild.); J. monti- cola {Rourea motiticola Gilg); J. Oddoni {Rourea Oddoni De Wild.); /. pseudobaccata {Rourea pseudobaccata Gilg); /. pubescens {Connarus pubescens Baker); J. pubescens iorma, glabrala. — K. M. Wiegand. 536. Schlechter, R. Die Gattung Cochlioda Ldl. [The Genus Cochlioda Ldl.] Orchis 13: 3-10. 1919.— (Concluded.) An extensive generic description is followed by a key to the five recognized species of Cochlioda. Specific descriptions, synonomy, and the citation of specimens are included. Symphyglossum is described as a genus new to science, and to it are assigned the following species: S. sanguineum {Mesospinidium sanguineum Rchb. f.) and S. strictum {Cochlioda stricta Cosn.). — E. B. Payson. 537. Schlechter, R. Noch eimnal iiber Epidendrum pentotis Rchb. f. und Epidendrum Beyrodtianum Schltr. [Again concerning Epidendrum pentotis Rchb. f. and Epidendrum Beyrodtianum Schltr.] Orchis 13: 27-29. 1919.— The difference between these two similar species is reiterated, and drawings are presented to show the floral structure of E. pentotis Rchb. i.—E. B. Payson. 84 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII^ 538. ScHLECHTER, R. Onciditim X BurgeflSanum Schltr., eine interessante neue Kreu- zung. [Onciditim X Burgeffianum Schltr., an interesting new hybrid.] Orchis 13:29-30. 1919. — This hybrid has for its parents Oncidium Marshallianum Ldl. and 0. varicosum Ldl. — E. B. Payson. 539. ScHLECHTER, R. Vandanthe Tatzeri Schltr. n. hybr. Orchis 13:52-53. 1919.— A hybrid between Vanda tricolor Ldl. and Euanthe Sanderiana (Rchb. f.) Schltr. is described and illustrated. — E. B. Payson. 540. ScHLECHTER, R. Ein seltenes Grammatophyllum. [A rare Gramma tophyllum.] Orchis 13 : 54-55. 1919. — Grammatophyllum papuanum J. J. Smith is described and illustrated. — E. B. Payson. 541. ScHLECHTER, R. Die Gattung Brassavola R. Br. [The Genus Brassavola R. Br.] Orchis 13 : 40-46, 58-62, 71-79. 1919. — The genus Brassavola is described, and an outline of its taxonomic history given with notes as to its geographical distribution. The sections Eubrassavola, Prionoglossum, Conchoglossum and Cuneilabium are proposed and under each section are listed their species with descriptions and synonomy. The following new species are described and new combinations made: B. multiflora, B. nodosa Lindl. var. rhopalor- rhachis {B. rhopalorrhachis Rchb. f.), B. scaposa. — E. B. Payson. 542. Sedgwick, L. J. The Cyperaceae of the Bombay Presidency, Part II. Jour. Bom- bay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 192-209. 1918. — A general systematic consideration with keys and descriptions of the genera and species, covering the genera Courtoisia, Fimhristylis, Steno- phyllus, Eleocharis, Scirpus, Eriophorum, Fuirena, Lipocarpha, Remirea, Rhyncospora, Hypolytrum, Scleria, Carex. The first part was published in the preceding volume. No new names appear. — E. D. Merrill. 543. Sedgwick, L. J. Reduction of Euphorbia Rothiana Sprengel, of the Indian floras. Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 599-600. 1919. — The above Indian species, as hitherto interpreted, is referred in part to Euphorbia laeta Roth and in part to E. oreophila Miq. — E. D. Merrill. 544. Sedgwick, L. J. On the species of Zizyphus in the Bombay Presidency. Indian Forester 45: 67-74. 1919. — Critical notes on seven species of Zizyphus occurring in India are given, with characteristics for field identification and distribution. Two forms of Z. Oenoplia Mill, are distinguished as forma robusta and forma mollis. Z. Xylopyrus Willd. var. glaber- rima is tentatively proposed as a new variety. The suggestion is made that Z. Xylopyrus Willd. var. micocarpa may be a hybrid between Z. Jujuba and Z. Xylopyrus. — E. N. Munns, 545. Shreve, Forrest. Monograph of the Cactaceae. [Rev. of: Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. The Cactaceae; descriptions and illustrations of plants of the cactus family. Vol. I. Carnegie Inst. [Washington] Publ. 248. 1919.] Plant World 22: 270-271. 1919. 546. Sprague, T. A. Dolichandrone and Markhamia. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:302- 314. 1919. — These bignoniaceous genera are contrasted, and under each genus are listed the species attributed to it. Detailed synonomy together with distributional and ecological notes is included for the various species. The following new combinations and new variety occur: Dolichandrone atrovirens (Bignonia atrovirens Heyne), D. alba (Spathodea alba Sim.), Markhamia stipulata Seem. var. Kerrii, M. obtusifolia (Dolichandrone obtusifolia Baker). — E. Mead Wilcox. 547. Staff, O. Gunnera manicata and brasiliensis. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 376-378. 1919. — Gunnera brasiliensis Schindler is considered synonymous with G. manicata Lindl. — E. Mead Wilcox. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 85 548. Staff, Otto. Gramineae. Flora of Tropical Africa 9<: 577-768. 1920.— This part continues the Paniceae as far as Setaria. The new genera, species and varieties in this part are as follows: Paspaliditun (new genus) geminatum {Panicum geminatum Forsk.), P. deser to- rum (Pantcum desertorum A. Rich.), Urochloa bifalcigera (Panicum bifalcigerum Stapf), U. trichopus (Panicum trichopus Hochst.), U. pullulans (Panicum geminatum Schweinf. not Forsk.), U. pullulans var. (?) mosambicensis (Panicum mosambicense Hack.), U. brachyura (Panicum brachyurum Hack.), U. bolbodes (Helopus bolbodes Steud.), U. echinolaenoides , U. Helopus (Panicum Helopus Trin.), U. javanica (Panicum javanicum Poir.), U. rudis, U. setigera (Panicum setigerum Retz.), U. insculpta (Panicum insculptum Steud.), U. rep- tans [P. reptans L.). Echinochloa obtusiflora, E. Holubii (Panicum Holubii St&Tpf.), E. hap- loclada (Panicum haplocladum Stapf), E. jubata, Acroceras (new genus) oryzoides (Panicum oryzoides Sw.), A. macrum, A. amplectens, A. basicladum, Commelinidium (new genus) may- umbense (Panicum mayumbense Franch.), C. gabunense (Panicum gabunense Hack.), C. ner- vosum, Panicum flacciflorum, P. transvenulosum, P. spongiosum, P. ianthum, P. juncifo- lium, P. carinifolium, P. fulgens, P. nervatum (Isachne nervata Franch.), P. pubiglume, P. plagianthum, P. sublaetum (P. laetum Stapf, not Kunth), P. viciniflorum, P. filicaule, P. Hanningtonii, P. phragmitoides, P. poaeoides, P. graniflorum, P. vagiflorum, P. poecilan- thum, P. aphanoneurum, P. Rowlandii, P. genuflexum, P. paucinode, P. manicatum, P. sociale, P. novemnerve, P. arcurameum, P. subflabellatum, P. longijubatum, P. pectinellum, P. cal- vum, P. subobliquum, P. caudiglume [not Hack. 1901], P. microthyrsum, Entolasia (new genus) imbricata, E. olivacea, Hemigjminia (new genus) Arnottiana (Panicum Arnottianum Nees), Cyrtococcum (new genus) setigerum (Panicum setigerum Beauv.), Sacciolepis ciliocincta, (Panicum ciliocinctum Pilg.), S. cingularis, S. nana, S. Chevalieri, S. brevifolia, S. huillensis (Pancium huillense Rendle), S. spiciformis (Panicum spiciforme Hochst.), S. interrupta (Panicum interruptum Willd.), S. cymbiandra, S. scirpioides, S. glaucescens, S. typhura (Panicum typhurum Stapf), S. incurva, S. transbarbata, S. auriculata. S. angusta (Panicum angustum Trin.), S. leptorrhachis, S. seslerioides (Panicum seslerioides Rendle), S. catumben- sis (Panicum catumbense Rendle), S. albida. — A. S. Hitchcock. 549. Stuckert, T. Contributions a la connaissance de la flora Argentine. [Contribu- tions to the knowledge of the flora of Argentina.] Annuaire Conservatorre et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20 : 428-464. 1919.— This consists of two parts. The first part is. III. Enumeration des Valerianacees de V Argentine by Stuckert and Briquet. The new names by Briquet are, Valeriana sarscphylla (Stuckert 7622a), V. effusav&r. genuina (Stuckert 1037 and others), var. Fiebrigii (Bolivia, Fiebrig 2196), V. approximata (Tucuman, Stuckert 22022), V. Gil- liesii (Betckea Gilliesii Hook. & Arn.), V. glomerulosa (Tucuman, Stuckert 7637), V. Stuck- ertii (Stuckert 2749 and others). The second part is, IV. Catalogue des Oxalidacees de I' Ar- gentine by Stuckert. Oxalis andicola var. Wallichiana (0. andicola var. calyce glabriusculo Hook.) is a new variety. There is an annotated list with bibliography of 82 species of Oxalis and 3 species of Hypseocharis. — A. S. Hitchcock. 550. Tatzer, a. Vanda X Mariannae, eine Kreuzung zwischen Vanda tricolor Lindl. und Vanda Denisoniana Rchb. f. [Vanda X Mariannae, a hybrid between Vanda tricolor Lindl. and Vanda Denisoniana Rchb. f.] Orchis 13:50-51. 1919.— This hybrid is here de- scribed and illustrated. — E. B. Payson. 551. TuRRiLL, W. B. A revision of the genus Mendoncia. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 407-424. 1919.— This Central and South American genus is contrasted with related genera of the Acanthaceae by means of a dichotomous key. Twenty-five species are recognized, and under each is given an extended Latin diagnosis with citation of exsiccatae. A key to the species is also provided. The following species and varieties are described as new and the following new combinations made: Mendoncia Spraguei, M. Tonduzii, M. coccinea Veil. var. sparatteria (M. Velloziana Nees var. sparatteria Nees), M. coccinea var. elliptica, M. gracilis, M. orbicularis, M. retusa. — E. B. Payson. 86 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS [BoT. Absts., Vol. Vll, MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS Burton E. Livingston, Editor 552. Anonymous. Microscoptical optics. [From a paper by A. E. Conradt at a dis- cussion on the microscope at the Royal Society on Jan. 14.] Nature 104: 548-550. 1920. 553. Anonymous. Peat fiber and the textile industry. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13 : 350. 1920. 554. Anonymous. [Rev. of : Alcock, W. Broughton. Canvas destroying fungi. Journ. Roy. Army Med. Corps 32«. Dec, 1919.] Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23:41. 1920.— Researches in Malta and Italy show that the rotting of canvas is due to various fungi, but chiefly to species of Macrosporium and Stemphylium. — E. A. Bessey. 555. Barnard, J. E. Construction and use of miscroscopes. Nature 104:546-548. 1920. — Opening paper of a discussion on the microscope at the Royal Society on Jan. 14. Most microscopes are unstable. An object on the stage will not maintain its centration if the instrument is put into the horizontal. Imperfections in mechanical stages are gen- eral. Resolution, not magnification, is the primary function of an objective. No indica- tion that numerical aperture will be further increased, but advances in illumination, espe- cially by use of ultra-violet or perhaps still shorter radiations, may be hoped for. (See also Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 3033.)— 0. A. Stevens. 556. Brown, A. M. Faults found in butter. Their definitions, causes and some sug- gested remedies for same. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:490-494, 591-595. 1920. — Author discusses relation of certain bad characters found in butter to bacteria and fungi causing them. — L. R. Waldron. 557. Deelen, H. Peat fiber spinning. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13 : 452. 1920. — German patent 316,511 covers the preparation from peat of fibers suitable for use with wool, cotton, or jute. — G. B. Rigg. 558. DuGGAR, B. M. Some factors in research. Plant World 22:277-289. 1919.— A paper contributed to a symposium on the general topic "Our present duty as botanists," in Baltimore, 1918. Various factors are discussed, such as the establishment of research posi- tions in connection with industrial enterprises, extension of opportunities to use special apparatus during vacation periods, conferences of groups of investigators interested in related problems, fostering post-doctorate and sabbatical-leave research, co-operation in publication and other activities, etc. It closes with a plea for better preparation, particularly in chemis- try, for botanical research. — Charles A. Shull. 559. Fischer, Herman. Der Nahrstoffgehalt unserer Gewasser und seine Ausniitzung fiir die Urproduktion. [The nutrient content of our waters and its use as an original productive factor.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 66-83. 1920. — Agriculture has received too little study in the past when compared with its relative economic importance. The author discusses previous studies in this field, and dwells particularly on the relation of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potassium as found in fresh and salt waters to aquatic life, vegetative and piscatorial. Nitrogen and P2O5 are similar in salt and fresh water. In rivers, lakes, and other small natural bodies, the quantity of nutrients, especially of P3O5 is greatly influenced by the character of the soil surface, quantity of precipitation, etc. The humus coloring of water is a direct indication of the P2O6 content; and in general, all waters of limestone formations contain little, those over sandstone plentiful P2O5. Although further experimentation is necessary, it is believed that increased P2O0 content in natural waters can be used in securing greater fish production; also, as the floor decreases in nitrog- enous compounds, an increase in nitrogen is necessary to keep up production. The rela- No. 1, February, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 87 tion of potassium in natural waters varies inversely as that of P2O5. Lime plays an impor- tant role indirectly in increasing the content of the other three nutrients, by replacing them in chemical reactions and releasing them for use as solutes. The article contains 2 tables giving analyses of waters, both basic and acidic, of inland lakes and tributaries. — J. Roeser. 560. MacInnes, L. T., and H. H. Randell. Dairy produce factory premises and manu- facturing processes. The application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 5G3-566. 9 fig. 1920.— In this fourth and last installment under this title the authors make an agar plate examination of dairy produce, its containers, and the environment in a modern and finely constructed dairy plant. Results are in striking contrast to those found in other plants in which less attention had been paid to sanitary conditions. In a plant such as this, pasteurization results are not discounted by insanitation. — L. R. Waldron. 561. MacInnes, L. T., and H. H. Randell. Dairy produce factory premises and manu- facturing processes. The application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 485-489. 7 fig. 1920.— This article gives in some detail the results of bacterial and fungal counts, qualitative and quantitative, of samples taken at different stages of manufacture of dairy products, of their containers, and of the general environment found in one factory. The conclusion to be drawn is that lack of scientific sanitary manage- ment and control is responsible for much financial loss and probable injury to health. — L. R. Waldron. 562. Rader, F. E. Report of the work at Matanuska station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:81-84. 1 pi. 1919.— Reports on preliminary work, including the clearing of the land. — /. P. Anderson. 563. Saunders, Charles Francis. Useful wild plants of the United States and Canada. £75 p., 16 pi., 7Jt fig. Robert M. McBride & Co. : New York, 1920.— A popular treatise deal- ing with native plants, especially those useful for food, but also considering those that are used for beverages, for soap substitutes, and for medicine, besides mentioning certain poison- ous plants. The book is written in an attractive style, and the information it contains is selected with care. — C. F. Piper. 564. Stoll, Frank. [Rev. of: Pellett, Frank C. American honey plants. 297 p., 155 fig. American Bee Journal, Hamilton, 111. 1920.] Torreya 20:104. 1920.— The book describes as valuable because of nectar or pollen production some 900 species, arranged alpha- betically by common names, with Latin names accompanying the vernacular. The book is timely on account of the present sugar shortage. — J. C. Nelson. 565. Wallis, T. E. Analytical microscopy. Pharm. Jour. 104:247-249, 349-351, 395- 397, 541-542, 578-579; Idem. 105: 159-160, 283-284. 1920. INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing after January 1, 1919. As an adequate index of progress. Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower, field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili- ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to every one interested in plants. The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants, throughout the world. The services of all the botanical workers who are connected with Botan- ical Abstracts in any way, are given without any compensation except the satisfaction of par- ticipation in such a great cooperation toward the advancement of science. It is hoped that all students of plants will feel that Botanical Abstracts is their journal. Although the physical exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of prepar- ing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication, yet this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of other countries than the United States and Canada. JMany collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries, but the aim has not been to distribute the actual work throughout the world; rather has it seemed best to distribute the work so as to give prompt and efficient service, without reference to the particular countries in which the workers reside. It is physically necessary that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are available to all. The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication. The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies, as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa- tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning January 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page, the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923; the second member in each group is to serve till January 1, 1921. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection. The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1920 is Donald Reddick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the Foard of Control. Assistant Editors are appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections, with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature. They also supply abbreviated titles for the author index of each volume and subject-index entries (for the occasional subject indexes) pertaining to their respective sections. The Editor- in-Chief, with the help of the Associate Editor-in-Chief and with the approval of the Board of Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the final compilations of the author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for Sections. The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record, through a S3'^stem of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract- ing for each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of which a record of the state of ab- stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi- cations that are not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of the Committee for 1920 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Collaborators of Botanical Abstracts. A large number of botanical workers in all parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibilitj' for securing citations and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography Committee. This corps of voluntar}^ workers (called Collaborators) really constitute the basis of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain that all serial publications ar§ promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is published in each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi- tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited. Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts them- selves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepared it, but entries by citation alone are not signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. A list of Abstractors is pub- lished for each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It includes many names of voluntary contributors to the enterprise, besides those of the Collaborators. The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers, according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning subscriptions should be addressed to the Publishers or their agents; other matters should be referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com- mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief. Readers of Botanical. Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor- in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda with each volume. These notes should be on sheets about 22 X 28 cm. (S^ X H inches). Botanical Abstracts is published monthly. Each volume contains about 300 pages. No claims are nllowedfor copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received within 30 days (90 days for places oUtside of the United States and Canada) of the date of issue. Price per volume, net, postpaid: .13.00, United States and dependencies; .?3.12, Canada; $3.25, other countries. Subscriptions are in order for Volumes VII and VIII. Back vol- umes. Volumes III to VI, inclusive, can be supplied. Volumes I and II are out of print. Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries: United States of North America and dependencies ; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore. Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires. Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne. Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles. The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: The Cambridge University Press, C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers are requested to make checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London address. Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto. Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn. France: Emile Bougault, 48 Rue des Ecoles, Paris. Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6. Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam. Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano. Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16 Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan. Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid. Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bfile. Vol. VII MARCH, 1921 No. 2 ENTRIES 566-1527 BOTANICAL Abstracts \ monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sRnse PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL (The Executive Committee for 19SJ are indicated by asterisks) American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. -R. A. Harpkr, Columbia University, New York City. B. E. Livingston. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Glkason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. Davis. Botanical Society of America, Physiology Section. Otis F. Cuhtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. *B. M. DuGOAR, Chairman of the Board. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. Marshall .\. Howk, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. A. Barnhart. Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. Kauffman, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. BntrcR Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris. Ecological Society of America. H. L. ScHANTZ, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. * Forrest Shreve. Paleontological Society of America. Arthur Hallick, 61 Wall Street, New Brighten, New York. E. W. Berry. American Society of Agronomy. ('. H. Hutchison, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. A. MOOERS. Society for Horticultural Science. V. R. Gard.n'kk, University of Missouri, Columbu.s, Missouri. E. J. Kraus. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. JovES. University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. * Donald Reddick. Society of American Foresters. Rmmiakl Zox, U. S. Forest Service, Wash- ington, D. C. J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heuer W. Youn(;kk.v, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W. P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. DicKsov, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. At large. W. A. Orton. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY BALTIMORE, TJ. S. A. Entered ae Becond-claES matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of March 3, 1879 Copyright 1921, Williams & Wilkins Company $3.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba "a countries Price, net postpaid, per volume ("$3.00, United < S3. 12, Canad£ { $3.25, Other c CONTENTS Agronomy , 566- 684 Bibliography, Biography and History 685- 710 Botanical Education 711- 718 Cytology .^ 719- 739 Forest Botany and Forestry .' 740- 838 Genetics 839- 943 Horticulture 944-1047 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 1048-1077 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 1078-1096 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 1097-1124 Pathology 1125-1275 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy 1276-1289 Physiology 1290-1385 Soil Science 1386-1420 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 1421-1498 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 1499-1527 BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920 AND ASSISTANT EDITORS Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston . The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore Associate, Lon A. Hawkins U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D.C Bibliography, Biography and History. NeilE. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.— Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin, Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois.— Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botanv and Forestry. Raphael Zon. U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, J. V. HOFMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex- periment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn- sylvania. Horticulture. J. H. Gourlet, West Virgmia Univer- sity, Morgantown, West Virginia. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan- town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University. Balti- more, Maryland. — Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre- lease, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E.N. Tbanseau. Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandbb W. Evans. Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. — Assistant Editor, Carlos E. Chardon, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East LanB- ing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. H ebeb W . Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science.Philadelphia.Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor, E. N. Gathebcoal, 701 South Wood St., Chicago^' Illinois. _ _ ^ Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, .■ St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant EditorJ F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash'^ ington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-^ souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.—^ Assistant Editor, E. B. Patson, Missouri BotanicalJ Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920 J. R. ScHBAMM, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BucKMAN L. Knudson W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgombbt A. J. Eames D. Reddick R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M.Wjeqand R. HOSMFB JUST PUBLISHED DICTIONARY OF BOTANICAL EQUIVALENTS FRENCH-ENGLISH GERMAN-ENGLISH BY ERNST ARTSCHWAGER, Ph.D. Instructor in Plant Physiology at Cornell University AND EDWINA M. SMILEY, M.A. Instructor in Plant Pathology A practical hand-book, intended for the graduate student'and investigator. Of special use to readers of foreign botanical literature, who feel the need of an accurate translation of technical terms not commonly found in our dictionaries. Only terms of French and German derivation are included. Terms cf Latin 'or Greek origin have been introduced only when their meaning was not clear. Whenever possible, the special meaning of each term has been explained if no equivalent in the other language exists. The list of plant names includes important economic plants, farm weeds, and the Latin equivalents for the larger plant groups. Interleaved with blank pages to make it [possible for owners of the volume to record any terms and names not given, ORDER FROM WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY Publishers of Scientific Journals and Books BALTIMORE, U. S. A. ORDER FORM Williams & Wilkins Company Baltimore, Maryland, U. S. A. FleaFC send copy(ies) of Dictionary of Hotanical Equivalents. Remittance for $2.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $2.15, Carada; $2.25, other countries, is enclosed to cover, (or) Remittance will be made on receipt of your statement, (or) Remittance will be made about 1921. Name (Please state whether Dr., Prof., Librarian, Director, etc.) Address. LaMotte Standards GUARANTEED Section 1. — Standardized Indicator dyes. Covering a wide range of H-ion con- centration. Supplied in dry form and in sterile stock solutions. Each indicator is standardized in strict accordance with the specifications of Clark & Lubs. f Jr. Bact., Vol. II, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 1917.) Common Name Color Change Ph Value Thymol Blue (acid range) red-yellow 1.2-2.8 ilethyl Orange red-vellow 2.9-4.0 Bromphenol Blue yellow-blue 3.0-4.6 Resorcin Blue pink-blue 4.0-7.2 Methyl Red red-yellow 4.4-€.0 Bromcresol Purple yellow-purple fi.2-6.8 Litmus (special) red-blue 5.5-8.9 Bromthvmol Blue vellow-blue 6.0-7.6 Phenol-Red yellow-red 6.8-8.4 Cresol Red yellow-red 7.2-8.8 Thvmol Blue (alkaline range) vellow-blue 8.0-9.6 Cresol-phthalein colorless-red 8.2-9.8 Pheiiol-phthalein colorless-red 8.4-9.2 Section 2-B. — Specially prepared and standardized Buffer salts and solutions. Buffer mixtures may be obtained in series covering any particular range of H-ion concentration from Ph 1.0 to 10.0. Standardized Buffer Solutions (M/5) Potassium Phosphate Potassium Phthalate Sodium Hydroxide (COj free) Potassium Chloride Hydrochloric .\oid Di-Sodium Phosphate, 2HjO A large number of general synthetic and purified compounds are manufactured by us and information concerning them may be obtained by addressing LA MOTTE CHEMICAL PRODUCTS CO. "Standardis Department" 13 W. Saratoga St. Baltimore, Md. GENETICS A Periodical Record of Investigations Bearing on Heredity and Investigation ISSUED BIMONTHLY EDITORIAL BOARD Gkoroe H. Shvll, Managing Editor Princeton University WiLLi.^M E. C.\STLK Edwin G. CoNKLiN Ch.vrles B. D.wenport Bradley M. Davis Harvard University Princeton University Carnegie Institution of Washington University of Michigan Edward M. E.\ST Rollins A. Emerson Herbert S. Jennings Harvard University Cornell University Johns Hopkins University Thomas H. Mobgan Ratmond Pearl Columbia University Johns Hopkins University Prices, net postpaid: Current Volume, Volume VI, $6.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; S6.25, Canada; S6.50, other countries The Back Volumes are available. Price, net postpaid, Volumes I-V, inclusive: S35.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $36.25, Canada; S37.50, other countries Order from Williams and Wilkiiis Company ri'BLISHEKS OF SCIENTIFIC JOl'KNAI^ AND BOOKS Baltimore, Maryland, U. S. A, SOIL SCIENCE ESTABLIBHCD BT RUTGERS COLLEGE JACOB G. LIPMAN, Editor-in-Chief CARL R. WOODWARD, AssiarANT Editob IN CONSULTATION WITH OB. ». i. ALWAT DB. H. f. CONN DB. C. B. LIPMAN PBOF. Q. BOBBI DB. C. BAHTHEL DB. H. VON FEILITZEN DR. P. l6hNI8 DR. E. J. RCBBELL DR. M. W. BEIJERINCK DR E B FRED ^^- "'^ '- '•^O'* "B. O, 8CHBEINEB PROF. A. W. BLAIR -„' ' o„eto-SMITH "'*• =• ''• M1T8CHERLICH DR. A. A. F. DE 8I0MOND DR. P. E. BROWN uni^' J oiuiiQ PROF. C. A. MOOBBa PROF. CHAS. E. THORNB DIRECTOR H. B. CHBIBTEN8EN ^^- ^- ^- HARTWELL pB. THEO. BEMT DB. N. TULAIKOFF Soil Science is devoted to the broader outlook of the entire field of soil fertility. Articles dealing with the more important facts, observations, deductions and problems of soil biology, soil chemistry, and soil physics are published. Papers devoted to plant physiology, agronomy, bacteriology, or geology, are accepted for publication if they contribute directly to the knowledge of soil fertility. The study of the mineral and organic constituents of soils, soil gases, soil water as a sol- vent of soil material, soil colloids, the transformation of commercial plant foods in soils, questions that deal with the fundamental facts of soil fertility and productivity, are given due consideration. The phenomena concerning soil micro-organisms, such as bacteria, molds, protozoa, and algae, receive careful attention. SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FOR SOIL SCIENCE Issued Monthly. Two Volumes (500 pages to a volume) a Year. Current Volumes, Volumes XI and XII: JIO.OO. United States, Mexico, Cuba; $10..50, Canada; $11.00, other countries Back Volumes, I to XI, inclusive: $.'50.00, United .States, Mexico, Cuba; $.52. .50, Canada; $.55.00, other countries. Prices are net, postpaid. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore, Md., U. 8. A. Please enter a subscription for Soil Science. Kindly begin subscription with the current volume, and forward numbers as issued. Remittance for $10 O0.($10.50, Canada; $11.00. other countries) is enclosed to cover two volumes. Name . . . Address. "21 Abstracts of Bacteriology ''°'"'"' " Compriting complete revieto* and abstracts of American and foreign work in Bacteriology, Mycology and Protozoology in their relation to the arte and sciences Under the editorial direction of the SociBTY OF American Bacterioloqists Editor A. PARKER KITCHENS Published Monthly. One volume a year at present. About 500 pages to a volume Price, net postpaid: $5.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $5.25, Canada; $5.50, other countries Subscriptions are received for the volume only. Single copies are not sold Back Volumes, Vols. I-IV, incl. Price, not postpaid: $24.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $25.00, Canada; $26.00, other countries Subscription Order for the Abstracts of Bacteriology WiLLIAtia & WiLKINB CoMPANT Mount Rotal and GunJOBO Avenues, — — '"•• Baltiuork, Md., U. S. a. Vg I enclose { jg ^ liinieS^^^^^ \ ''"" •"O80"Pt'°" *<» ^^^ present volume of Abbtbacts or Bactbbioloqt. (Please state whether Dr., Prof., etc.) We Name. Address . 90 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 576. Anonymous. A seleccao da semente no arroz. [Selection of seed rice.] Bol. Agric. Nova Goa [Portuguese East India] 1 : 19-22. 1919. — General directions for selecting seed rice; also notes on seed treatment with hot water, copper solutions, or a mixture of ashes and water. — John A. Stevenson. 577. B., W. W. Tropical control of Australian rainfall. [Rev. of: Quatle, E. T., in bul- letin No. 15 of the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology.] Nature 105: 152-153. 1920. 578. Anonymous. History of the Danish crop guarantee. Seed World 7^^ : 19-20. 1920. 579. Anonymous. Danish methods of seed production. Seed World 7^: 20-21. 1920. 580. Anonymous. El algodon. [Cotton.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7: 451-457. 1920. — A popular discussion of cotton culture in Mexico. — John A. Stevenson. 581. Anonymous. Selection of canes for planting. Australian Sugar Jour. 12:382- 1920. — A system of growing sugar cane for seed purposes has been started at the Kairi Experiment Station, on the Atherton Tableland. This has been done in an endeavor to preserve the high quality and heavy tonnage of the Badila sugar cane, the Rose Bamboo, Meera, and other of the older varieties of cane. — C. Rumhold. 582. Atkinson, A., and E. W. Joseph. Sixth annual report of the Montana Grain Inspec- tion Laboratory. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 135. 22 j)., 7 fig. 1920.— The bulletin gives the results of the seed testing and seed inspection work for the year ending June 30, lU^.—H. E. Morris. 583. Atkinson, Alfred, J. B. Nelson, C. N. Arnett, W. E. Joseph, and O. Tretsven. Growing and feeding sunflowers in Montana. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 131 : 3-39. 4 fig. 1919. — The bulletin presents, in the first, part a brief discussion and history of the cul- tivated sunflower (Helianthus annuus) and gives the results of tests on yields and methods of growing and feeding sunflowers, as applied to Montana. The second part of the bulletin, pages 13-29, discusses the use of sunflowers as a silage crop. — H. E. Morris. 584. Atkinson, E. H. Weeds and their identification. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 299-301. PI. I. 1920. — Lantana camara L. is described. It has been present in New Zea- land for twenty-five years, but still seems to be confined to one rather small section. The fruit is reported to have made children sick, but it is not believed to be injurious to live stock. — A'. J. Giddings. 585. Baird, W. p. Corn experiments at the Judith Basin substation. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 132:3-24. 9 fig. 1919.— The bulletin reports experiments in growing corn in rotation and by different tillage methods. No varieties have been found that can be depended on to mature a grain crop, but a good quality of fodder corn is produced. Yields of corn were larger than those of alfalfa, brome grass, or red clover. Yields of oats, spring wheat, and barley have in all cases been higher after corn, and have averaged about the same yields as when these crops were grown on summer-fallowed land. — H. E. Morris. 586. Barber, C. H. The growth of the sugar cane. On tillering. Internat. Sugar Journal 22:495-498. 1920.— Tillering, the inherent branching capacity of the cane, differs a good deal according to the variety and especially the group of cane grown. There are a number of factors which limit the power of a cane variety to produce its full yield. The external influences are light available, moisture in the soil, character of the soil, and amount of manure applied. As a general rule in cultivated canes, thickness and tillering-power are inversely related. The inherent character of the groups, of course, must not be neglected. — E. Koch. No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 91 587. Barber, C. A. Millets for fodder on sugar estates, I. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22 : 613- 616. 1 pi. 1920. — A description and short history of sorghum (Andropogon Sorghum) is given. Some of the characteristics and methods of cultivation in India are described. — C. Rumbold. 588. Barber, C. A. Agricultural notes on extending the milling season. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 611-612. 1920. — The author describes the methods used for lengthening the sugar-cane milling season. The use of nitrogenous fertilizers, of ratoons, and of splitting up old stools into two or three parts and replanting the pieces are discussed. Much has been done by the suitable selection of early and late varieties. — C. Rumbold. 589. Barber, C. H. The growth of the sugar cane. X. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 548- 551. 2 pi., 4 fig- 1920. — This article concludes and summarizes a series of ten preceding papers on the growth of the sugar cane. Other interpretations are made of the large series of measurements of the canes. With examples and diagrams, it is shown how conditions prevailing during the growing season leave their marks on the size and form of the cane and its appendages. — E. Koch. 590. Barfusz, J. Von der emte, sortierung und aufbewahrung der winterkartofifeln. [Harvesting, sorting and storing winter potatoes.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 516-517. 1920. — Directions for harvesting, sorting, and storing potatoes under different conditions. — A. J. Pieters. 591. Barthe, A. E. La higuerilla. [The castor bean.] Agric. Mexicano y Hogar 36: 118-120, 124-129, 148-150. 1920. 592. Bartlett, H. Farmers' experiment plats. Potato experiments, 1919-20. New England district. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:692-694. 1920.— Variety trials of potatoes are given and results from mineral fertilizers. Application of superphosphate was economically eflScient. — L. R. Waldron. 593. Bisbt, G. R., and A. G. Tolaas. The use of Bordeaux mixture for spraying potatoes. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 192: 1-31. 4 fig. 19-20.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1219. 594. BoviNG, P. A. Valuation of farm crops. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 120- 121, 136-137. 1920. 595. BoviNG, P. A. Sunflowers for ensilage. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 196. 1920. 596. Brexchley, Wixifred E. Weeds of farm land. 15 X 22 cm., 239 p., 41 fig. Long- mans, Green and Co. : London, 1920. — A discussion of the weed problem and the habits of weeds rather than a manual of the individual species. Of the thirteen chapters those on Vitality of Weed Seeds, Association with Soils, Association with Crops, Uses of Weeds, and Popular Names are of especial interest, and contain many original data from the Rothamsted Experimental Station. The volume is well, though not profusely, illustrated with line drawings. About 175 citations to literature, mostly European, are given in footnotes. — C. V. Piper. 597. Brown, Edgar. What farmers should expect from seedsmen. Seed World 8'' : 26. 1920. — In this article it is pointed out that the seedsman holds a more directly responsible relation to agriculture than any other merchant, because the farmer is fundamentally dependent upon the seed merchant for his crop seed. — M. T. Munn. 598. Burgess, J. L. Fanners interest in good seed. Seed World 7^: 27. 1920. 599. Cardon, P. v., W. O. Whitcomb, and W. F. Day. Seventh annual report of the Montana Grain Inspection Laboratory. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 136. 32 p., 3 fi^. 1920. — The bulletin discusses methods of collecting, shipping, and grading grain samples. 92 ' AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, Inspection fees and Montana grades for wheat, oats, and barley are given, as well as a com- plete copy of the Montana State Grain Inspection Law. A preliminary statement of inves- tigational work, detailed reports of seeds tested, and a financial statement of the laboratory are included. — H. E. Morris. 600. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock-grassland of New Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 337-345. 7 jig. 1920.— A comparison is made of the flora on a heavily-grazed and an adjoining lightly-grazed pasture at an elevation of about 2000 feet. Coriaria sarmentosa var. and Celmisia spectabilis are found particularly abundant in the lightly-grazed tract. Coriaria sarmentosa has been reported as poisonous to sheep, but in this instance they were apparently uninjured by it. The Celmisia is reported as unpalatable. — N. J. Giddings. 601. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock-grassland of New Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 209-217. 8 fig. 1920.— This gives the results of an experiment to determine the relative palatibility for sheep of the native plants occurring in one of the reserves. The plants are listed and relative palatibility noted. — A^. /. Giddings. 602. Cook, O. F. Commercial parasitism in the cotton industry. Nature 105:548-549. 1920. — System of marketing does not offer sufficient inducement for production of better grades of cotton. Investigations in the United States show that best and most uniform fiber can be maintained only in communities which grow a single variety. More attention is needed to determine quality in the field. — 0. A. Stevens. 603. Crile, Austin D. Extirpacion del zacate Johnson. [Eradication of Johnson grass.] Agric. Mexicano y Hogar 36: 153-156. 1920. 604. DoBLAS, Jos£ Herrera. Henificacion de forrajes. [Haymaking.] Bol. Asoc. Agric. Espana 11:348-354. 1919.— The author considers methods of storing hay, for the most part by baling, together with costs and probable returns. — John A. Stevenson. 605. Dominguez, Zeferino. La semilla. [Seed.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7: 449-451. 1 fig. 1920.— The author considers the proper care of seed-corn under Mexican conditions. — John A. Stevenson. 606. Downing, R. G. Flax growing in Victoria. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 636. 1920. 607. Dymond, J. R. Color characteristics of red clover seed. Seed World 7^ : 23. 1920.— In Canada in 1916 in samples of red clover seed, the purple-colored seeds were slightly more prevalent and in practically every case weighed more per thousand seeds than the yellow- colored seeds. Germination tests showed that the yellow seeds gave a higher percentage of germination and contained more hard seeds than the purple. The green or immature seeds gave the lowest percentage of germination, but contained a surprisingly high proportion of hard or impermeable seeds. The brown seeds are shown to be low in vitality and to contain the smallest percentage of hard seeds. — M. T. Munn. 608. Elorduy, Samuel Torres. Cultivo de la remolacha azucarera. [Sugar beet cul- tivation.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7:493-495. 1920. 609. FiNDLAY. Hugh. The handbook for practical farmers. 558 p., 258 fi^. D. Appleton & Company: New York and London, 1920.— This book, edited by Prof. Hugh Findlay of Columbia University, consists in the main, of contributions from men who are actively en- gaged in the promotion of the subjects they discuss. Of the 558 pages, some 45 are devoted to soil management and drainage, 94 to a discussion of the chief field crops, 82 to the orchard, small fruits, and vegetables, 182 to animal husbandry, 42 to farm weeds and pests (not dis- eases), 96 to farm engineering, economics, and miscellaneous subjects; and the book concludes No. 2, March, 19211 AGRONOMY 93 with 20 pages giving weights, measures, and various useful rules. Under each topic the fundamental facts are given, but space prohibits considerable elaboration of the many sub- jects touched upon. The book contains much useful general information. The contributing authors and their subjects are: A. G. McCall (Maryland Exp. Sta.), Soil Management, Manures and Fertilizers; R. G. Weggans (Coll. Agric, Cornell Univ.), Corn, Wheat, Oats, Barley, Rye, and Rotations; F. W. Oldexburgh (Marj'land State Coll. Agric), Hay, Legumes, Forage, and Soiling Crops; J. R. Faix (Univ. Georgia), The Culture of Cotton; W. W. Gar- ner (U. S. Dept. Agric), Culture of Tobacco; A. G. Smith (Virginia Polytech. Inst.), Cul- ture of the Sweet Potato; C. W. Ward (Michigan Agric. Coll.), Fertilizers for the White Potato; William C. SA>fCTUARY (New York State School Agric), Poultry; Johx McXutt, (Massachusetts Agric. Coll.), Dairj' Cattle; M. W. Harper (Cornell Univ.), Horse; James R. Dice (New York State School Agric), Hogs; R. W. Duck (Syracuse Univ.), Sheep; H. F. Baldwin (Washington, D. C), Milk Production; R. P. Prichard (New York State Coll. Forestry-), Care of the Farm Wood Lot; C. Craig, and A. LaMotte (DuPont Powder Works), The Use of Explosives on the Farm; Edgar W. Coolet (International Harvester Co.), The Care of Tools on the Farm; J. H. Hewett (New York State School of Agric), Some of the Common Diseases of Animals and Remedies; E. F. Phillips (U. S. Dept. Agric), Bee-Keep- ing on the Farm; W. T. L. Taliaferro (Maryland Agric Coll.), Construction and Arrange- ment of Farm Buildings; A. P. Yerkes (Maryland Agric. Coll.), Farm Engines and Their Care; E. O. Fippin (Cornell Univ.), Drainage on the Farm; James B. Morman (Federal Farm Loan Banks), Benefits of the Federal Farm Loan System; H. T. Scovil (Univ. Illinois), Farm Records; and H. F. Miller (Gould's Manufacturing Co.), Running Water for House and Outbuildings. — C. V. Piper. 610. Gonzalez, J. Instrucciones para el cultivo y tratamiento del tabaco. [Cultivation and treatment of tobacco.] luformacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 290-293. 1920. 611. Graber, L. F. Wisconsin's Grimm alfalfa experience. Seed World 8^ : 25-26. 1920. 612. Guthrie, F. B. ,and G. W. Norris. Notes on wheats entered for the Royal Agricul- tural Society's show. Easter, 1920. Agric Gaz. New South Wales 31:627-635. 1920.— Weights per bushel, results of milling tests, and other notes are given on about 25 varieties of wheat entered; also details of the awards. — L. R. Waldron. 613. Hall, Thos. D. Glucose and starch from maize. South African Jour. Indust. 3: 597-605. 1920. 614. Henri CKSEN, H. C. The selection of seed corn in Porto Rico. Porto Rico Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 18: 1-22. 6 fig. 1920. — The importance of selecting seed corn is emphasized. Structure of a com kernel and the variations in size, shape, and color of kernels of the prin- cipal varieties are discussed. Points to be considered in selecting desirable ears are given, together with two proposed score cards for use in Porto Rico. The ear-to-row method of maintaining selections is outlined. In conclusion a satisfactory method of preserving seed corn in Porto Rico is given. — John A. Stevenson. 615. Hensel, M. W. Sweet sorghum variety demonstrations, 1919. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Ser. Circ. 102:3-14. 1920. — Result of tests with 9 varieties of saccharine sor- ghums in 5 localities within North Carolina, to determine variety best suited for making syrup. — F. A. Wolf. 616. Hoffman, Paul. Flachsbau und Hausweberei, ein Mittel gegen Landflucht and Leutenot. [Flax culture and home weaving, a means against land desertion and popular want.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 395-398. 1920. 617. Ingrason, P. A. La alfilaria. [Alfilaria.] Rev. Agric [IVlexico] 5: 228-233. 1919. — Description of the plants, seeding, cultivation, harvesting, and feeding value of Erodium cicutarium and related species, said to be of very great value as forage crops in arid regions. — John A. Stevenson. 94 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 618. JuRiTZ, Chas. F. The prickly pear (Opuntia). Possibilities of its utilization. South African Jour. Indust. 31:687-693. Idem. 32:803-814. 1920.— The possibility is dis- cussed of utilizing the prickly pear as a useful fodder plant for stock and as an article of human diet. It is also considered as a source of potash fertilizer, of sugar and vinegar, of industrial alcohol, of oxalic acid, of oil, of a mucilaginous glaze, of sizing for textile fab- rics, of fiber for paper making, of a dye or coloring matter, and as a basis for soap manu- facture. From a practical standpoint not more than 7 or 8 of these seem to be deserving of serious attention. — E. M. Doidge. 619. Kalt, Bertram. Der Begriff "Originalsaatgut" und seine Anwendung bei der Ziichtungsanerkennung. [The conception of "original seed" and its application to recognized sorts.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 460-471. 1919. — A discussion of the inspection and con- trol of pure seed production with a view to insuring the genuineness, purity, and quality of the designated seed. An explanation of what the term "original seed" shall stand for, and the use and meaning of such terms as "improved" and "pedigreed" as applied to particular strains of seeds, and the organization and means through which such inspection and certifi- cation may be carried out. — A. T. Wiancko. 620. Keeble, Frederick. Intensive cultivation. Sci. Monthly 11:445-451. 1920. — Extracts from an address at the Cardiff Meeting of the British A. A. S. — Skilled onion growers average 5 tons to the acre. A chrysanthemum grower who turned his facilities from these to onions averaged 17 tons. The average yield of potatoes is a little over 6 tons. The army gardeners of France produced 14 tons to the acre. Consequently it may be accepted as a fact that intensive cultivation would double crops. — L. Pace. 621. Kelly, H. J. Agriculture at Nyngan. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 685-687. 1920. — Experiments have shown that wheat as a grain crop at Nyngan, 250 miles northwest of Sydney, is unsafe, but that wheat for hay, and certain other fodder crops can be grown after fallow, if light seeding is practiced. — L. R. Waldron. 622. Killer, J. Die Knollenwachstumsintensitat, einer bisher wenig beachteter Faktor in der Beurteilung der Kartoffelsorten. [The rate of tuber development, a heretofore little noticed factor in judging the value of varieties of potatoes.] Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 426-430. 1919. — Varieties of potatoes of similar time of maturity differ materially in the rate of growth at different periods. Some varieties make their most rapid growth early in the season, some in midseason, and some late in the season. These observations lead to impor- tant considerations regarding the utilization of plant-food in the soil, the influence of weather conditions at different times in the season, effect of disease attacks, and relation to marketing, and place the whole matter of potato culture in a different light than heretofore. With a knowledge of the peculiarities of varieties in these respects, it is possible to regulate plant- food supplies in the soil so as to be available when most needed, and to select varieties that in their growth intensity at different periods fit in with the different weather conditions usually prevailing at certain times in the particular locality. — A. T. Wiancho. 623. Kiesselbach, T. A., and Ratcliff, J. A. Freezing injury of seed corn. Nebraska Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 16. 96 p. 22 fig. 1920.— The authors discuss various theories advanced to explain the death of tissues by freezing. — Microscopic studies failed to dis- close any rupturing of tissues or other cytological disturbances in corn embryos killed by freezing. It is believed that freezing of a corn embryo produces a physical or chemical change, aside from the withdrawing of water, in the protoplasmic and nuclear material of the cell, so that death ensues. The change in color of the embryo as a result of freezing would seem to indicate that a chemical change had taken place. — Control and field experiments indicate that death from freezing is directly related to the moisture content of the kernel and also to the duration of the exposure to cold. Seed corn maturing in a natural way becomes cold resistant progressively as its moisture content diminishes. Seed corn mortality increases progressively as the duration of the killing temperature is extended. — Extensive No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 95 tabular data are given, showing the correlation between degrees and duration of cold, ice formation inside the kernel, moisture content of the kernel, embryo discoloration, and loss of vitality. — Cultural practices relative to the selection and preservation of seed corn are discussed, and experimental data are presented in support of the conclusions. — T. A. Kiesselbach. 624. Koch, Pieter. Cotton culture. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:615- 622. 1920. 325. Lee, S. C. Electrical treatment of seed. Agric. Gaz. Canada 7:248-249. 1920.— Further investigations on electricall}^ treated seed as compared with untreated seed on the trial grounds of the Manitoba Agricultural College, are briefly reported. A plot of Marquis wheat sown with electrically heated seed yielded 3| bushels more grain and 533 pounds more straw than the check. The plot showed a ranker growth and ripened more slowly. Rust affected both plots equally. — 0. W. Dynes. 626. Lemmerman, D. Untersuchungen iiber verschiedene Diingungsfragen. [Investi- gations concerning various fertilizing problems.] Arbeiten der Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 297. 198 p. 1919. — The author reports various experiments, most of which were carried on at the Society's experimental fields in Dahlem, near Berlin. The following investigations are reported: The effect of fertilizing with nitrogen, phosphoric acid, potash, and lime, with and without stable manure on yields and on the fertilizer balance in the soil, 23 p.; Green manure studies, 25 p. ; On the influence of organic substances on the nitrogen in fertilizers and in soils, 5 p. ; Investigations with nitrogenous fertilizers, 48 p. ; with phosphate, 17 p. ; with potash, 8 p.; with lime, 9 p. There are also included meteorological tables and many pages of tabulated data. — A. J. Pieters. 627. Liehr, O. Der Mohn, sein Anbau und seine Verwertung. [The culture and uses of poppy.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung. 68: 191-198. 1919. — A popular discussion of the culture and uses of poppy for the production of seed and its products. The yield, composition, quality, and uses of poppy oil and the by-product, poppy cake, are shown and discussed in detail. — A. T. Wiancko. 628. Loft, Selm ar. Determining dry matter in root crops. Seed World 7" : 21-22. 1920. — The author gives the testing methods used by Danish seed growers to secure the desired results. Dry-matter determinations are described in detail, giving the methods of drawing samples, washing, and sawing the roots, and the treatment of the final samples. — M. T. Munn. 629. Meek, B. C, and R. N. Makin. Farmers' experiment plots. Potato experiments, 1919-20. Central western district and south coast. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 621- 625. 1920. — Yields are given of different varieties of potatoes with and without fertilizers. Fertilizers generally gave very favorable results. — L. R. Waldron. 630. Meek, B. C, and H. Bartlett. Farmers' experiment plots. Maize experiments 1919-20. Central-western and north-west districts. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 703- 706. 1920. — Conditions generally were adverse, and the results were not of particular value. Irrigated plats yielded as high as 68 bushels per acre. — L. R. Waldron. 631. Mitscherlich, E. A. Ein Beitrag zur Standweite verschiedener Kulturpflanzen. [A contribution regarding the spacing of various crops.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 121-129. 1919. — Results of experiments with various thicknesses of planting potatoes, mustard, bush- beans, and hemp. The largest yields were secured from stands of plants per hectare as follows: potatoes, 33,333; mustard, 10,300,000; bushbeans, 800,000; hemp, 267,000. In the case of mustard, it is stated that broadcast seeding at a somewhat thicker rate might be expected to give still larger yields. — A. T. Wiancko. 96 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 632. Morgan, G. W., and A. E. Seamans. Dry farming in the plains area of Montana. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ 89:1-22. 1920. — The circular discusses the leading crops for the great plains — wheat, oats, barley, corn, and flax — mentioning uses and the varie- ties best adapted. Corn is a reliable source of fodder. Native grasses, brome grass, and alfalfa are recommended for permanent pastures, while alfalfa, brome grass, sweet clover, and small grains all make good hay; and in some sections sorghums, millets, and Sudan grass have been successfully grown. — H. E. Morris. 633. MuNDY, H. G. The cultivation of rice. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:321-324. 2 fig. 1920. 634. MuNDY, H. G. The cultivation of rice in southern Rhodesia. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:243-246. 1920. 635. MuNN, M. T. The New York seed law and seed testing. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 476. 28 p. 1920. Chiefly a discussion of the provisions of a recently-enacted seed law, which requires that agricultural seeds offered for sale in the state of New York shall be labeled, so as to show their purity and viability. — F. C. Stewart. 636. Newton, V/. Soil treatment for the Nechako Valley. Agric. Jour. [British Colum- bia] 5: 202-203. 1920. 637. Newton, W. The quality in potatoes. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 152. 1920. 638. Oswald, H. Untersuchungen iiber die Einwirkung des Grundwasserstands auf die Bewurzelung von Wiesenpflanzen auf Moorboden. [Investigations concerning the effect of ground water level upon the root development of meadow plants on moor soils.] Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung. 68: 321-340, 370-386. 1919.— The studies were conducted on two types of moor soil, lowland moor and highland moor. The ground water level was maintained at different heights in different pots, and a mixture of clover and grass seeds was sown. Details are given of the yields and root development of the clovers and various grasses in the pots. The root development was determined at the end of the 5th year, when it was found that in low moor soil practically half the roots were those of sword grass; this grass together with meadow fescue and orchard grass made up 81 to 98 per cent of the total root content in the various pots. The great bulk of grass roots was found in the upper 10 cm. of soil. Sword grass, orchard grass, and meadow fescue were found to have the deepest root systems; these penetrated to the water table in the deepest soil. For particulars of the proportion of roots of the different grasses and the depth to which they penetrated with water tables at varying levels, the reader is referred to the original. The article is accompanied by a long bibliography. — A. T. Wiancko. 639. Petersen, Fe DERI CO. Los trigos seleccionadas de la hacienda Amalucan. [Selected wheats at hacienda Amalucan.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 112-118. 4 fig. 1919. — The results of tests of 3 selected wheat varieties, Flor, Maravilla I, and Maravilla II in comparison with unselected varieties are given. The tests were carried out on 36 farms, the selected varie- ties giving greatly increased yields as well as proving more resistant to drouth and rust {Puccinia spp.). Tests were also made on different soil types and with different cultivation methods. — John A. Stevenson. 640. Pitt, J. M. Broom millet on the Manning. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 637- 644. 6 fig. 1920. — Cultural and other notes are given for this crop, Holcus Sorghum L. — L. R. Waldron. 641. Pole Evans, I. B. South African fiber plants. Ambari or Deccan Hemp: Hibiscus cannabinus, L. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1 : 570-580. 6 p'. 1920. No. 2. March, 1921] AGRONOMY 97 642. Popp, M., AXD R. Floss. Das Susspressfutter als Futter fur Milchvieh. [Sweet silage as feed for milk cows.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:391-394. 1920.— The authors describe an experiment with a form of ensilage, the making of which is said to have been developed in Switzerland. The process is not described in detail, but the reader is referred to previous papers. In the experiments reported in this paper rowen was used from a grass meadow. One portion of the rowen was made into hay, and the other put into a silo under pressure. The feeding experiment was carried on for varying periods, using the hay and the sweet silage from the same rowen grass. Analyses showed that the fat content and the crude protein content were the same for both hay and silage. The pure protein and the digestible protein were, however, greater in the hay; while the amides increased in the silage. — The cows gave more milk from the silage than from the hay; and even after the supply of silage was exhausted, the cows that had been fed on it appeared to retain the increased milk flow. The making of sweet silage is highly recommended by the authors.— A. J. Pieters. 643. Pridham, J. T. Breeding cereals at the experiment farms. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 697-698. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 926. 644. Renson, Carlos. Cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7:467-471. 1920. 645. Renson, Carlos. Cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Jalisco Rural [Mexico] 2:147-153. 1920. 646. Revent6s, Jaume. La soja. [The soy bean.] Rev. Inst. Agric. Catalan de San Isidro. 69:65-68, 81-85. 1920.— The author gives analyses of the beans, considers their food value, uses of the oil and commercial products derived from them. — John A. Stevenson. 647. RoBisoN, W. L. Com by-products for swine. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^:247. 1920. 648. Rumsey, H. J. Seed growing in Australia. Seed World S^: 27-28. 1920. 649. Russell, E. J. The nations food. [Rev. of: Rew, R. H. Food supplies in peace and war. vii + 183 p. Longmans, Green and Co.: London, 1920.] Nature 105:320-321. 1920. 650. Russell, E. J. British crop production. Nature 105: 176-178; 206-208. 1920.— A discussion of means of increasing production. Data of yields, cost of production, ferti- lizers, etc. — 0. A. Stevens. 651. Russell, E. J. Wheat and wheat growing. [Rev. of: Buller, A. H. R. Essays on wheat, xv + 339 p. The Macmillan Co.: New York and London, 1919.] Nature 105: 224-225. 1920. — Reviewer finds it a very interesting history of wheat in Canada.— 0. A. Stevens. 652. Sanchez, A. Algunos dates sobre el cultivo del maguey. [Notes on the cultivation of maguey.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 227-228. 1919.— Agave sp. 653. Sanchez, N. El cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 267-269. 1919. 654. Scott, J. M. Forage crops in the South. Seed World 8i:40. 1920. 655. Sheehan, B. F. Dodder in Idaho. Seed World 8^: 26-28. 1920.— In this article the author discusses dodder as a noxious weed pest, threatening the small seed industry of Idaho. The methods of dissemination of the seed and the plant, its appearance, and methods of eradication in the field, are given, together with some notes upon the principal kinds of dodder.— M. T. Munn. 98 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 656. Sheehan, B. F. Responsibility for low-quality seeds. Seed World 7^ : 23-24. 1920. — The writer gives as reasons for the marketing of inferior seeds, mentioning as the most important, the farmers' practice of selling one another adulterated seeds, of saving screenings for seed, and of purchasing second or third-grade seed for planting. It is urged that the farmer selling seed for seeding purposes should be required to comply with the same regulations as the dealer. It is suggested that the logical method of handling seeds in interstate commerce is through the medium of national grades, which would be flexible, yet place a premium upon high grade seeds.— M. T. Munn. 657. SiFTON, H. B. Longevity of cereal, clover, and timothy seed. Seed World 7*: 26-28. 1920. 658. Stewart, F. C. Experiments on the spacing of potato plants. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 474: 1-32. 1920.— These experiments were conducted at Geneva, New York, during 5 seasons and were devoted chiefly to a comparison of 6- by 36-inch planting with 15- by 36-inch planting. Two varieties of Solanum tuberosum belonging to the Rural group were used. In different seasons, the thick planting produced from 55.4 to 79.2 per cent more tubers than the thin planting, but as the tubers were of smaller average size the difference in total weight of crop was much less; viz., 14.4 to 36.9 per cent. The average net yield (total yield minus "seed") of tubers weighing over one ounce was 34.7 bushels per acre. More than half of this difference (18.7 bushels) consisted of tubers over two ounces in weight. — F. C. Stewart. 659. Stone, A. L. Seed legislation and the farmer. Seed World 71°: 23. 1920.— The conclusion is reached that seed laws should not favor the farmer, but should be designed only to protect him from technical phases of seed trade and commerce. The practice of exempting farmers under the seed laws is not considered desirable.— M. T. Munn. 660. SuDENDORF, Th., AND G. Gahrtz. Bcitiag zur Ermittelung des Blausauergehaltes in Rangoonbohnen. [Cyanide content of lima beans.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39 : 350-353. 1920.— The cyanide content depends on the source of the beans as well as on the method of preparation. — H. G. Barbour. 661. Swingle, D. B., and Grace B. Nutting.. Legume inoculation. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 88. 8 p. 1919.— The circular discusses briefly legume inoculation and its advantages. The different methods in use are described. — H. E. Morris. 662. Thorne, C. E. The manufacture of sorghtim syrup. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5': 199. 2 pi. July, 1920. — The article comprises a brief discussion of the essen- tial points in handling cane and producing high grade syrup from the juice. — R. C. Thomas. 663. Thorne, Chas. E. The maintenance of soil fertility in Hamilton county, Ohio. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^°: 170. 1920.— This involves a report of the benefits from fertilizers and limestone in a corn, soybean, wheat, clover rotation. A detailed com- parison of certain varieties is given. — R. C. Thomas. 664. Thorne, Chas. E. A crop rotation for a hog farm. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^: 131. 1920. — Corn, being deficient both in protein and lime, is inadequate as a muscle and protein builder. Defective features in a corn, wheat, clover rotation are pointed out. The value of the soy bean as a feed crop, and for the production of bone, protein, and pork is discussed. Consideration is given to the relative manurial value of straw and stover. — R. C. Thomas. 665. TiCE, C. Certified potato-seed production. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 197. 1920. 666. TiCE, C. Pitt Meadows demonstration plot. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 110, 112. ,1920. No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 99 667. Ure, Ruby, and Beatrice, Larson. Single vs. double blotters in germination testing. Seed World. 7^: 17. 1920. 66S. Uyeda, Y. The proximate composition of Korean hemp and ramie. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 573-576. 1920. — The pro.ximate composition of Korean hemp and ramie are given as determined by the modifications of the analytical method proposed by Dore. — Henry Schmitz. GG9. VoGEL, Prof. Dr. Die Impffrage der Nichtleguminosen. [Inoculation of non- legumes.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:529-532. 1920. — The author reviews the experiments that have been made with such substances as "U" cultures, "Nitrogen kompost," "Biostickstoff," "Azogenin," "Agranit," and others, and finds them without value. How- ever, a preparation known as "Guanol," a bacterized turf, has given good results. The same quantity of nitrogen in Guanol has produced larger yields than when used as nitrate of soda. The author states that Guanol acts through its relatively high nitrogen and potash content and its content of water soluble organic substances which stimulate soil bacteria to increased activity. — A. J. Pietcrs. 670. Waldron, C. H. Notes on the germination of Kentucky bluegrass. Seed World 76:22. 1920. 671. Warburg, Otto. Ueber die Fasern liefernden Boehmeria-Arten. [Species of Boehmeria producing fiber.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7^^:1-7. 1920. — The economic species are Boehmeria nivea (L.) Hook. Am, and B. tenacissima (Roxb.) Gaud.— //. A. Gleason. 672. Wenholz, H. Sunflowers as silage. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 721-723. 1920. — This article summarizes results secured in United States and Canada. — L. R. Waldron. 673. Wenholz, H. Cuzco maize. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:701-702. 1920.— This varietj' was not found adapted to New South Wales. The amount of fodder produced was not up to the standard, and it produced ripe seed with difficulty. Silk did not develop until 6 weeks after tassels appeared. — L. R. Waldron. 674. Whipple, O. B. Thinning as a possible substitute for seed pieces of uniform size in potato tests. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16: 179-181. (1919)— 1920.— By thinning potatoes to a single stem, size and uniformity of size were improved. The author suggests "that varia- tions in yields resulting from planting large and small seed pieces may be purely a matter of stand.' The increased yield resulting from planting larger seed pieces may be largely due to increased number of plants per hill. Field counts showed that plots of Russet Burbank potatoes planted with 1.3-ounce seed-pieces average 2.27, 1.04-ounce seed-pieces averaged 2.22, and 1.3-ounce seed-pieces averaged 1.47 plants per hill. — H. A. Jones. 675. Whipple, O. B. Correlation between depths of eyes and degeneration among potatoes. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16 : 181-183. (1919)— 1920.— Results of field experiments show that there is a correlation between shallowness of potato eyes and degeneracy. The writer is convinced that there is no surer way of bringing about deterioration within these varieties inclined to degeneration than by continual selection of shallow-eyed types. The Howard Elliot, a deep-eyed, high-yielding variety was selected three years for shallowness of eyes. At end of this time 90 per cent of the plants showed degenerate tendencies. — H. A. Jones. 676. Will AM an, J. J., R. M. West, and C. P. Bull. Sorghum and sorghimi sirup manu- facture. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 187:1-55. 17 fig. 1919.— The growing of sor- ghum, preparation for the mill and the manufacture of the sirup are discussed. — A. C. Arny. 677. Williams, C. B. Report of the Division of Agronomy, North Carolina Agricultural Exp. Sta. North Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 42: 21-39. 1920.— Brief summary of investigational work on soil fertility and fertilizer tests, on crop rotation and on crop improve- ment by breeding and selection. — F. A. Wolf. 100 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 678. Williams, C. G. Wheat: varietal and cultural work. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^: 195. 1920. — Wheat tests are being conducted at fourteen different points in Ohio. Among the many varieties tested, the Gladden, Trumbull, Ohio 9920, and Portage, rank high. — R. C. Thomas. 679. Williams, C. B., and R. Y. Winters. Crimson clover for North Carolina. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Serv. Ext. Circ. 98. 7 p. 1919. — A popular agronomic account deal- ing with varieties, preparation of soil, seeding, inoculation, and harvesting for hay or seed. — F. A. Wolf. 680. Williams, C. B., and R. Y. Winters. Vetch for North Carolina. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Serv. Ext. Circ. 96. 8 p. 1919. — Popular account indicating varieties adapted to the state, method for preparation of seed bed, seeding, inoculation, and value for hay or pasture. — F. A. Wolf. 681. Winters, R. Y., S. W. Hill, and P. H. Kime. Community cotton improvement in North Carolina. North Carolina Agric. Exp. Ser. Ext. Circ. 108. 30 p. 10 fig. 1920.— An account of tests with cotton conducted to determine the variety best adapted to each of the various localities, together with results of seed selection for the improvement of these varie- ties.— F. A. Wolf. 682. Winters, R. Y., G. M. Garren, and Bixton White. Improved seed wheat for North Carolina. North Carolina Ext. Agric. Serv. Ext. Circ. 106. 14 p. 1920. — Comparative tests made near Asheville and Statesville, North Carolina, over a period of three years have shown that home-grown seed is superior to northern-grown seed. Data on the value of selection for the improvement of wheat are also included. — F. A. Wolf. 683. Wittmack, L. Der wahre Wert des Schilfrohrs als Wirtschaftspfianze. [The true value of Phragmites communis as an economic plant.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 532-533. 1920. — The young leaves dried and cut into small pieces are readily eaten by cattle. The claim has been made that the root-stocks contain 30 per cent cane sugar, but the author shows, by quoting various analyses, that this figure is much too high, even when taken as the sugar content of the dry substances. — A. J. Pieters. 684. Zavitz, C. A. Systematic Experiments. Agric. Gaz. Canada 7: 244-246. 1920. — A brief summary is given of the 1919 results throughout Ontario in testing all classes of field crops. Comparative values of leading varieties are calculated in percentages, together with summaries of yields of straw and grain. Data on the percentage of leaf roll and mosaic in potatoes were taken. Higher yields and lower susceptibility to diseases were found in the northern-grown stock. — 0. W. Dynes. BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY Neil E. Stevens, Editor 685. Algan, H. Bibliographie. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. Economic forestiere. [Forest economy.] Tome premier, deuxieme volume, deuxieme edition. 461 p. 1920.] Bull. Trimest Soc. Forest. Franche Comte et Belfort 13 : 196-202. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 741. 686. Andrews, A. LeRoy. Ingebrigt Hagen. Bryologist 23 : 79-80. 1920.— The author condenses a biographic notice by Dr. Wille in Kgl. Norsk Vidensk. Sels. Skr., 1917, and adds a number of recollections about Dr. Hagen's views, personality, and methods of work. — E. B. Chamberlain. 687. Anonymous. Geo. Stephen West, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S. Jour. Quekett Microsc. Club 14: 104-105. 1919.— Obituary Notice.— Lena B. Walker. No. 2, March, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY 101 658. Anonymous. Courses on the history of science. Nature 105:279. 1920. — These are just beginning to be introduced in British universities. — 0. A. Stevens. 659. Anonymous. (Note of death of A. P. Candolle, with brief statement of his work.] Nature 105: 365. 1920.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1437. 690. Anonymous. Prof. C. A. Timiriazeff. Nature 105: 430. 1920. — Announces the death of Timiriazeff, "the only Russian botanist who was at all a familiar figure in England." Author of several books on plant life. Noted for demonstration of effects of different rays of the visible spectrum on photosynthetic activity of the green leaf. — 0. A. Stevens. 691. [B., V. H.] Wilhehn Pfeffer. Nature 105: 302. 1920.— Brief note of life and work. — 0. A. Stevens. 692. Anonymous. Tribute to the memory of James Wilson. Sci. Monthly 11:478-479. 1920. — Records a tribute to the memory of James Wilson, former U. S. secretary of Agri- culture. — L. Pace. 693. Anonymous. Scientific and systematic pomology. [Rev. of: The Journal of Pomology, Vol. 1, No. 1 and 2. Geo. Bunyard & Co.: Maidstone, 1920.] Nature 105: 62^-630. 19'20. 694. Britten, James. Lehmann's Pugllli. Jour. Botany 58: 198-200. 1920.— This is an account of the Pugillus Plantarum by Johann Georg Christian Lehmann, 1828-1857. Ten "Pugilli" are noted: the first (1828) contained 29 species; the second (1830) included some of Douglas's Calif ornian plants; the third to sixth had no date on the title page, but were stated to have been reprinted from The Indies for 1831, 1832, 1833, and 1834; the fourth and fifth have prefaces dated 1831 and 1833; the seventh and eighth are dated 1838 and 1844; the ninth and tenth were issued independently in 1851 and 1857. The third is entirely devoted to Hepaticae. The first portion of No. 6 contains De Plantis Cycadeis praeserlim Africae Auslralis. No. 7 contains, besides Hepaticae, a history of the Hamburg Botanical Garden. The second part of the eighth is occupied by descriptions of Preiss's New Holland plants. No. 9 is entirely occupied by Potentilla. The tenth contains only hepatics. — K. M. Wiegand. 695. Britten, James. John Gilbert Baker (1834-1920). Jour. Botany 58: 233-238. 1920.— Baker was born in Yorkshire, Jan. 13, 18.34, and educated in the Friends' schools at Ackworth and York. His botanical work began while at the former school. He is pictured as a very kindly man, prone to aid the beginner, a man of keen literary sense, much interested in poetry, and a genial friend of students and workers in the Royal Gardens. His portrait appeared in Jour. Botany 1893, p. 243; Ibid., 1901, frontispiece; Ibid., 1907, p. 67.— iv. M. Wiegand. 696. Chase, ViRGiNius H. Francis Eugene M'Donald. Rhodora 22 : 145-146. 1920.— A short biographical sketch of the late Francis Eugene McDonald, born Feb. 23, 1860, died Jan. 30, 1920. An amateur botanist and collector. His home was in Peoria, Illinois, in which region most of his collecting was done. — James P. Poole. 697. DucLAUX, Emile. Pasteur: the history of a mind. English translation by Erwin F. Smith, and Florence Hedges. 23 x 15 cm., xxxii + 363 p., 22 fig., 16 pi. W. B. Saunders Co. : Philadelphia, 1920.— "This book is more than a critique of Pasteur. It is a contribution to the biological history of a swiftly changing time, a very striking period in the develop- ment of science."— E. F. S. — In an introduction of 32 pages. Smith presents a biographical sketch of DucLAUX. The translators have supplied notations to the text throughout. In addition, an annotated list of persons mentioned in the text occupies 40 pages. — Of the plates, 2 are of Duclaux and 14 of Pasteur. — D. Reddick. 698. Gunther, R. T. Tradescant's first garden catalogue, 1634. Jour. Botany 58:248. 1920.— Tie writer has in his possession one of the few copies if not the only copy in existence 102 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, of the first catalogue of Trades cant's plants. The generally-quoted edition appeared in 1656. Seven hundred and fifty species and varieties are listed in this first edition. A cata- lo5^ue of fruits occupies the last five pages. — K. M. Wiegand. 699. GuNTHER, R. T. Walter Stonehouse (1597-1655). Jour. Botany 58: 170-173. 1920. — Mr. Stonehouse, the botanist, is shown to be identical with Rev. Walter Stonehouse, of Magdalen College, Oxford, — a fact not before generally known. The identity was dis- covered through an anonymous Catalogus Plantarum Horti mei Darfeldiae Quibus, etc., and passages in John Tradescant's Musaeum Tradescantianum. Stonehouse was a Londoner, born in 1597, and later a scholar of Wadham College, Oxford, taking his B.A. degree in 1616-17, and becoming a Fellow of Magdalen College in 1617. In 1629 he became a Bach- elor of Divinity, and resigned from the college, becoming rector of Darfield. An account is given of his association with Thomas Johnson and others, and of a trip with these gentle- men to the mountains of North Wales. About 1648 he was forcibly ejected from his parish by the Parliamentary Commissioners. Stonehouse was personally acquainted with Park- inson. — K. M. Wiegand. 700. Hutt, W. M. Past history of the American pomological society. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 1-10. 1918. — A general paper. Attention is drawn to the fact that mem- bers of the society tested the different varieties of fruits in the United States long before the organization of agricultural colleges and experiment stations. Rules of nomenclature, which are still used as standard, were passed. — A statement regarding the financial standing of the Society is included. — E. C. Auchter. 701. Linton, Edward Francis. William Moyle Rogers (1835-1920). Jour. Botany 58: 161-164. Portrait. 1920. — Rogers was born at Helston, Cornwall, July 12, 1835, and was educated at Helston Grammar School, where he was later an assistant master. After a short residence in Dublin he went to South Africa as vice-principal of a college there. At about this time he was ordained to priesthood. In 1862 he returned home, and, after occupy- ing a series of clerical positions, became vicar of Bridgerule, Devon, in 1882, from which posi- tion he retired in 1885. A detailed account is given of Rogers's very numerous contributions on botanical subjects, especially of his papers on Rubus, on which genus he became a special- ist. These studies resulted in a Handbook of the British Rubi in 1900. During his later years he often assisted the clergy about Bornemouth, his home, until his death on May 26, 1920.— K. M. Wiegand. 702. Mattirolo, Oreste. Pietro Andrea Saccardo — Treviso 23 Aprile 1845 — Padova 12 Febraio 1920. [Commemoration of Pietro Andrea Saccardo, b. April 23, 1845 at Treviso, d. February 12, 1920, at Padua.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 55: 468-473. 1919-1920.— His chief works were: Sylloge fungorum omnium hucusque cognitorum. 22 volumes; Prevedibili funghi futiiri secondo la legge di analogia, 1896; Botanica in Italia; Cronologia delta Flora italiana; Flora Tarvisina Renovata; Enumerazione critica delle piante vascolari finora note nella pro- vincia Treviso. — Harriet M. Libby. 703. Mattirolo, Oreste. Commemorazione di Saverio Belli. [Memorial to Saverio Belli.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 55: 8-30. 1919-1920.— Saverio Belli was director of the Botanical Gardens at Turin, professor of botany at the University of Cagliari, member of the Royal Academy of Agriculture, and of many scientific societies. His chief fields of research were in taxonomy, anatomy, and physiology and are concerned mainly with the genera, Trifolium and Hieracium. His researches in systematic botany established the reality of the species of a genus or a family as the descendants of a common genealogical tree, with phylogenetic ramifications both in time and space. In anatomy, he showed that neither endoderm nor pericycle exist in Trifolium and many other plants, and that therefore the theory of the stele can not have general application. — A complete bibliography of his works is given covering the studies on Trifolium and Hieracium, taxonomy of phanerogams and cryptogams, and miscellaneous works. — Harriet M. Libby. No. 2, March, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY 103 704. Maxwell, Herbert. Sir Edmund Giles Loder, Bart. Nature 105: 301-302. 1920. — Brief account of his life and work. In botany he was especially interested in hybrid- izing rhododendrons, producing R. Loderi, a hybrid of R. Griffthianum and R. Fortunei, generally admitted to be the best hardy hybrid yet produced in the genus. — 0. A. Stevens. 705. Merrill, Elmer D. Dates of publication. Jour. Botany 58: 200. 1920. — This is a criticism of the practice among certain publishers of omitting the date of publication from the title pages. The specific case in question is F. Maxson Bailey's Comprehension Cata- logue of Queensland Plants, the date of which the author believes was March, 1913. — K. M. Wiegand. 706. Montemartini, Luigi. Pier Andrea Saccardo. Patol. Veg. 10:49-50. 1920.— On February 11, 1920, P. A. Saccardo died at Padova, at the age of 74 years, after having been professor of botany ther e for 41 years. — F. M. Blodgett. 707. Montemartini, Ltjigi. Giovanni Briosi. Ilev. Patol. Veg. 10:33-35. 1920.— Professor Giovanni Briosi was born in Ferrara, April 9, 1846, and died July 20, 1919. He was first director of the experiment station of agricultural chemistry at Palermo and Rome; in 1883 he became professor of botany in the Royal University of Pavia and also directed the Italian cryptogamic laboratory. — A list of his publications is given. — F. M. Blodgett. 708. Sinttjrel, E. La foret de Fontainebleau de 1789 a 1794. [The forest of Fontaine- bleau from 1789 to 1794.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 218-226, 255-263, 281-288. 1920.— During the first years of the French Revolution the forest of Fontainebleau, like other forests through- out France, suflfered severely from depredations by the neighboring inhabitants. Attempts by both local and national authorities, including the king, to check these availed little except for a short period of comparative calm during the first half of 1790. Non-payment of salaries of forest oflBcers resulted in a slackening of their efforts to protect the forests; and on August 15, 1792, the Legislative Assembly, in an attempt to revive their interest, passed an act providing for the payment of back salaries. It was not, however, until the estab- lishment of the first republic that really effective steps to protect the forest were taken. In the fall of 1793 the National Convention, recognizing the forest as a public asset of great value, energetically set about its preservation. Armed forces were introduced to supple- ment the efforts of the regular forest officers; a proposal to increase the food supply by allowing goat grazing was rejected; trespassers were apprehended and punished; and all but comparatively minor depredations were successfully prevented. — S. T. Dana. 709. Smith, Annie Morrill. Mary Farnham Miller. Bryologist 23 : 80. 1920.— An appreciation of Miss Miller's work on behalf of the Sullivant Moss Society. — E. B. Chamberlain. 710. S[mith], E. F. [Emile Duclaux, 1840-1904.] In Duclaux, Emil£. Pasteur: the history of a mind. English translation by Erwin F. Smith and Florence Hedges. W. B. Saunders Co. : Philadelphia, 1920. Most of the 30 pages of introduction to the book is de- voted to a biographical sketch of Duclaux with a translation of a part of the eulogy on Duclaux said to have been written by Koux and published in Annales de I'lnstitute Pas- teur, May, 1904.— 1>. Reddick. 104 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, BOTANICAL EDUCATION C. Stuart Gagee, Editor Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor 711. Anonymous. A university course in botany. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Botanical Memoirs. No. 4. Elementary notes on structural botany. 27 p. No. 5. Elementary notes on the reproduction of angiospenns. 24 p. Oxford University Press: London, 1919.] Nature 105:162. 1920. 712. Anonymous. A college of tropical agriculture. [Rev. of : Anonymous. West Indies; report of the tropical agricultural college committee. H. M. stationery office, 1920.] Nature 105: 153-154. 1920. Outline of organization of a college of agriculture recommended to be established at Trinidad. — 0. A. Stevens. 713. Bartlett, a. W. Note on an improved method for demonstrating the absorption of oxygen in respiration. New Phytol. 19: 151-152. 1920. 714. Brierley, W. B. [Rev. of: Ellis, G. S. M. Applied botany. VIII + 248 p. Hodder and Stoughton: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 164. 1920. — Reviewer finds many errors in this exposition of "the secrets of plant life." — 0. A. Stevens. 715. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings, III. Rosaceae. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 716.) Amer. Botanist 26: 57-61. 1920. — As far as possible the names of the Rosaceae are traced to their origin. — S. P. Nichols. 716. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings, IV. Rosaceae II. See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 715. Amer. Botanist 26: 90-94. 1920. 717. T(ansley), a. G. Elementary lecturing with the help of schedules. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Elementary notes on structural botany. Oxford Bot. Mem. No. 4. Oxford Univ. Press. 1919. Elementary notes on the reproduction of Angiospenns. Ibid. No. 5. 1919.] New Phytol. 19: 44-46. 1920. — It is recommended that in teaching elementary classes an accurate and full synospsis of each lecture be given to each student before the lecture is delivered. — /. F. Lewis. 718. Weatherwax, Paul. A method of teaching diffusion and osmosis in connection with biological work. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:88-92. 1920. — The author discusses briefly the history of diffusion and osmosis and then by means of well-known experiments works out definitions. Diffusion, he says, is "the dispersal of the particles of one substance among the particles of another substance, without aid from external sources," while osmosis is "the diffusion of two fluids through a membrane that tends to be semipermeable." The student should be led to connect these processes with the structure of the cell and to realize that all the life processes of the plant that involve exchange of fluids between cell and envir- onment depend upon the selective influence of semipermeable membranes. — F. C. Anderson. No. 2, March, 1921] CYTOLOGY 105 CYTOLOGY Gilbert M. Smith, Editor Geo. S. Bryan, Assistant Editor 719. Agar, W. E. Cytology, with special reference to the metazoan nucleus. XII + 224 p. MacMillan and Co. : London, 1920. $4.00. 720. Bayliss, W. M. The properties of colloidal systems. IV. Reversible gelation in living protoplasms. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91:19&-20J.. 1920. — The author describes use of intense dark ground illumination to reveal Brownian movement of minute particles in apparently clear pseudopodia of Amoeba. He describes a temporary gelation of this protoplasmic sol (cessation of Brownian movement) by suitable electrical stimulation, and discusses subject in general. Plant cells, because of walls, are not so suitable for intense dark ground illumination, but Nitella and stamen hairs of Tradescantia are fairlj^ satisfac- tory. — Paul B. Sears. 721. Don CASTER, L. An introduction to the study of cytology. 280 p., 24 pi., 31 fig. University Press: Cambridge, 1920. $8.50. 722. C, A. H. [Rev. of: Doncaster, L. An introduction to the study of cytology. 280 p., 24 pi., SI fig. University Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Jour. Bot. 58: 205-206. 1920. 723. G., J. B. British cytology. [Rev. of: Doncaster, L. An introduction to the study of cytology. XIV + 280 p., 24 pi. University Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Nature 105: 190- 191. 1920. "Not intended as a text book though it contains a wealth of facts; but its aim is to interest the senior student by pointing out the way in which cytology is related to the great fundamental problems at the root of all biological research. — 0. A. Stevens. 724. Carter, Nellie. Studies on the chloroplasts of Desmids. IV. Ann. Botany 34: 301-319. 3 pi. 1920. — In this the last of a series of four articles on the chloroplasts of the Desmidiaceae (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 166 and 6, Entry 1191) the structure of the chloroplast of Staurastum is taken up. In sixteen of twenty-two species discussed there is a fairly massive central axial chloroplast, typically with one pyrenoid, from which a more or less definite lobe arises opposite each angle of the cell. This lobe is forked, and very often the forking is so deep that the lobe appears as two masses or plates arising from the central axis of the chloro- plast. Exceptional cases are found primarily in the larger species of the genus. Thus in S. Ophiura Lund, the chloroplast lobes are between and not opposite the arms of the cell, while in S. Arctiscon (Ehr.) Lund, there is only one projection into each arm of the cell. Owing to the greater size of the lobes and reduction of the central mass in S. sexangulare (Bulnh.) Lund, and S. anatinum Cke. & Wills, pyrenoids are not found in the central mass but in the lobes. In S. grande Bulnh. the chloroplasts are parietal, although in very young semi-cells there is a central mass. Another quite unusual arrangement is that found in S. tumidum Breb., where there are from twelve to fifteen or more chloroplasts in the form of narrow bands running through the semi-cell. — The final portion of the paper is devoted to a discussion of chloroplast division in the whole family. In the Saccodermae, division of the chloroplast starts before division of the nucleus. In the Placodermae, nuclear division is completed and the new semi-cells have begun their development before there is any indi- cation of chloroplast division. Division in this subfamily is not by constriction but by a budding of the chloroplast into the new semi-cell until the chloroplast volume is the same in the new and old semi-cells, when there is a division at the cell isthmus. At the time when the chloroplast begins to grow into the new semi-cell the pyrenoid gives off a small bud which, soon after its separation, grows in volume until it reaches the size of the original pyrenoid. — Gilbert M. Smith. 106 CYTOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 725. Farr, Wanda Kirkbride. Cell-division of the pollen-mother-cell of Cobaea scan- dens alba. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:325-337. PI. U. 1920.— A review is given of lit- erature on cytokinesis in pollen-mother-cells with special reference to cell-plate formation and cleavage. Author reports that in Cobaea scandens alba furrowing was observed in formation of the tetrad, but that the cell-plate was not apparent during cytoplasmic division. — P. A. Mum. 726. Gates, R. R. The structure of the nucleus. [Rev. of: Agar, W. E. Cytology: with special reference to the metazoan nucleus. XII + ^H p. Macmillan and Co. : London, 1920.] Nature 105:482-483. 1920. 727. Gaudissart, P. Reseau protoplasmique et chondriosomes dans la genese des myo- fibrilles. [Protoplasmic reticulum and chondriosomes in the genesis of muscle fibers.] La Cellule 30: 29-43. 2 pi. 1915-1919. — An investigation of the roles played by (1) the reticular or alveolar protoplasmic substratum and (2) the granular elements (mitochondria) in the development of muscle fibers in the chick embryo, each element having been held to be exclusively responsible by different workers. The author concludes "that the muscle fibers arise neither exclusively from a protoplasmic reticulum, nor exclusively from mitochondria or other granular elements, but that they result from the cooperation of mitochondria with a reticular structure, different, at least at first, from the mitochondria themselves. It is the reticulum .... which, in orienting itself, furnishes the chief outline of the muscle fibers; but, on their part, the mitochondria, in fixing themselves on this reticulum, furnish certain substances which are incorporated in it and contribute to the development of the myofibrils." It is not true that "each myofibril is only a modified filamentous chondriosome" (Dtjesberg). — L. W. Sharp. 728. GuiLLiERMOND, A. Sur I'origine mitochondriale des plastides a propos d'un travail de M. Mottier. [Concerning the mitochondrial origin of plastids with regard to Mottier's work.] Ann. sci. nat. bot. X. 1:225-246. 5 pi., 10 fig. 1919. — Author considers as inexact Mottier's view based upon a study of meristematic cells in pea, that mitochondrial elements and "plastid primordia" are distinct and independent entities in cytoplasm. An a priori objection to Mottier's theory is that in animals mitochondria appear to be concerned in elaboration of products of secretion of cell, acting similarly to plastids; and, moreover, a majority of animal pigments originate in mitochondria. Author then points out that size is no reliable criterion for distinguishing mitochondria and "plastid primordia" as Mottier argues. Mitochondria vary in size, and he has observed such cytoplasmic bodies in ani- mals of similar size to those in plants that are "plastid primordia." In general, author con- siders that diverse forms of mitochondria have a common origin and, in particular, plastids have a mitochondrial origin. — J. P. Kelly. 729. GuiLLiERMOND, A. Observations vitales sur le chondriome d'une Saprolegnicacee. [Observations of chondriosomes in a living Saprolegnia.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1329-1333. 5 fig. 1920. — Granules, rods, and filaments are made visible in the living material by staining with neutral red and cresyl blue. The latter differentiates the meta- chromatic bodies from the chondriosomes. — C. H. Farr. 730. Hartmann, Max. Untersuchungen iiber die Morphologie und Physiologic des Formwechsels (Entwicklung, Fortpfianzung, Befruchtung und Vererbung) der Phytomonadinen (Volvocales). Programm der Untersuchungen und I. Mitt.: tjber die Kern- und Zellteilung von Chlorogonium elongatiun Dangeard. [Investigations on the morphology and physiology of variation in form (development, reproduction, fertilization, and heredity) of the Phytomona- dineae (Volvocales). Program of the investigation and first contribution; On the nuclear and cell division of Chlorogonium elongatimi Dangeard.] Arch. Protistenk. 39: 1-33. 3 pi., 2 fig. 1919. — After a short prospectus of a proposed series of investigations on the morphology and physiology of the Phytomonadineae, the author proceeds to a description of cell and nuclear division in Chlorogonium elongatum Dang. The first indication of cell division is No. 2, March, 1921] CYTOLOGY 107 the disappearance of the pyrenoid, while at the same time the nuclei enter the prophases of division. After the nuclear division is completed, cytokinesis takes place at right angles to the long axis of the cell. The two daughter cells grow in length, and then the nucleus of each divides again, the long axis of the spindles generally lying parallel to the recent line of cleavage. This nuclear division is followed by cell division in each of the daughter cells. Hartmann emphasizes the unusual behavior of the pyrenoid during this process, since in C. elongatum it completely disappears during division and is then formed anew in the daugh- ter cells. In other Volvocales, on the other hand, there is a division of the pyrenoid. The restmg nucleus contains 10-20 small granules that fuse to form ten larger granules which are the chromosomes. This fusion of granules is not in the nature of a reduction division. The origin of the spindle is intranuclear, and it frequently has but one pole in early stages. Nuclear history from the metaphase onward is of the usual type. — Gilbert M. Smith. 731. Herlant, M. Le cycle de la vie cellulaire. Recherches physiologiques sur la divi- sion de la cellule. (Note preliminaire.) [The cycle of cellular life. Physiological researches on the division of the cell. (Preliminary note.)] Ann. et Bull. Soc. roy. Sc. med. et nat. Bruxelles 4: 112-117. 1920. — The author has sought to determine whether the permeability of the cortical layer of the protoplasm is constant during the entire duration of the cellular cycle. He has observed that the plasma membrane of the egg of the sea urchin is, according to the stage of the cell life, sometimes permeable and sometimes impermeable to salts. The lipoid state (semipermeable) and the albuminoid state (permeable) of the plasma membrane do not co-exist, but succeed each other periodically in the course of the cellular life. The physico-chemical equilibrium of the protoplasm, and not alone that of the cortical layer, depends in part on factors destroyed by the insoluble substances in the lipoids (perme- able phase) and in part on factors destroyed by the solvents of the lipoids (semipermeable phase). These phenomena are in accordance with the emulsion theory of protoplasm. — Henri Micheels. 732. Kowalski, J. Cineses atypiqes dans les cellules adiposes de larves de Pyrrhocoris apterus L. avec quelques remarques sur le centrosome. [Atypical mitoses in the adipose cells of the larvae of Pyrrhocoris apterus L. with some remarks on the centrosome.] La Cellule 30: 83-119. 2 pi. 1915-1919. — Author describes and figures a considerable variety of abnor- mal mitotic phenomena observed in the adipose cells of the larva of Pyrrchocoris. The ab- normalities are of two main types: asymmetrical bipolar figures and multipolar figures. These result in irregular distributions of the chromatin to the daughter cells, the frequent loss of chromosomes in the cytoplasm, unequal cell division, and the formation of hypo- and hyperchromatic cells. Such aberrant behavior is apparently due to two causes — the asymmet- rical bipolar figures, to the mechanical action of the numerous large fat vacuoles; and the multipolar ones, to the disturbing action of a toxin secreted by bacteria which infect the larvae. Cells showing the abnormal phenomena do not return to the embryonic state or divide normally. — The normal resting adipose cell has large fat vacuoles, comparatively scanty cytoplasm, and from 1 to 4 nuclei. The nuclear reticulum stains very faintly. From 7 to 9 (sometimes more) chromatic nucleoli are present; the total amount of nucleolar material is about constant in all the nuclei. The chromosomes number 24.— 16 of them are rod-shaped and 8 are small and spherical. The latter are diflficult to distinguish from the nucleoli, which appear to contribute to the formation of the chromosomes. — A number of observations on normal and abnormal mitotic phenomena in these cells lead to the following conclusions regarding the centrosome and achromatic figure: The formation of the spindle accompanying the development of the chromosomes is the manifestation of a universal and fundamental condition present in all plant and animal cells dividing mitotically; namely an intense and polarized metabolic interchange between chromatin and cytoplasm, showing itself in the bipolarized arrangement of the fibers of the cytoplasmic reticulum. There are two similar opposed cones of fibers because the metaphase chromosomes are split into two equal masses with equal metabolic actions on the cytoplasm; when the chromatic masses are unequal the cones are unequal, and if for any reason they are more than two in number, the figure 108 CYTOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, has more than two poles. The spindle figure is the visible morphological expression of invis- ible currents of exchange passing between chromosomes and cytoplasm. The aster is a similar expression of a metabolic current in the opposite direction, from the cytoplasm toward the chromatic mass. The two currents meet at the poles of the cell, which are there- fore regions of relative calm. If exchanges between chromosomes and cytoplasm cause a deposition of a visible chemical substance, it accumulates at these regions; such deposits are the centrosomes. If more material is deposited than is used by the cell during division, the centrosome is a permanent organ; otherwise it is not. The centrosome is thus neither exclusively cytoplasmic nor exclusively nuclear in origin, but comes from both as a precipi- tation of substances resulting from the metabolic exchange between the two. Chemical reactions, manifesting themselves in centrifugal currents of exchange between centrosome and cytoplasm, cause the appearance of the attraction sphere. When the chromatic mass divides, a second current of exchange is set up toward the centrosome, and a second centrosome is deposited near the first; the assumption of centrosome division is not necessary to account for the two. The formation of centrosomes seems to be conditioned by the size of the spindle cone, the cone in turn being proportional to the chromatic mass under whose influence it arises. The size of the centrosome is often observed to be proportional to that of the chro- matic mass. The disposition and orientation of the chromatic masses determines the ori- entation of the spindle, and the location and size of the centrosome. — Attention is called to the relationship between centrosome and nucleolus. In some lower organisms a single "nucleolocentrosome" performs the functions of both, whereas by a division of labor two separate organs have become differentiated in most organisms. — L. W. Sharp. 733. Ladreyt, F. La Cellule complexe symbiotique. [The symbiotic cell complex.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris. 169: 665-667. 1919. — From a review of his own work and that of others, the author concludes that the cell complex consists of various elements — the cyto- plasm, nucleus, chondriosomes, etc. — which bear a symbiotic relation to one another and derive benefit from one another. — V. H. Young. 734. Meyer, Arthur. Morphologische und Physiologische Analyse der Zelle der Pflanzen und Tiere. [Morphological and physiological analysis of the cell of plants and animals.] XX + 629 p., 205 fig. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. (38 marks.) 735. Rhumbler, L. Otto Biitschlis Wabentheorie. [Otto Biitschli's alveolar theory.] Naturwissenschaf ten 8 : 549-555. 1920. 736. Spek, Josef. tJber Biitschlis Erklarung der karyokinetischen Figur. [On Biit- schli's explanation of the karyokinetic figure.] Naturvvissesnchaften 8: 561-562. 1920. 737. Spek, Josef. Ueber physikalisch-chemische Erklaerungen der Veraenderungen der Kernsubstanz. [Concerning physico-chemical explanations of the changes of the nuclear substance.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 46: 537-546. 1920. This is mainly, though not exclu- sively, a discussion of Paolo Della Valle's work entitled "La morfologia della cromatina dal punto di vista fiscico" (Arch. Zool. Ital. 6: 37-321. 1912.) The general nature of the nuclear substances, the number and size of chromosomes, susceptibility of chromosomes to stains, division of chromosomes, individuality of chromosomes, and other similar subjects are briefly considered by the author. — John H. Schaffner. 738. Van Hoof, L. La spermatogenese dans les mammiferes. III. Les spermatocytes leptotenes et amphitenes dans le Taureau. [Spermatogenesis in the mammals. III. The lep to tene and amphitene spermatocytes in the bull.] La Cellule 30: 7-25 1 pi. 1915-1919. — Author reexamines the "quaternary granulations" described by Schoenfeld (1901) in the nuclei of the spermatocytes of the bull and finds them to be merely the symmetrically arranged thickenings of the amphitene threads. In the nuclei of the spermatogonia and spermatocytes the chromatin takes the form of irregular blocks with a few thin strands. In the heterotypic prophase the leptotene threads develop at the expense of these blocks, vestiges of which may No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 109 remain visible for some time, and soon take on a more or less definite polar orientation. Lateral pairing of the threads begins at their free ends and gradually involves all parts. The granules or thickenings of the associating threads show a correspondence in position, which gives them the appearance not only of tetrads such as Schoenfeld thought to be of peculiar significance here, but also of dyads, hexads, and octads. As the threads pass into the pachy- nema stage these thickenings gradually become less conspicuous. The interpretation of Schoenfeld is attributed in large part to faulty fixation. — L. W. Sharp. 739. Yamaha, Gihei. Einige Beobachtungen uber die Zellteilung in den Archesporen und Sporenmutterzellen von Psilotum triquetrum Sw. mit besonderer Rucksicht auf die Zell- plattenbildung. [Some remarks on the cell division in the archesporial and spore mother cells of Psilotum triquetrum Sw. with special regard to the formation of the cell plate.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 117-129. 20 fig. 1920.— The cells of Psilotum are specially adapted for cytologi- cal work because of the large nuclei, that are rich in chromatin. The rod-shaped elements of the cell plate are very persistent. In the heterotypic division of the archespore the so-called nucleolar substance could be traced near the daughter nuclei. The phragmoplast can be traced back to the chromosome-connecting filaments. These filaments divide longitudinally, starting at the equatorial plane. At this stage a large number of "extranucleoli" were ob- served. The daughter nuclei approach each other more or less; the cell plate becomes more conspicuous; while its granular contents, the dermatosomes, are very clear. In the meiosis no "radial fibres" were observed. The dermatosomes seem to be used up in the forma- tion of the cell plate, which precedes the simultaneous formation of the cell wall. The homeotypic division shows the same peculiarities. The shrinkage of the wall of the spore mother cell seems to cause the separation of the tetrads. — L. G. Baas-Becking. FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY Raphael Zon, Editor J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor 740. Adamson, R. W. The Bartram oak. Sci. Amer. 122:301. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1564. 741. Algan, H. Bibliographie. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. Economie forestiere. (Forest economy.) Tome premier, deuxieme volume, deuxieme edition. 4^^ p. 1920.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13 : 196-202. 1920.— Nearly two-thirds of this impor- tant work is devoted to a discussion of the history of forest property and forest legislation from the beginning of the feudal period to the middle of the nineteenth century. Forest policy is discussed at some length, including the relation of forests to the public welfare, pub- lic control of private cuttings, public assistance to private owners, forest taxation, etc. The final part of the volume contains a wealth of statistics as to the extent, distribution, and ownership of French forests. — S. T. Dana. 742. Andrews, F. M. Some trees of Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:261-263. 1920. 743. Anonymous. The forestry commission. Nature 105:215-216. 1920.— Outline of program for 1919-20 with personnel of consultative committees for England, Scotland, Wales, and Ireland. About 34,000 acres of afforestable land are being acquired. — 0. A. Stevens. 744. Anonymous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: (1) Boerker, R. H. D. Our national forests. A short popular account of the work of the United States forest service on the national forests. XIV+ 2S8 p. Macmillan and Co. : London and New York, 1918. (2) Stebbing, E. p. Commercial forestry in Britain: its decline and revival. VI + 186 p. John Murray: London, 1919. (3) Webster, A. D. National afforestation, 160 p. T. Fifiher Unwin: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 577-579. 1920. 110 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 745. Anonyimous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: Da vies, J. H. A map of the world (on Mercator's projection), having special reference to forest regions and the geo- graphical distribution of timber trees. Timber map, No. 1. North America, timber map, No. 2. South America, timber map, No. 3. Europe and Africa, timber map. No. 4. Each on rollers 40 x 30 in. W. and A. K. Johnston : Edinburgh. Macmillan and Co. : London. No date.] Nature 105: 579. 1920. — Distribution of a number is incorrect, and names are erroneous or confusing. European larch does not occur, as shown, in the Pyrenees, Apen- nines, Serbia, Bulgaria, etc. Larix dahurica should be L. sihirica. L. leptolepis is repre- sented on Hokkaido where there is no larch, and in Manchuria and Korea where the finest L. dahurica grows. — 0. A. Stevens. 746. AxoNYMous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: Rankin, W. H. Man- ual of tree diseases. XX + 398 p. Macmillan and Co.: New York and London, 1918.] Nature 105: 579. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1168. 747. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Reuss. 37-jahrige Fichtenreinzuchtversuche in Osterreich. (37-year experiment in pure breeding of pine trees in Austria.) Centralbl. Gesammte Forstw. 1916:383-417. 1916.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6:194. Dec, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1607. 748. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Urban, J. Uber die Grosse der Stecklinge. (On the size of cuttings.) Zeitscht. Zuckerindust. Bohmen 42 : 521-526. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflan- zenzucht. 6: 195-196. Dec, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1612. 749. Anonymous. El mezquite. [Mesquite.] Agric Mexicano y Hogar 36: 105-108. 1920. — Translated and adapted from the Scientific American. 750. Anonymous. Le pin sylvestre. [The Scotch pine.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 161- 162. 1920. — Artificial reforestation of Scotch pine can be largely or perhaps wholly avoided by the clear cutting of long narrow strips, lying at right angles to the direction of the pre- vailing winds. For example, a stand with a rotation of 60 years might be divided into six groups, arranged in two tiers and each containing ten cutting areas or strips. The first year the strip in Group 1 lying farthest from the source of the prevailing winds would be cut; the next year the similarly situated strip in Group 2; and so on. Six years would thus elapse between the cutting of adjacent strips in the same group. This should be ample to allow for natural regeneration, which could be still further assured by leaving along roads and the edges of the strips a few seed trees to hold over a second rotation. The system is flexible and can be easily adapted to different rotations and to biennial and triennial cuttings, etc. — S. T. Dana. 751. Anonymous. Resultats des experiences faites, le 9 juin 1920, dans la foret domaniale de Lamotte-Beuvron (Loir-et-Cher). [Results of experiments in the state forest of Lamotte- Beuvron.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 268-271. 1920. — Stumps can be extracted by the use of explosives at a net cost of about 1.5 francs per stump. The method can be used to advan- tage for the removal of a limited number of stumps, but is too slow and expensive for the clearing of large areas. The latter can be cleared more cheaply (net cost about 75 francs per stump), and satisfactorily by the use of caterpillar tractors, which might also apparently be used to advantage for the felling of standing timber. Holes for the planting of large trees, especially fruit trees, can be prepared by the use of explosive cartridges containing small amounts of mineral fertilizer. — S. T. Dana. 752. Anonymous. The fruiting of the Ginkgo at Kew. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1920: 47-48. 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1839. 753. Anonymous. Beschadigungen an Eichen durch Diaporta taleola Tul. [Injury to oak by Diaporta taleola Tul.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 69: 62-63. Frontispiece. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1932. No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 111 754. AxjBERT, C.-G. La conversion des taillis en futaie dans I'ouest de la France. [Con- version of coppice into high forest in western France.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 124-132, 153- 160, 189-194, 227-234. 1920.— The value of the high forest, long advocated by the leading French foresters as the forest par excellence, was conclusively demonstrated by the recent war, during which it was primarily the high forests under state ownership that supplied the enormous quantity and wide variety of forest products required by France and its allies. For both public and private owners the high forest is superior to coppice in the quantity, quality, and variety of its products, in its proportionately smaller cost of protection and greater production, and in its fiexibility of management, which is particularly valuable in times of economic stress. The objection that it yields too low a rate of interest has lost much of its force in these days when timber prices are so high and most other investments so insecure. Some sacrifice of annual revenue is involved during the period of conversion, but this is purely temporarj', can be minimized by proper handling, and really consists of an addition to the forest capital comparable to a savings bank investment. Cultural diffi- culties are more serious, but are due largely to the attempt to bring about the conversion through the establishment by natural reproduction of seedling stands with a regular distri- bution of age classes. — The state forests of Bourse and of Ecouves prove that, at least in the oak and beech stands of western France, the establishment of satisfactory high forests from thrifty trees of sprout origin is not only comparatively easy from a cultural point of view, but can be effected at a considerable saving of time and money. The conversion can be brought about either by allowing the stand of coppice to keep right on growing, with occa- sional thinnings to prevent its becoming too dense; or by making a "conversion cutting" which would remove the bulk of the trees, leaving several hundred carefully selected reserves to the hectare, most of which would be of the same age as the main stand. The latter method has the advantage of yielding an immediate revenue and of affording the best possible grow- ing conditions for the trees left. One area treated in this way which had to be prematurely clear cut 38 years later during the war yielded 4000 francs per hectare, exclusive of pre- vious thinnings, as against an estimated yield of 1200 francs per hectare had the conversion not been undertaken. With suitable species, vigorous trees, and good soil, the method is applicable to private as well as to public forests. When conditions are unfavorable in these respects clear cutting and planting or underplanting with silver fir is usually necessary.— Private owners, who will ordinarily make the "conversion cuttings" from five to ten years earlier than the State, will find it advantageous to leave a larger number of reserves, say 1000 per hectare in a 23-year-old stand. It is usually advisable to remove old reserves already on the ground, not only because of the revenue to be derived from them but because their subsequent growth is likely to be unsatisfactory and to interfere with the best develop- ment of the rest of the stand. In selecting reserves to be retained, the species and general vigor of the trees are more important than their origin. The object of the method is not to obtain a stand of natural seedlings in some far off future, but to effect the immediate con- version of a coppice stand into high forest with a view to securing the maximum yield of timber. — S. T. Dana. 755. Baker, E. Methods of fire protection, with special reference to fires caused by sparks from railway engines. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:414-421. 5 fig. 1920. 756. Baleriola, Caspar. La poda de las morreras. [Mulberry pruning.] Informa- cien Agric. [Madrid] 10:218-220. 4 fig. 1920.— The method of pruning mulberry trees to secure the maximum yield of leaves for silk-worm culture is described. — John A. Stevenson. 757. Barbet, a. Chronique Suisse. [Swiss notes.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 136-138. 1920. — The economic crisis in Switzerland caused by the war still continues, with high prices for both timber and firewood and comparatively little building activity. While forest devastation has not been general, it is necessary to use every means to make the forests more productive. By more intensive management, made possible largely by decreasing the area under the supervision of each forest officer, it should be feasible to increase the annual 112 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, production of the public forests from 2.7 to 4.4 million cubic meters, thus making the coun- try independent of wood imports aside from exotic timbers. The recently created "central forest office," with headquarters at Soleure, should prove effective in supplementing other activities to awaken public interest in and support of the practice of better forestry. — S. T. Dana. 758. Barbey, a. Wald und Schlachtfeld. [Forest and battlefield.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71: 257-261. J+ pi. 1920. — The forest was completely destroyed over large areas, and in other sections there are only dead parts of trees left. In France the estimated areas destroyed include 100,000 ha. state forest, 140,000 ha. community forest, and 275,000 ha. pri- vate forests; also 10,000 to 15,000 ha. in Elsass— a total of about 530,000 ha. (1,325,000 acres). This forest is so completely destroyed by shells and fire that no young growth is coming in. The area is being covered with weeds and shrubs among the tangles of barbed wire and shell holes. Utilization of the remaining dead timber is not feasible in many places unless char- coal industries are developed. Insect infestations are occurring and no doubt will spread rapidly. Reforestation with the species that occurred before will not be possible in some sections where the soil is badly torn up. Such areas may be restocked with broad-leaved species to build up the soil. — J. V. Hofmann. 759. B(ean), W. J. One-leaved ash (Fraxinus excelsior heterophylla). Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 390-391. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1631. 760. Bean, W. J. Garden notes on new or rare trees and shrubs. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1920: 119-124. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1843. 761. Berkhottt, a. H. Het meten der boomen in verband met hun aanwas. [The meas- urement of trees in connection with their growth.] Meded. Landbouwhoogeschool en Ver- bond. Instit. Deel 17: 109-225. 1920. — Uses the standard deviation of individual varieties and of the mean as a measure of reliability. Uses the "correlation factor" in examining rela- tionship such as that between diameter and volume, with coefficients as high as 0.98. Shows the correlation graphically in addition. In some other correlations the values are much lower. "It is indeed unfortunate that in forest mensuration use of probability computations is seldom or never made, for they are especially applicable in forestry."— Carl Hartley. 762. Bintner, J. Silver leaf disease. Stereum purpureum. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 241-263. PI. 8, fig. 1-8. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1936. 763. BouLGER, G. S. [Rev. of: Henry, Augustine. Forests, woods and trees in relation to hygiene, xii + 314 P-, 50 illus. Constable & Company: London, 1919.] Jour. Bot. 58: 157-158. 1920. 764. BouLGER, G. S. [Rev. of: Stone, Herbert. A guide to the identification of our more useful timbers, being a manual for the use of students of forestry. 72 p., 3 pi. Uni- versity Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Jour. Bot. 58: 230. 1920. 765. Brown, Forest B. H. The silicious skeleton of tracheids and fibers. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 407-424. 5 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1057. 766. Burns, George P. Tolerance of forest trees and its relation to forest succession. Jour. Forestry 18 : 610-615. 1920. — A general review of the literature shows a general dis- agreement as to the meaning of the term tolerance. It is used rather indiscriminately in forestry practice but has been tied up with light more often then otherwise. No clear defi- nition has been given and much confusion caused, and the question of what is meant and how it is brought about will have to be solved by forest research. — E. N. Munns. No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 113 767. Cambage, R. H. Notes on the native flora of New South Wales. Part 10. The Federal Capital Territory. Proc. Linnean Soc, New South Wales 43:673-711. PI. 71-74. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1515. 768. Cardot, E. La reconstitution forestiere. [Forest reconstruction.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 121-123. 1920.— The eflforts of the Administration of Waters and Forests, fol- lowing the Franco-Prussian war, to convert the stands of coppice in the national forests into high forest yielded comparatively small results. This was primarily caused by an exaggerated idea of the loss in annual revenue that would be necessitated by the conver- sion, bj' the attempt to use a complicated system of management by natural regeneration with regular thinnings and an even distribution of age classes, and by the many practical difficulties encountered in putting this system into effect. A series of articles starting in this issue of the Revue points out a simple, practical system of avoiding these difficulties and of effecting the conversion with purely temporary and insignificant reductions in current rev- enue. While the author apparently claims the system to be effective only in western France, it would seem to be applicable, with slight modifications, to most, if not all, of the coppice stands in the country. — S. T. Dana. 769. Cheeseman, T. F. Contributions to a fuller knowledge of the flora of New Zealand: no. 6. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51: 85-92. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1516. 770. Cribbs, James E. Ecology of Tilia americana. I. Comparative studies of the foliar transpiring power. Bot.Gaz. 68: 262-286. 13 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1498. 771. De Brun, H. Contre les incendies en Vaucluse. [Fire protection in Vaucluse.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 264-267. 1920.— The application of the forest fire laws of 1893, 1898, and 1902 should be extended to include the department of Vaucluse. Every effort should be made to prevent fires from starting by prohibiting smoking in the forest and by delaying the opening of the hunting season; and to control them after they have started by organizing permanent fire-fighting crews composed of local volunteers. These crews should be specially trained for their work and should be paid by the communities concerned, which should, however, be assisted by subsidies from the state and the department. — S. T. Dana. 772. De la Hamelinaye, H. Rapport du diametre a 1™ 30 au diametre de la souche. [Relation between breast high and stump diameters.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 133-135. 1920. — Measurements of a large number of stumps of oak and beech in the forests of Gers- Hautes, and Basses-Pyrenees showed that the sum of the largest and smallest stump diame- ters, measured at the surface of the ground, was approximately equal to the sum of the cir- cumferences of the same trees measured at breast height (1.30 m.). In other words, the aver- age diameter at breast height in the case of these two species was equal to 63 per cent of the mean diameter of the stump at the surface of the ground. — S. T. Dana. 773. Demorlaine, J. La sylviculture et les chars d'assaut. [Silviculture and tanks.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 235-236. 1920. — During the war the forest of Compiegne was used as a practice field for tanks, the caterpillars of which broke up the ground so as to form an excellent seed bed. As a result the heavy beech-nut crop of 1918 was followed by the estab- lishment of a remarkably dense stand of seedlings. This suggests the possibility of using tanks regularly in beech and oak forests during good seed years in order to stir up the soil and thus favor natural reproduction, at the same time giving the tanks an opportunity to practice their maneuvers under difficult conditions. Similarly, caterpillar tractors might be used to advantage from a silvicultural point of view for the hauling of logs in lumbering operations. — aS. T. Dana. 774. Detwiler, Samuel B. White pine blister rust control in 1919. Amer. Plant Pest Committee Bull. 4: 1-10. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1224. 114 FOREST BOTANY AND FOEESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 775. DoRE, W. H. The distribution of certain chemical constants of wood over its proxi- mate constituents. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:472-476. 1920. — A study is made of the distribution of the groups contained in red wood which yield furfurol acetic acid and methoxy with the object of learning their relation to the constituent cellulose and lignin. — Henry SchmiUz. 776. DoRE, W. H. The proximate analysis of coniferous woods. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 476-479. 1920. — An improved procedure is described for the summative analysis of coniferous woods. Methods are given for the estimation of the following constituents: those lost on drying, benzene extract, alcohol extract, cellulose, lignin, soluble pentosans, mannan and galactan. — Henry Schmitz. 777. DoRE, W. H. The proximate analysis of hardwoods: Studies on Quercus agrifolia. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 984-987. 1920. — The methods previously used for the analysis of coniferous woods were investigated as to their applicability to the hardwoods. The puri- fication treatment employed for the tissues of coniferous woods was supplemented with digestion in cold water and 5 per cent sodium hydroxide solution. Lignin was determined by the gaseous hydrochloric acid method recently proposed by Konig and Becher. This modified method was found satisfactory in every respect. — Henry Schmitz. 778. Dupler, a. W. Staminate strobilus of Taxus canadensis. Bot. Gaz. 68:345-366. S pi, 22 fig. Nov., 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1898. 779. Ehrhorn, E. M. Notes on plant shipment. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 4-6. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1942. 780. Engler, a. Die Vegetationsverhaltnisse des Kongoa-Gebirges und der Bambuto- Berge in Kamerun [West Africa]. [The vegetation of the Kongoa Mountains and the Bambuto Mountain in Kamerun.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 24-32. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1505. 781. EwART, A. J. Contributions to the flora of Australia, No. 27. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria 31 (N. S.): 367-379. PI. 18. 1919. 782. Fankhauser, F. Der Lawinenverbau Mittels Terrassen. [Preventing avalanches by terracing.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 217-230. 8 pi. 1920. — Avalanches occurred quite frequently near Elm on slopes from 70° to 90°. These slopes were covered with unbroken sod which give little resistance to sliding snow. Terracing has been successful in preventing slides here and elsewhere. Terraces were first built as early as 1756. They were constructed of laid walls of rock and were only partially successful. Later walls were built of well-laid rock with widened bases. These were often loosened and torn away in the course of two or three seasons. The best construction has been found to consist of alternate layers of rock and sod, with the sod blocks projecting over the rock so that the grass will grow over the entire wall the first or second season. If the sod blocks are trimmed even with the rock wall, the wall soon crumbles and settles irregularly, because the grass does not grow over it and bind the dirt together. The walls are from 1 to 2 m. wide and about 8 m. high, with a slope of about one- fourth the thickness of the wall. The base is set deep enough to prevent undermining by rain and snow water. The terraces are made as broad as possible, in order to give the snow more level bearing surface and prevent sliding. — J. V. Hofmann. 783. Flury, Philip. Aus dem Gebierte unserer Forsteinrichtung. [From the Division of Forest Improvement.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71:137-150. 1920. — This article is a discussion of the views of Biolley and Burger on forest management and improvement as related to methods of cutting. It is pointed out that the two methods are often confused. Clear-cutting may be advisable for forest management, but it is not always the most desir- able for forest improvement. Also, forests may be successfully managed by selection cut- No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 115 ting, but not necessarily improved. Slope types of fir and spruce are best adapted to selec- tion cutting and natural reproduction, and on the bottom lands hardwood types are better suited to clear-cutting and planting. Mixed forests may be converted to pure beech forests or any desirable species by this method. Annual cuttings must be based on the average increment of different age classes and not on annual increment. An age class may produce abnormal increments for short periods, but cuttings based on this would be too heavy for the entire age class. Hater's formula is discussed in its relation to annual and age class incre- ment. — J. V. Hofmann. 734. Flury, Philipp. Aus dem Gebierte unserer Forsteinrichtung (Schluss). [Divi- sion of Forest Improvement (concluded).] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71: 179-199. 1920.— Cuttings and future yield, based on annual increment, are faulty as shown by permanent growth plots. These plots show wide fluctuation due to weather conditions. Growth was retarded in the dry years of 1904, 1906, 1908, and 1911 and greatly accelerated in the wet years of 1912-1916. Growth classes based on diameter measurement must take the smaller classes into consideration. According to the "M6thode du Controle" where the smallest diameter taken was 18 cm., stands under 40 years old would not be considered. Measurements taken in divisions of 5 cm. are as applicable as those based on 1 cm. and are much simpler. Cuttings based on 6- to 8-year intervals are too frequent, and no doubt 20-year intervals can be taken to better advantage. However, 10-year periods are advantageous in many conditions. Tabu- lations are included to show the relation of various methods of determining increment to the different methods of cutting. The author concludes that the present forest compartments are too large for the most eflBcient management. — J. V. Hofmann. 785. Ghose, Manmathanath. A neglected source of sugar in Bikar. Agric. Jour. India 15: 32-39. 3 pi. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1893. 786. Gleason, Henry Allan. Some applications of the quadrant method. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 21-33. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1499. 787. Greig-Smith, R. The germicidal activity of the Eucalyptus oils. Part 2. The action of the oils in aqueous dilutions. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 44: 311-347. 7 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1282. 788. GuiNAUDEAu, Ch. Souvenir de Macedoine de Salonique a la frontiere Bulgaro- Serbe au point de vue forestier et agricole. [Forest and agricultural conditions in Macedonia.] Bull Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comt6 et Belfort 13: 189-196. 2 fig. 1920.— Throughout most of Macedonia from Saloniki to the Bulgarian-Serbian frontier, trees are scarce, erosion is severe, and agricultural development is poor. Reforestation, restriction of grazing, irri- gation, and the use of modern methods of crop production are needed to develop the very decided agricultural possibilities of this region. West of Vardor, however, is an area which is more densely populated, better forested, and richer from every point of view. Here the development of transportation facilities and the practice of better forestry and better agriculture can make it one of the flourishing parts of Greece and the source of all sorts of valuable products. — S, T. Dana. 789. GuYOT, Ch. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. La foret sainte de Haguenau en Alsace. [The sacred forest of Haguenau in Alsace.] 164 p. 1920.] Rev. Eaux etForets 58: 167-175. 1920. — This work gives a detailed history of the important forests of Haguenau, the area of which (18,000 hectares) has not changed materially since the Roman occupation. The methods of forest management in use at different times are fully discussed and freely criticized. The modifications introduced by the Germans following the Franco-Prussian war are regarded as particularly unfortunate, and as having undone much of the good previously accomplished by the French, in spite of the fact that the methods developed by the latter since 1843 were too theoretical and complicated. — S. T. Dana. 116 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 790. Hall, Thos. D. Food value of willow leaves. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:456-457. 1920. 791. Hawley, L. F., and Calderwood, H. N., Jr. Tar still operation in hard wood dis- tillation plants. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:684-686. 1920. 792. Henkel, J. S. Forestry in Rhodesia. Timber trees in the Umtali Park. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:335-339. 2 pi. 1920. 793. Henkel, J. S. Forestry in Rhodesia. Two useful softwoods. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:238-243. 1920. 794. Hess, N. Experiences in plant hybridization. Proc. Amer. See. Hortic. Sci. 16: 52-60. (1919)-1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1818. 795. HiLEY, W. E. The fungal diseases of the common larch. 8 vo., xii + 20Ji. p., 73 pi. Clarendon Press: Oxford, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1947. 796. HuFFEL, G. Le mouvement forestier a I'etranger: station de recherches forestilres Suisse. [Developments at the Swiss forest experiment station.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 249-254. 1920.— Since 1900 the Swiss forest experiment station has been studying the influ- ence of a forest cover on stream-flow in two neighboring and comparable water-sheds, one of which was 97 per cent and the other 29 per cent forested. Actual measurements show that forest soils in good condition absorb the bulk of the precipitation, which later runs off sub- terraneously; while in soils not so protected there is an immediate surface run-off accompanied by erosion and gullying, particularly on steep, turfed slopes. This beneficial influence of the forest is due to the permeability and porosity of its soil rather than to the great hygroscopicity of the humus and moss cover, which if too abundant may actually, after becoming saturated, have the opposite effect and stimulate surface run-off. During periods of rapid snow melting both the peak of the flood and the total discharge were less from the well-forested than from the poorly forested water-shed. The run-off from the former after heavy or torrential down- pours was only a third to a half of that from the latter. After prolonged rains the influence of the forest depended on whether the soil was comparatively dry or saturated at the begin- ning of the wet spell. In any event, however, erosion is less on well-forested water-sheds, and the flood waters from them, having a lower velocity and carrying less detritus, do less damage. During periods of prolonged drought the stream from the well-forested water- shed never went dry, while that from the poorly forested one often did so for a month or two at a time. All of these differences would have been more marked if the well-forested water- shed had not had appreciably steeper slopes than the other, and if the latter had been completely deforested. — S. T. Dana. 797. HuFFEL, G. Statistique des forets de 1' Alsace-Lorraine. [Forest statistics for Alsace-Lorraine.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 185-188. 1920.— The director general of forests at Strassburg has published a 98-page volume of statistical information regarding the forests of Alsace-Lorraine. Among other things this shows that the forest area of the two provinces on April 1, 1916, was 440,594 hectares, of which 31 per cent was owned by the state, 4 per cent was undivided between the state and a commune, 46 per cent was in the hands of com- munes and public institutions, and 19 per cent was held by private owners. Since 1871 the forest area has decreased 5,673 hectares, or slightly more than 1 per cent. During the same period gross prices of timber have increased 34 per cent and of flrewood 47 per cent, but there has been a constant tendency to include smaller and smaller material in the former class. The annual yield of the forests owned by the state and of those undivided between the state and a commune is estimated at 551,422 cubic meters of large timber, including both inter- mediate and final products. During the war, however, the actual cut and other matters of administration were decidedly abnormal. —